EE Raceway Modeling

Reference Guide

Document Number DPDS3-PB-200005B DPDS3-PB-200005C

Version PDS 7.2 PDS 7.2

Date February 2003 February 2003

Pages 1-594 595-643

Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Intergraph Corporation. Intergraph Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies.

Trademarks
Intergraph, and RIS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. ACE, DBACCESS, DIALOG, DMRS, EE CMS, EE Power, EE Raceway, EE Schematic, EE Wiring Diagram, IGDS, and SEE are trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
 1984-2003 Intergraph Corporation All Rights Reserved Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization. RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software — Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Unpublished — rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

_ _______________
Table of Contents
If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. Preface ................................................................................................................................................. Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ About this Document ............................................................................................................ Ordering Information ............................................................................................................ Additional Information ......................................................................................................... General Conventions .................................................................................................................... Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................. About the Reference Guide .......................................................................................................... Basic Workstation Skills .............................................................................................................. 2. Installation Instructions ................................................................................................................ Assumptions ......................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Upgrading the Workstation .......................................................................................................... Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................. Databases ..................................................................................................................................... 3. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment ......................................................................................... Using the Electrical Engineer Menus ........................................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Enter ............................................................................................................................................. Product Menu ............................................................................................................................... Copy ............................................................................................................................................. Delete ........................................................................................................................................... Archive ......................................................................................................................................... Restore ......................................................................................................................................... Database Utilities ......................................................................................................................... RIS schema utilities .............................................................................................................. Update Project Schema .........................................................................................................

Table of Contents

17 17 19 19 19 19 19 20 20 21 22 23 25 25 26 27 27 27 28 29 33 35 36 39 40 42 43 44 46 48 50 51 52

3

_ _______________
Update Reference Schema .................................................................................................... 4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment ......................................................................... Create ........................................................................................................................................... Design .......................................................................................................................................... Process ......................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. EDEN ........................................................................................................................................... Operating Modes .................................................................................................................. Entering Time in Batch Mode .............................................................................................. Report ........................................................................................................................................... Overview ............................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. Overview ............................................................................................................................... Utilities ......................................................................................................................................... Copy ...................................................................................................................................... Delete .................................................................................................................................... Undelete ................................................................................................................................ Purge ..................................................................................................................................... Rename ................................................................................................................................. Send ...................................................................................................................................... Receive ................................................................................................................................. Archive ................................................................................................................................. Restore .................................................................................................................................. Output ................................................................................................................................... 5. EE Graphics Interface Elements .................................................................................................. Start-up Sequence ........................................................................................................................ Screen Display ............................................................................................................................. EERWAY Command Menu Bar .................................................................................................. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment .................................................................... Identifying Elements .................................................................................................................... Working Units and Precision Key-ins ......................................................................................... Working Units in MU:SU:PU .............................................................................................. Precision Key-ins .................................................................................................................. 55 59 61 63 64 64 65 67 68 69 70 70 72 73 73 75 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 86 87 89 91 92 93 96 97 103 104 104 105

4

_ _______________
6. Workflow and Procedures ............................................................................................................ The Drawing Process ................................................................................................................... System Manager Setup ......................................................................................................... Drawing Setup ...................................................................................................................... Define Systems and Set Active Systems .............................................................................. Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................ Set Symbology ...................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters ........................................................................................................... Set Propagation Parameters .................................................................................................. Place One-Line ..................................................................................................................... Propagation ........................................................................................................................... Sketch and Eden Modes ........................................................................................................ Manual Fitting Placement ..................................................................................................... Seamless Tubing Representations ........................................................................................ Databases ..................................................................................................................................... Reference Database ............................................................................................................... Project Database ................................................................................................................... Reports ......................................................................................................................................... Interference Detection .................................................................................................................. 7. Precision Input Form .................................................................................................................... View ...................................................................................................................................... Maximize/Minimize ............................................................................................................. Cancel ................................................................................................................................... Reject .................................................................................................................................... Accept ................................................................................................................................... Move/Move To Toggle ......................................................................................................... Display Fields ....................................................................................................................... Active Point Coordinates Display ........................................................................................ Justification Point ................................................................................................................. Height and Width .................................................................................................................. Construct Point ............................................................................................................................ Midpoint/Any Point on Segment ................................................................................................. Extend/Reduce Run ..................................................................................................................... Distance and Direction ................................................................................................................. Runtime Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8. Design Commands ....................................................................................................................... Commands ............................................................................................................................ Using the Design Commands .......................................................................................................

Table of Contents

107 108 109 110 110 110 110 111 111 112 113 113 113 114 115 115 115 117 118 119 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 125 126 127 129 129 131

5

_ _______________
When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Place One-Line ............................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Route Around Vessel ................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Insert RCP .................................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Rotate Cross Section .................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Drop Point .......................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Equipment Pointer .............................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Define Active Point ...................................................................................................................... Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Set Active Parameters .................................................................................................................. Steps ...................................................................................................................................... Place Manual Fitting .................................................................................................................... Conduit Sizing ............................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ........................................................................................... Insert One-Line Vertex ................................................................................................................ Place Field Routed Raceway ....................................................................................................... Define Duct Cross Section ........................................................................................................... Place Stub Up ............................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ 131 131 131 131 132 134 135 136 138 138 140 140 142 142 144 144 145 145 146 146 147 155 156 160 161 164 167 169

6

_ _______________
9. Modify Commands ...................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Commands ...................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Modify Element Commands ........................................................................................................ Using the Modify Element Commands ................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Annotate Element ................................................................................................................. Field Descriptions ................................................................................................................. Copy Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move Element ....................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Clone Element ...................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Segment ...................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Move One-Line Vertex ......................................................................................................... Propagate Element ................................................................................................................ Edit/Insert Manual Fitting ..................................................................................................... Modify One-Line .................................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule ............................................................................................................ Combine Coincident RCPs ................................................................................................... Delete Duplicate One-Lines .................................................................................................. Delete Element ...................................................................................................................... Remove RCP ........................................................................................................................ Delete Fitting ........................................................................................................................ Remove One-Line Vertex ..................................................................................................... Minimize Joints .................................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................

Table of Contents

173 174 174 174 174 174 175 177 177 177 177 177 178 179 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 194 198 204 207 209 211 212 214 216 217 219 220

7

_ _______________
Change System Parameters ................................................................................................... Modify Group Commands ........................................................................................................... Topics ................................................................................................................................... Using the Modify Group Commands ................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Define Group ........................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Copy Element by Group ....................................................................................................... Annotate Element by Group ................................................................................................. Clone Element by Group ...................................................................................................... Propagate by Group .............................................................................................................. Place Fitting by Rule by Group ............................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Add Systems Group .............................................................................................................. Replace Systems by Group ................................................................................................... Minimize Joints by Group .................................................................................................... Delete Element by Group ..................................................................................................... 10. Setup Commands ....................................................................................................................... Using the Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Raceway Defaults .................................................................................................................. Define System .............................................................................................................................. Define One-Line Type ................................................................................................................. Set Symbology Control ................................................................................................................ Steps ................................................................................................................ Symbology Control ...................................................................................................................... Set Text Defaults .......................................................................................................................... Set Conduit Sizing Attributes ...................................................................................................... Create Cell Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Create Cell Commands ......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ 221 223 223 225 225 225 225 225 226 230 231 233 239 241 243 244 245 246 248 251 253 255 255 255 255 255 256 258 260 262 263 264 266 268 269 270 270

8

_ _______________
Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Create Model Cell ................................................................................................................. Create Equipment Pointer Cell ............................................................................................. Create Drop Point Cell .......................................................................................................... Model Commands ........................................................................................................................ Using the Model Commands ................................................................................................ When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Lock Model ........................................................................................................................... Move Model Annotation ....................................................................................................... Unlock Model ....................................................................................................................... Annotate Model .................................................................................................................... 11. Runtime Setup Commands ......................................................................................................... Using the Runtime Setup Commands .......................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type Parameters ......................................................................................... Set Active One-Line Type ........................................................................................................... Set Active System ........................................................................................................................ Propagation Setup ........................................................................................................................ Set Active Levels ......................................................................................................................... Display Element Information ....................................................................................................... 12. Utilities Commands .................................................................................................................... Using the Utilities Commands ..................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Toggle Construction Display On/Off ........................................................................................... Highlight Element by Sector/Word ............................................................................................. Highlight Sector/Word With Filename .................................................................................

Table of Contents

270 270 270 271 274 277 280 281 281 281 281 281 282 283 284 285 287 288 288 288 288 288 289 294 295 297 299 301 303 305 305 305 305 305 306 307 307

9

_ _______________
Highlight Element by ASID ID ................................................................................................... Highlight ASID ID With Filename ....................................................................................... Highlight Element by Link .......................................................................................................... Highlight Link With Filename .............................................................................................. Highlight Propagation Errors ....................................................................................................... Display Sector/Word Value ......................................................................................................... Display Element Type and ASID ID ........................................................................................... Display Link ................................................................................................................................. Display System and One-Line Type ............................................................................................ Active Coordinate System ........................................................................................................... 13. Database Commands .................................................................................................................. Using the Database Commands ................................................................................................... When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ Report ........................................................................................................................................... A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .................................................................. Rule Checks ................................................................................................................................. 14. Raceway Processes ..................................................................................................................... Load Database .............................................................................................................................. Batch File Option ............................................................................................ Unload Design ............................................................................................................................. Unload Sheet ................................................................................................................................ Cleanup Database ......................................................................................................................... Create Interference Envelope (default name) .............................................................................. Create Interference Envelope (given name) ................................................................................. 15. Eden Processes ........................................................................................................................... Compile EDEN Symbol ............................................................................................................... Delete EDEN Symbol .................................................................................................................. 309 309 312 312 314 315 316 317 318 320 321 322 322 322 322 322 323 325 326 327 329 331 332 335 336 338 340 342 344 347 349 351

10

_ _______________
Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN Symbol Library ......................................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ List EDEN User Functions .......................................................................................................... Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries ................................................................................................... Compress EDEN Symbol Library ............................................................................................... Extract EDEN Symbol From Library .......................................................................................... Steps ................................................................................................................ Extract EDEN User Function From Library ................................................................................ Edit EDEN Symbol File .............................................................................................................. Steps ................................................................................................................ 16. Integrated Commands ................................................................................................................ Using the Integrated Commands .................................................................................................. When to Use These Commands ............................................................................................ Before Using These Commands ........................................................................................... Group Workflow ................................................................................................................... Operating Information .......................................................................................................... 16.1 Review PDS Attributes ............................................................................................................ Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.2 Reference PDS Model .............................................................................................................. Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 16.3 Window to Named PDS Item ................................................................................................... Options .................................................................................................................................. 16.4 Review PDS Clash ................................................................................................................... Parameters ............................................................................................................................. Appendix A: Appendix B: Error Messages ........................................................................................................... System/Application Manager Information .................................................................

Table of Contents

352 353 354 355 357 359 361 362 363 366 367 369 370 370 370 370 370 371 371 372 372 374 374 375 375 377 415 417 422

Customizing ................................................................................................................................. EE Environment Variables ..........................................................................................................

11

_ _______________
Appendix C: EE Databases .............................................................................................................. 425 426 427 427 428 430 430 430 432 432 433 433 433 434 435 435 436 437 437 438 438 439 440 440 441 443 444 445 446 448 449 449 449 450 451 454 454 454 455 456 457 458 Relational Interface System (RIS) ............................................................................................... Database and RIS Procedures ...................................................................................................... For New Users ...................................................................................................................... Update Schema (create_db) Process ............................................................................................ Reference Schema - General Description .................................................................................... Default Attributes ................................................................................................................. Keys ...................................................................................................................................... Codelists ............................................................................................................................... Approval Status Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Cardinal Codelist Table ........................................................................................................ Drawing Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................... Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table ....................................................................................... One-Line Type Codelist Table ............................................................................................. RCP Type Codelist Table ..................................................................................................... System Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Three-Line Type Codelist Table ........................................................................................... Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table ..................................................................................... Units Codelist Table ............................................................................................................. Vendor Codelist Table .......................................................................................................... Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table .......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table ............................................................................ Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table ............................................................................................ Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table ......................................................................................... Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table ...................................................................................... Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table ......................................................................... Yes-No Codelist Table ......................................................................................................... Fitting Environment Rules .................................................................................................... Project Schema - General Description ......................................................................................... Updating Schemas ....................................................................................................................... Updating a Project Schema ................................................................................................... Updating Reference Schemas ............................................................................................... Schema Names ...................................................................................................................... Modifying the Reference Schema ................................................................................................ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ............................................................... approv_status ........................................................................................................................ away_part .............................................................................................................................. away_spec ............................................................................................................................. cardinal ................................................................................................................................. cond_body ............................................................................................................................. cond_fill_calc .......................................................................................................................

12

..................................................................................................................................................................................................... envelope .................................................................................................... cndsch_spec ................................................................................................................... mscodelist ............................................................................................... ee_cond_x_area ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_config ....................................................................... tl_subtype .............. drop_point ........................................................................ one_line ............... rcp ...................... wway_part ..............._ _______________ cond_part ................. tray_part ........................................ ee_unique ............................................................................................. drawing .............................................................................. ee_yes_no ....................................................... ee_pcbl_volt .......................... ol_type ............................................................................... ee_pcbl_code .................................. drawing ......................................................................................................... EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. pullbox ............................................................................. panel .................................................................... to_support .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Table of Contents 459 460 461 461 462 462 463 463 464 464 464 465 465 465 466 466 467 467 467 468 469 471 471 472 473 474 475 475 476 477 478 478 479 480 480 480 481 481 482 483 484 484 485 487 487 489 491 491 13 ............................................................................................... tl_type ........................................................ drop_point ................................................................................ drawing_type ....................................................................................................................... rcp_type .............................................................. tl_qual .......................................................... ee_pcbl_insul ............................................. manual_part ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. vendor ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ tray_spec ............................................................................................... cond_spec ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ee_pcbl_size ..................................................................................................................... ee_graphic_only ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. project .................................... mscatalog ....................................................................... to_equip ........................................................................................................................................... ee_pcbl_color ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... tl_fit_env ..................................................................................................................................................................... light_fixture ............................................................................................ ee_system ......................................................... cabsch_spec ...................... duct_spec ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ee_units ................................................................................ mscolumns .................. wway_spec .................................................................. ee_pseudo_cable ...................................................

................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................dat ...........................................................................unl Files ..........................................................................................dat ......................................................................... Update Reference Schema ................ ee_pseudo_cable .....................dat .................................................................................. 492 492 493 493 494 495 496 497 498 498 500 500 501 501 502 502 503 504 505 505 507 507 509 510 512 513 513 519 520 524 531 531 533 534 535 536 537 Preparing the Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................................................... mscatalog ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... rule_chk.. Symbol Processor File .......... panel_to_drw ................................ EE Nucleus File Structure ................................................. project ............................................................................................ manager..................................................................................................................................... rcp .................................................... straight .............................................. ee_system ...........................................................dat ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... sys_to_drw ................................. print............................................._ _______________ duct_fill ........................ Sample ................................................................ str_to_sys ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Available Fittings ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ol_to_sys ............................................. Appendix F: EE File Structure ................... EE Raceway File Structure .................................................................................................................. 14 ........... to_support ..................................................................................................................................... Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. report. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation ...... fitting ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... panel ....... rcp_to_drw .............. eden................dat .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Appendix D: Specification ................................ process........ fit_to_sys ..........................................................................................................................................................................................dat .......................................................................................................................................................................... one_line ................................................................................ envelope ..................................................................................................................... rcp_to_sys ........................................................................................................................................................ mscolumns .....................................................................................................................

............................................................................ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager .......................................................................................................................................................................... Set Form ..................................................... Create Schema Form ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Information Output: .............................................. Associated Software/Files .............................................................................................................................................................................. Information Output: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._ _______________ Appendix H: alias............................................ Data Definition Form ........................... RIS Report Processing ................................................................................ Appendix I: rway........................................................................................ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) .......................................................... Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) ............................................ Information Output: ................................ Associated Software/Files ....................................................................................... Associated Software/Files ...... Alter Schema Form ............. Appendix J: Reports ........................................................................................................... Table Information Form ............................................................................................................................. Information Output: ............................... Schema File Form ............................ Alter Table Form ......................................................... Table of Contents 539 543 545 545 547 547 547 547 548 548 548 549 549 549 550 550 551 551 552 552 552 553 554 555 556 556 557 557 558 559 559 560 560 Schema Information Form ............................................................................................................................................................. Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) ............................................................................................................ Associated Software/Files ........................................................................................................................ 15 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................cmd ............................................... Project Drawing List (drwlst) ........................................................................................................................... Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) ...................................................... Drop Schema Form ...cmd file ........ Information Output: ........ Drop Table Form ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Associated Software/Files ........................... Create Table Form .......................................................................................................... Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) .................................................................. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume .........................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Database Edit Functions ........................................................................................................... Index ....................................................................... Glossary ......... Appendix N: EE Configure ................................................................................ 16 .............................................................................._ _______________ Appendix L: Appendix M: RIS Schema Definition File ........................................................................................ 561 565 566 567 571 573 581 In this Appendix ........................................................ EE Manager ..

S. Table of Contents Support For the lasest Support Services information. Intergraph General Information All countries — 1-256-730-2000 Training Registration 1-800-766-7701 (U. Intergraph Directory The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. convenient. If you are outside the United States.com.) Mailing Address Intergraph Process.com/ppo/services/support. use a World Wide Web browser to connect to http://www.S.intergraph.A. please call your local Intergraph office. Only) 1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U. and direction.intergraph. services. Our web address is: http://www.asp. If you are outside of the United States.com. please call your local Intergraph office. up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’s products.intergraph. The most upto-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at http://www. 17 ._ _______________ If You Need Assistance Intergraph Online Our web site brings you fast. Power & Offshore 300 Intergraph Way Madison. Alabama 35758 U.S.com. You can also reach us by electronic mail at info@intergraph.

let us know. Power & Offshore Documentation Manager 300 Intergraph Way Madison. AL 35758 18 ._ _______________ Documentation Contacts We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and other educational media. You can reach us by: Mail Intergraph Process. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentation or where you think more information is needed.

numbered sections. This document is designed as a reference. EE Raceway is a MicroStation graphics based software and lets you design. Knowledge of 3-D design systems is helpful but not necessary. these include Informix. it is organized around the structure of the product rather than presenting a typical work flow. Because the design process is controlled by executing commands. such as vi or EMACS. Also. Information about RIS capabilities can be found in the following documents: Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide About this Document This document contains front matter. It is recommended that you work through the EE Raceway Modeling Course Guide to learn the basic concepts of the product. along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Information about MicroStation capabilities can be found in the following documents: MicroStation Reference Guide MicroStation User’s Guide Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate EE Raceway. Document Prerequisites / Audience This document is intended for designers who have a working knowledge of the standard interactive graphics system. modify. Oracle. 19 . a glossary. appendices. and model electrical raceway systems in a three-dimensional environment. much of this document is devoted to a description of those commands. Use this guide when you need to look up a specific EE Raceway function._ _______________ Preface Document Purpose Preface This document is a reference guide for Intergraph Corporation’s Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Modeling tm software package. Related Documents/Products MicroStation  software is required to operate EE Raceway. you should be familiar with a text editor. and an index. grouped according to function. Currently. and Ingres.

Additional Information The following informational files are delivered with the EE Raceway software in the win32app\ingr\eerway directory. For international locations. Provides installation instructions. Lists any exceptions made to the certification. Describes the graphics environment for the product. menus. Section 5 Section 6 Sections 7-16 Ordering Information To order documents: Within the United States. contact the Intergraph subsidiary or distributor from whom you purchased your workstation. and on-line Help. File Name readme. the files which have been modified are appended to the top of the initial file to provide a history of all changes to the product. This includes information on accessing the product and creating and manipulating product files. 20 . Provides special notices to the customer.txt Contents Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. This includes information on the screen display. Describe the command groups and operating sequences of each command within the command groups. Describes the typical workflow using EE Raceway. Lists the names and dates of the files in the current release.February 2003 Section 1 Section 2 Sections 3 & 4 Provides an overview of the product and the document. contact your Customer Engineer or Sales Account Representative._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For a fixes release. Includes Comments and Trouble Report numbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Describe the product environment. forms.

Preface Typefaces Italic Indicates a system response. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you to scan the document for key concepts or commands. Normal Typewriter Indicates an actual file or directory name. which requires an action be taken by the user. Select first segment of alignment Bold Typewriter Indicates what you should literally type in. which is an explanation of what the software is doing.rpt file. The text is placed in the viewing plane. For example. Choose File > Open to load a new file.dat to load the ASCII file. phrases. parameter name. For example. For example._ _______________ General Conventions This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certain words or phrases. 21 . Bold Indicates a command name. or dialog box title. Key in original. or groups of related information. The ASCII report is stored in the layout. Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message. For example. For example. Command paths are shown using an arrow between command names. Symbols help abbreviate and identify commonly used words.

which map menu selections to key combinations. You can make some menu selections through the use of keyboard accelerators. provides a tip or hint for doing the exercises. ALT CTRL DEL ENTER ESC CTRL+z ESC. Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software is doing or how it processes information. 22 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form. Need a hint — used with activities and labs. then K. Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.k Alternate key Control key Delete key Enter key Escape key To hold down the Control key and press Z. More information — indicates there is additional or related information.February 2003 Symbols This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify special information: <C> <D> <R> <T> Command button Data button (usually the left mouse button) Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button) Tentative button (usually the center mouse button) Note — Important supplemental information. Keyboard Conventions The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys and describes how to use them in combination. To press the Escape key.

dat from the list box. Click Apply to save the changes. Double-click on the file original. In addition. Select the file original. To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute the default action. For example. For example. pressing TAB after keying in data will enter the data and move the cursor to the next field. such as selecting toggle buttons. Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a design file. To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-held cursor button twice in rapid succession. In a dialog box. To key a character string into a text box. Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by picking it with your cursor. For example. right-button chord. Select the line string to define the graphic template. This term implies that you are clicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action. you click the action you want to affect the item. This also applies to selecting graphic elements from the design file._ _______________ Terminology Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins an action. you tentative-select by pressing a left-button. Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse or hand-held cursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system. Preface Double-click Type Key in 23 . you would select items to define parameters. For example. Selecting does not initiate an action. After selecting an item.dat to load it into the new surface. then click Delete to remove it from the directory.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 24 .

Introduction EE Raceway allows you to design. modify. Interference detection – Creates the raceway component interference envelope files for input to the PDS interference detection task. Material takeoff – Extracts a list of material required to construct a raceway model. It describes the basic workflow for creating an electrical raceway model. and model electrical raceway systems in a threedimensional environment. provides descriptions of EE Raceway commands and processes. Introduction About the Reference Guide This document. including: Model building – Uses either a centerline or a three-line component graphic to build a three-dimensional raceway model. You can also use EE Raceway models as background drawings for designs created in other PDS facility design disciplines. EE Raceway serves a variety of general purposes._ _______________ 1. the EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide. 25 . Separate sections outline the preparation and responsibilities for the system and/or application manager. Introduction 1.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These and other skills can be learned in Microstation Training materials: Fit view Window area Zoom in & out File design Compress Update Toggle between virtual screens Turn views on & off 26 .February 2003 Basic Workstation Skills The following basic workstation drafting skills are necessary to use the EE Raceway Modeling product.

2. You must be familiar with the PDS Loader. all projects have been archived. Products will be used with any one of the following databases: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. Download/Install Overview This chapter covers the following topics pertaining to installation/upgrading: Upgrading the Workstation Installation Procedure Databases 27 . The software covered includes baseline and application software. You will need to consult individual documentation for these products for detailed information. On-line Informix. Installation Instructions This section is an instruction sheet both for initial installation and for updating the workstation software. Electrical Engineer (EE) Nucleus software. and EE Raceway Modeling. or Ingres. If you are updating. such as vi. Oracle. EMACS. You must be familiar with a text editor. Installation Instructions Assumptions The following assumptions have been made in the writing of this section. or Notepad._ _______________ 2.

you have three options: — Placing both project and reference databases locally on each workstation. the workstation as server. — Placing the project database locally on each workstation and the reference database remotely on a server. There are several things you must do before loading any software to your workstation. First. For the purposes of this installation. followed by the EE application products. you should load system nucleus software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you must select the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) you plan to use and decide where to locate it on your system. or remotely on a server. A database can reside locally on each workstation. and the server-client workstation. followed by system application software (including EE Nucleus). The chapter also outlines the basic workflow for database setup and refers you to appropriate database documentation. Based on these two setups. it describes the applications software necessary for each of three possible configurations: the stand-alone workstation. — Placing both project and reference databases remotely on a server.February 2003 Upgrading the Workstation This section describes the loading procedure and details the software you will need to operate your system. You must also know before beginning to download products that the order in which you load them is very important. 28 . Additionally.

based on your system configuration. This form expects your user name. The Continue button will remain inactive until a valid serial number has been keyed in. First. 1. including a valid serial number. Installation Procedure 2. Download/Install 3. the loader delivered to stand-alone EE Raceway sites may vary slightly. Once you know what application software you need. follow these steps to download all of the desired products to a Windows NT/2000/XP system. 29 . company. or it may be on your local system. Select Continue when the button is no longer inactive. This may be a networked drive. connect to the drive on which the distribution software resides. 4. 2. and serial number (as delivered). Pressing Enter will have no effect until all fields have been entered. Double-click on setup. Select Continue to invoke the Intergraph Registration Data form.exe to invoke the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. This will invoke the product selection form._ _______________ Installation Procedure This section’s examples assume that you are running the loader delivered with PDS.

If local is selected.) When all information has been provided. 30 . you must provide the name of the server which will be hosting the session. you must key in the path to the location to which you want to install the software. Place an X next to the software you wish to install. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. This will invoke the installation data form for each selection. select Load Components. select OK. Among other installation options that vary according to product.) If client is selected. If server is selected. When all software to be loaded has been selected. you will be asked to select the Installation Type (local._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 5. client. and a local path to the icon associated with the software. as well as path to the software on the server. (Note that the icon path changes as you edit the install path. you must provide the installation path. This will return control to the Intergraph PDS Component Loader. A message box will appear. or server).

Double-click on the EE Configure icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. Before executing the software._ _______________ Installation Procedure Select Yes to continue. EE Readme. you must set the environment variables in your ee. Copy the ee. 2.cfg file that you copied in the earlier step. When the software has successfully loaded. Set your user environment variables. the EENUC (Common) program group will be created. The Reset command should always be used at this point to ensure that the environment variables in the display window are those that belong to the file you just selected. Download/Install 8. Use the browse command to locate and open the new ee. otherwise select No. EE Configure. A message box will display that tells you which products are being loaded. (Your login directory will be fine. and EE Nucleus icons. EE Help. Before you can enter the EE environment. This program group contains the EE Manager.cfg file found in the win32app/ingr/eenuc directory into another directory not in the EE or PDS structure. and not to a previously-selected file.cfg file. 6. and it needs to be placed somewhere that it will not be over-written when you next update the software.txt. you will modify this copied file. 9.) 7. you will need to set at least the following variables: 31 .

select OK to save the modifications to the ee. After all variables have been set properly for your environment. This displays the current value and description for that variable. To modify the value of that variable.cfg file. 32 . then select Set. key the desired value into the Value field. This will close the EE Configure utility._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 PROJECT_LOCATION EE_SCHEMA EE_REFDB DB_TYPE Select the variable to be set. and no more changes are needed.

Create empty RIS schemas. Only after these entries are in the table will the user be able to update the project and reference database for use with PDS. — You will do this through the EE Environment and the RIS Schema Manager product. Also. Databases 2. — For information about using the RIS Schema Manager product. 1. see the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. — Decide where on the system to locate your databases. Download/Install 33 . 2. 4. — Informix users must create all databases in ANSI mode with this release. Download your RDBMS product and the Relational Interface System (RIS) software. — Refer to the Software Requirements section for information on database location options. — See the section of this guide entitled Software Requirements for information about the RIS products. See the RIS Reference Manual for information about this process or look in the RISNOTES*. — For information about accessing RIS Schema Manager. see the section entitled Database Utilities in this reference guide. see Appendix C of this reference guide or refer to your individual RDBMS documentation. What follows is a very basic outline.* file in the /usr#/informix/release directory for details about creating databases in ANSI mode._ _______________ Databases This section provides an overview of the workflow involved in creating a database and schemas. 3. Also. and you should consult your individual RDBMS and RIS documentation for detailed instructions on database setup. In order for the EE Raceway project to integrate to PDS there must be two entries in pdtable_102 corresponding to type_of_rdb_data: 200 for project schema. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager in this reference guide or refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual. Select and install the RDBMS you will use. and 202 for reference schema. Create new databases/upgrade existing databases. — For detailed information about creating and updating databases. see your individual RDBMS documentation for installation instructions and general information about the product.

34 .February 2003 5. — You will use the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment to accomplish this. — See the Database Utilities section in this reference guide._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Update your project and reference schemas. The Database Utilities section contains instructions for updating both project and reference schemas.

35 . All EE drawings are organized by project. The Project Menu and other EE Environment menus provide easy access to all the product functions. To enter the Electrical Engineer form. the Project Menu displays: 3. click Electrical Raceway Environment on the main PD_Shell form. Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment Electrical Engineer (EE) products are accessed through the Electrical Engineer (EE) form. When you key in EE._ _______________ 3. EE Environment A project is a group of related electrical drawings and their associated database which you create.

The basic procedure for using EE menus is first to select an option from the options list.a list of options which require additional input or other selections before you can continue. 36 .February 2003 Using the Electrical Engineer Menus The following areas make up the Electrical Engineer form: Menu Icons .for keying in or displaying data about a project. use standard EMACS commands. To turn off an active option. Message Area . select another option. check with your system manager. For some options you will need to know net addresses for the input data boxes. Options List . Listing Area . and then to select.control the EE form. If you do not know the appropriate addresses. or key in. These options can display additional forms or menus.lists available project and design files Input/Output Area . To edit information you key in to input fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the necessary information in the input fields in the input/output area.displays messages from the software.

The menus will not allow you to perform illegal operations. provide the necessary input. You can monitor lengthy processes by reviewing the message area. Summary The best way to familiarize yourself with the environment form and their functions is simply to practice using the available features. When a particular option is active. all of the available listings are currently displayed. The bar above the arrows indicates where you are in the listing. When listings fill more than one page. 3. If the bar fills the space above the arrows. the item you select from the listing area will display in the appropriate input field. 37 . you are not allowed to print a design file from the Drawing Utility form. and executes the active process. EE Environment Cancel (X) exits the EE application entirely._ _______________ Scrolling Through Listings The listing area in the EE form provides you access to the projects and design files you will manage using the available menu options. you can scroll up and down the list using the scroll bar. For example. operating or error messages will display in the message area at the bottom of the form. Reset returns you to the previous form and cancels the current form settings. and then select Confirm (√). Message Area Once you have selected and confirmed a option. Remember that the basic procedure for executing a given process is to select a form option. Using the Electrical Engineer Menus Icons There are three icons that can display on EE forms. in any combination: Confirm (√) accepts the current form settings.

38 . Archive — Archives EE project files to a floppy disk or network nodes.February 2003 Project Menu Options The individual Project Menu options are discussed in the following sections: Create — Creates new EE projects. if there are more than one. Enter — Accesses available EE applications and enters existing EE projects. Delete — Deletes EE project files._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Copy — Copies existing project files to new projects. Restore — Restores archived EE project files from a floppy disk or network nodes. — EE Product Menu — Displays (and allows you to select from) those EE applications that are loaded on the workstation. Database Utilities — Accesses EE Update Schema utilities and RIS Schema Manager.

2. Select the Project name field. so you are not required to key in this extension. though uppercase letters are automatically converted to lowercase. Create 3. page 553 . Select Confirm (√) to create the project._ _______________ Create This option creates a project in which your design file(s) reside. Steps 1. which itself can span multiple products. For information about creating a project schema. see RIS Schema Manager. You may also want to create a new project schema when you create a project. 3. Multiple files can exist within a single project. The Project name field displays below the scrolling area. Select Create from the Project Menu option list. 39 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Create process. A .prj extension is automatically appended to the project file name when you select Confirm (√). EE Environment Field Descriptions Project name — This field allows you to enter the project name in uppercase or lowercase letters. and key in the new project name. Your project name should have eight or fewer characters.

This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_REFDB. You can override the default selection by keying in the desired schema name. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. and is the first step in entering the Electrical Engineer environment. You may also key project names into this field.February 2003 Enter This option accesses a specified project. Schema password — This field accepts a password for entering the respective schema. 40 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the project and reference schemas. Reference schema — This field is automatically updated with the reference schema name associated with the selected project name. and the schema passwords. This field may also be defined by the environment variable EE_SCHEMA. You can override the default selection by keying in another schema name. You will need to input the names of the project. Project schema — This field is automatically updated with the project schema name associated with the selected project name. if one has been defined. Refer to the section about EE Environment Variables in Appendix B of this document for more information on environment variables. Field Descriptions Project name — This field reflects the project name that is selected in the project listing area. depending on the setting of the appropriate Password Echo toggle. if they exist. This field may or may not display the password once it has been entered.

If no password was defined for the schemas. if needed. Enter Password Echo — This toggle controls whether or not the password is displayed in the respective password fields. The project listing displays. 3. the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the Drawing Menu. EE Environment 41 . Identify the appropriate Schema password field. see RIS Schema Manager. 3. Enter schema passwords if they were created for either schema. — OR — Select the Project name field. The project schema (defaults to project name) and the current reference schema display automatically. You can make modifications to these fields._ _______________ Steps 1. and key in a project name. The EE Product Menu displays. Select Confirm (√). and key in the password. 2. leave these fields blank. For information about schema passwords. Select Enter from the Project Menu option list. 4. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. page 553 . Select a project from the listing area.

then the environment bypasses the Product Menu and goes directly into the selected product’s Design Menu. If only one EE product exists on your workstation. only the EE Raceway product is on menu. available for use. Only the EE products you actually have installed on your workstation will be displayed on this menu. (See the chapter entitled EE Raceway Environment for more information about the Design Menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . In this example. Steps 1.) 42 .February 2003 Product Menu The Product Menu form displays all of the available EE products on your workstation. Select the desired EE application from the Product Menu form. The Design Menu displays.

_ _______________ Copy This option copies all the files within an existing project to a new project. 3. Copy Field Descriptions Copy project from — Key in the source project name (or select it from the list). and key in a project to be copied. — OR — Select the Copy project from input field. 43 . and key in the new project name. this cannot be the name of a project that already exists. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Copy process. 4. Select Copy from the Project Menu option list. EE Environment Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to copy the project. 2. Copy project to — Key in the destination project name. Select the Copy project to input field. Select a project to be copied from the listing area. 3. You cannot key in the name of an existing project in the Copy project to field.

Select the project name from the listing area. 2. 44 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a warning displays indicating that you should drop the schema corresponding to the database contained within the project. Field Descriptions Project name — Key in (or select from the list) the project to be deleted. and key in the project name. Select Delete from the Project Menu option list. If a database exists in the project directory. Steps 1. 3. Select Confirm (√). — OR — Select the Project name field.February 2003 Delete This option completely deletes all the files and databases within an existing project.

page 553 . while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. 3. while selecting Cancel cancels the Delete function. see RIS Schema Manager. EE Environment Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project._ _______________ Delete Selecting Accept on the warning form deletes the project and its database. If a database does not exist in the project directory. 45 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Delete process. a warning displays indicating that you are about to delete an entire project. For information about dropping a schema.

A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the destination node. 46 . Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system to receive the project. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the destination node of the project. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the destination node. The path must exist on the remote node._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The project name is appended to this path.February 2003 Archive This option stores an entire project and associated database on a network host or on a floppy disk. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field.

(If you need more information about the . user name. using the global symbols EE_NODENAME. and EE_REMDIR. EE_USERNAME. and remote directory may be assigned in the user’s . Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information. Select the storage facility for your project files. — OR — Select the Project name field. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Archive process. Default values for the remote node name. you must have a formatted floppy disk placed in the disk drive. Select the Project name from the scrolling area. Archive 3._ _______________ Steps 1. EE Environment 47 .EErc file. and key in a project name.) When archiving using a floppy disk. 3. 4. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Select Confirm (√) to begin archiving. Select Archive from the Project Menu option list. 2.EErc file. contact your system administrator.

48 . The project on the floppy will overwrite the project in your directory. Be sure to verify that archived project will not overwrite existing projects with the same name. A password is required if you are using the TCP option. Field Descriptions Remote node name/address — This field accepts the node name or address of the system from which to receive the project. you can restore a project that is currently listed in your listing area. When restoring from a floppy. Remote path/directory — This field accepts a key-in for the project’s node of origin. TCP/XNS — This toggle allows you to choose between TCP and XNS network protocols. you cannot restore a project that is currently listed in the listing area. When restoring from a network. Password — This field accepts the password (if one exists) for the node of origin. Username on remote node — This field accepts the user name for the node of origin.February 2003 Restore This option retrieves an entire project and any associated database from a network or a floppy disk. You must delete or rename the current project to complete the restore process. A password is required if you use the TCP option.) Password Echo — This toggle allows you to display the user password you enter in the Password field._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

4. Select the Project name field. — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the Restore process. 2. EE Environment 49 . Indicate the storage location for your project. and key in a project name. Select Confirm (√) to begin restoring. Toggling to Floppy changes the displayed form information._ _______________ Steps 1. 3. When restoring from a floppy disk. Network is the default setting on the Network/Floppy toggle. Select Restore from the Project Menu. Restore 3. you must have the disk in the disk drive.

RIS schema utilities Update Project Schema Update Reference Schema 50 . The Database Utilities options are described in detail in the following sections.February 2003 Database Utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager environment and the EE schema updating processes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

RIS schema utilities 3. see RIS Schema Manager. 51 ._ _______________ RIS schema utilities This option accesses the RIS Schema Manager form. For more information. Proceed through the necessary RIS Schema Manager processes. EE Environment Normally this is a procedure for a system or application manager. you must have an existing database and user name. 2. Before using this utility. With this utility you can create. page 553 . Consult your relational database management system (RDBMS) documentation for specific information about database installation. drop. page 553 supplies examples of Create Schema input for several RDBMSs. Steps 1. To access the RIS Schema Manager form. RIS Schema Manager. and maintain project and reference database schemas. select the RIS schema utilities option from the Database Utilities menu.

though doing so will slow processing time. set the toggle to Echo. page 425 . To enter the password. 52 . select the field and key in the name of an existing project schema. You can update the schema with multiple products. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. Application checkboxes – These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. select the field and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. Schema name — Defines the project database’s schema name. Password Echo/No echo — This toggle defines if you want to display the schema password input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Schema password — Defines the schema password. see EE Databases.February 2003 Update Project Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing project schema. To display the schema password input. if one exists. To enter the schema name. For additional information about updating schemas.

page 64 . or export EE_CUSTOM_SQL and EE_CUSTOM_CMD for the customized SQL and command files. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). For more information about operating modes. EE Environment 1.msg). To change the displayed default files.. Sql and Cmd file — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. 4.EErc file. or Batch._ _______________ You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\..EErc file. When Update project schema finishes processing. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox. Update Project Schema Steps 3. see Process. and key in the full pathname for those files. Background. Select Confirm (√) to update the project schema. Select the Update project schema option from the Database Utilities form. and key in the desired filenames. Return to step 1. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining your input. The Update project schema form displays: 2. Set up the form to meet your specifications. Processing toggle — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. the system displays a processing message file (create_db. The update process displays the message Processing . it will display one of two message files to the screen: — If the schema is updated without errors. 3. To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. 53 . select the field.EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\.

Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update project schema form. located in the current project’s /tmp directory.err). 54 . 6._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. You can also access these message files. For more information. using the Output option on the Utilities form. see Output. the system displays an error message file (create_db. 5. page 89 . Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.

EErc file or by redefining the variables in your $HOME\. Processing mode — This toggle indicates the operating mode for the update process. EE Environment 55 . if one exists._ _______________ Update Reference Schema This option allows you to modify the structure and data of an existing reference schema. though doing so will slow processing time. select the field. and key in the desired filenames. 3. You can set the toggle to Foreground (default). see Process. Schema password — Define the schema password. set the toggle to Echo. Application checkboxes — These boxes allow you to select the EE application(s) with which you are updating the schema. You can update the schema with multiple products. select the field. To display the schema password input. and key in the full pathname for those files. Schema name — Defines the reference database’s schema name. Only those products loaded on your workstation will display as options. or export EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL and EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD for the customized SQL and command files. Update Reference Schema Field Descriptions Output file — Defines the processing message file name. Error file — Defines the error processing message file name. see EE Databases. page 64 . To enter information. Password Echo/No echo — This toggles define if you want to display the schema password. To change the displayed default files. Background. page 425 .EErc file. or Batch. You can use individual or multiple EE applications to update the schema. and key in the name of the password corresponding to the schema name you entered. For additional information about updating schemas. select the field.EErc file. You can also update the schema with your own data by selecting the User Defined checkbox. Sql and Cmd File — These fields display the command and SQL files associated with each application. and key in the name of an existing reference schema. The delivered default files are defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\. You can redefine the defaults by editing this . To specify command and SQL files for usr-defined data. To enter information. For more information about operating modes. select the fields next to the User Defined checkbox.

Select the Update reference schema option from the Database Utilities form. — OR — Select Reset to return to the Database Utilities form without retaining the form parameters. the system displays a processing message file (create_db.. The Update reference schema form displays.February 2003 Steps 1. — If the schema is updated without errors.err).msg). — OR — — If errors occur during the update process. Set up the form to meet your specifications. When Update reference schema finishes processing. 4. The update process displays the message Processing . Return to step 1. the system displays an error message file (create_db._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. 2. Select Confirm (√) to update the reference schema.. 56 . it will display one of two message files.

_ _______________

Update Reference Schema

You can also access these message files, located in the current project’s /tmp directory, using the Output option on the Utilities form. For more information, see Output, page 89 . 5. 6. Select Reset on the message file form to return to the Update reference schema form. Select Reset again to exit the process and return to the Database Utilities form.

3. EE Environment

57

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

58

_ _______________
4. Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment
When you select the Enter option from the Project Menu, one of two menus display: The EE Environment Product Menu, if you have multiple EE products installed on the workstation (see Product Menu, page 42 for more information). — OR —

Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment

The EE Raceway Design Menu.

4. EERWAY Environment

The rest of this chapter describes all the options on this menu. If you are a new user, you may want to skip all but the Create and Design options.

Commands
The following sections describe each option in detail and show the menu as it displays when each option is selected. Create — Allows you to create a design file.

59

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Design — Allows you to enter a design file and attaches the EE menus. Process — Allows you to list and select EE Raceway processes. It also processes work on design files and/or databases. EDEN — Allows you to design your own symbols for raceway elements. Report — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Rule — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. Utilities — Allows you to access functions needed to manipulate EE Raceway design, rule, report, and message files.

60

_ _______________
Create
This option creates design files, based on a specified seed file.

Create

When you create a drawing, you are actually copying a seed file (a template). The seed file contains basic information that EE Raceway uses. A seed file can also contain customized information like company borders and logos. EE Raceway is delivered with both a metric (mseed.dgn) and English seed file (seed.dgn). You can also use seed files that were generated in a Plant Design (PDS) environment. EE Raceway will convert PDS seed files to raceway design files the first time you enter the EE Raceway graphics environment.

4. EERWAY Environment

Steps
1. Select Create from the Design Menu. If there is only one seed file, it is displayed as the default. If there is more than one seed file available, the listing area displays all these files. By default, the seed file subdirectory is win32app\ingr\eerway\dgn\seed. You can change this directory by redefining the EERWAY_SEED symbol in the directory or in your login directory. 2. Select the seed file. Choose a seed file either by accepting the default (this happens automatically when you select Confirm (√)) or by selecting a seed file from the scrolling area. 3. Select the drawing name input box and key in a drawing name and, optionally, a file extension.

61

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 A file extension of .dgn is automatically appended to the drawing name if you do not enter your own file extension. 4. Select Confirm (√). The drawing name and its file extension become the filename of the drawing. The drawing is added to the active project. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Create process.

62

_ _______________
Design
This option accesses the graphics environment, taking you into a specified existing design file.

Design

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Design from the Design Menu. Select the drawing name from the listing area. Select Confirm (√). The system invokes the graphics environment. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Design process.

4. EERWAY Environment

63

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Process
This option accesses all available EERWAY processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database.

Overview
This section provides general information about running all processes. See Raceway Processes, page 331 for more information about individual processes. The screen above lists the processes currently delivered with the product. The system manager can add or delete processes from the list by modifying the process.dat file in win32app\eerway\data.

64

_ _______________
When you enter a specific process, an input screen displays.

Process

You must key in any information not already shown as defaults. You can override default values by keying in your own information. All drawings are displayed on the screen scrolling area. An asterisk (*), when placed in the Enter Drawing Name input field, is a wild card character which can be used to list a subset of your drawings. For example, if you enter a*, all drawings beginning with the letter "a" will be displayed. The ? character can also be used as a wild card for a single character. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to execute the process.

Operating Modes
The Processing toggle allows you to select the operating mode for a process. The default mode is Foreground, but you can toggle between that option and the Background and Batch options. A process in Foreground runs immediately, and you do not regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the same window in which you are running the process. A process in Background runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in Batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

4. EERWAY Environment

65

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Entering Time in Batch Mode
If you select Batch mode, an input box displays, allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the process to run. The time can be entered as 1, 2 or 4 digits. One- and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours, four digits to be hours and minutes. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). The suffix AM or PM may be appended; otherwise, a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The system also recognizes the names NOON, MIDNIGHT, NOW and NEXT. Optionally, you can specify a date using either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (fully spelled or abbreviated to three characters). The system recognizes the words TODAY and TOMORROW. If you input no date, the system assumes it should run the job TODAY if the specified hour is greater than the current hour, and TOMORROW if the specified hour is less than the current hour. Legitimate commands include:

0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday

Steps
1. 2. 3. Select Process from the Design Menu. Select a process from the listing area. Select Confirm to invoke the input form for the specified process. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Process option.

66

_ _______________
EDEN
The following screen displays the Eden options delivered with this version of EE Raceway. The system manager can add or delete displayed options by modifying the eden.dat file.

EDEN

Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for straights, fittings, and special parts.

This section provides general information about running all Eden program options. For detailed information about individual Eden options, see Eden Processes, page 347 .

4. EERWAY Environment

67

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 When you select an option from the Eden menu (and confirm the selection using Confirm (√)), an input screen displays.

You must key in all information not displayed as defaults. If necessary, you can override the default values that already display, and key in your own information. Once you have entered all necessary information, select Confirm (√) to begin the option process.

Operating Modes
A box on the right side of the menu allows you to select the operating mode for the selected option. The default mode is foreground. The circular arrow on the right indicates that this box leads to other selections. These selections are the three methods of running an option: foreground, background, and batch. An option in foreground mode runs immediately, and you cannot regain control until the process is finished. In other words, you cannot perform other functions within the window in which the option is running. An option in background mode runs immediately, and you regain control immediately. A process in batch does not run until the time you specify. You must key in a time and/or date when you want the process to start. After providing this information, you regain control immediately.

68

allowing you to enter the time and date when you want the option to begin processing. EDEN The time can be entered as 1. NOW and NEXT are also recognized. it will run the job TOMORROW. a 24-hour clock (military time) is understood. The suffix AM or PM may be appended. The special names NOON._ _______________ Entering Time in Batch Mode If you select batch mode. One. The time can also be specified as two numbers separated by a colon (hour:minute). otherwise. EERWAY Environment 69 .and two-digit numbers are taken to be hours. The system accepts the words TODAY and TOMORROW. and if the specified hour is less than the current hour. If you input no date. Legitimate commands include: 0815am Jan 24 8:15am Jan 24 Now + 1 day 5pm Friday 4. the system assumes that if the specified hour is greater than the current hour. MIDNIGHT. it will run the job TODAY. You can specify an optional date in the form of either a month name followed by a day number or a day of the week (spelled in its entirety or abbreviated to three characters). 2 or 4 digits. four digits to be hours and minutes. an input box displays.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports.February 2003 Report This option accesses the standard EERWAY reports. 70 . See Reports.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). You must load the project database before running any reports. These reports report on the project and reference databases. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports.

Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. 3. the new file will overwrite that file. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. You can change the name of the output file or error file. 2. Steps 1. You should give each report you want to save a unique name.) If you want to save reports throughout a project. select the output file box and key in a new name. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Report option. To change the output filename. Select a report from the listing area._ _______________ When you process a report. Report Key in any information that is not supplied by default. EERWAY Environment 71 . you should name the output files yourself. an input screen displays. 4. Select Report from the Design Menu.

The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. For instance. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output.February 2003 A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 72 .

see Reports._ _______________ Rule Checks Rule Checks This option accesses the standard EERWAY Rule Checks.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk. page 545 . These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. You must load the project database before running any rule checks. For more detailed information about each rule check. Overview This section contains general information about running all EERWAY rule checks. 4. EERWAY Environment 73 .

2. 3. Select Rule from the Design Menu. Steps 1. The name of the rule check report displays at the top. — OR — Select another option from the Design Menu to ignore your input and cancel the Rule option. 74 . If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process.February 2003 When you process a rule check. an input screen displays. or change that information according to your specifications. Select a rule check report from the listing area. you should name the output files yourself. If you want to save reports throughout a project._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the new file will destroy the previously created file.

Each column will list a different subdirectory. 4. the Drawing Utility Menu displays. EERWAY Environment Files in the current project sub-directories will be listed in four columns. All manipulations are performed on those files residing in the current project’s directories. 75 . When you select Utilities from the Design Menu._ _______________ Utilities Utilities This option manipulates files within a project.

(<project_name>/eerway/rpt) Rule (.All report files generated by rule checks reports. Copy — Copies a file. Purge — Purges (permanently deletes) a file.tmp) ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Drawing (. Restore — Restores an archived file from a network node or floppy disk. Undelete — Undeletes a file (unmark for purging). 2. (<project_name>/eerway/chk) Message (.All drawings. 3. Rename — Renames a file. Steps 1. Select the desired option from the Drawing Utility Menu. Receive — Receives a file from a network node. Commands The commands on the Drawing Utility Menu are described in their respective sections later in this chapter.chk) .dgn) . Select Utilities from the Design Menu. Delete — Deletes a file (mark for purging). and then select the file(s) on which to perform that option. 76 . screen. Output — Outputs a file to a printer. and error files generated by standard reports and rule check reports. (<project_name>/eerway/dgn) Report (. (<project_name>/eerway/tmp) Utilities options will operate on all of the above file types.All report files generated by standard reports. Archive — Archives a file to a network node or floppy disk. or plotter.All files output by Raceway processes. Enter necessary form information for the active option. Send — Sends a file to a network node.rpt) .

EERWAY Environment 77 . — OR — Select another option to ignore your input and cancel the active option. Select Confirm (√) to accept the settings and execute the active option. Utilities 4._ _______________ 4.

and so forth) to the new file. or key in the name of the file to be copied. Copy file to — This field displays the name that the copy (destination) file will be called.dgn.rpt.February 2003 Copy This option copies an existing file to another file. key in a unique destination file name into this field. Field Descriptions Copy file from — This field displays the name of the file to be copied. Copy DOES NOT automatically append a file extension (. . 78 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . elect a file from the list. You must specify a unique filename for the destination file.

Note that files you delete with this option take up storage space. you must select the Purge option. To physically remove the file from the workstation. have access returned to them) until you actively Purge them._ _______________ Delete Delete This option removes your access to a specified file. 4. EERWAY Environment 79 . but can be undeleted (that is.

80 . you cannot undelete them with this option. Once you have removed files using Purge.February 2003 Undelete This option returns your access to a file that you removed using Delete._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

place a data point on it. To de-select a selected file. Once you Purge a file._ _______________ Purge This option permanently removes all the files you marked for deletion using the Delete option. you can select specific files from the list by placing a data point on them. When the toggle is set to Select files to purge. you cannot recover it. EERWAY Environment 81 . Purge Field Descriptions Purge Files toggle — This toggle allows you to choose between purging ALL files that have been deleted. selected files that have been deleted. or no files at all. 4.

Field Descriptions Rename file from — This field displays the current filename.February 2003 Rename This option changes the name of an existing file.dgn. You can select the file from the list.rpt. Rename file to — Key in the name that you desire to rename the current file. ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 82 . or key the name into this field. and so forth) to the new filename. It does not automatically append a file extension (.

Doing so will store the file in contiguous blocks on the VAX.dgn). Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. You can either select the desired file from the list._ _______________ Send This option copies a file to a network node. EERWAY Environment 83 . Otherwise. 4. IGDS/No IGDS toggle — This toggle should be set to the IGDS setting when sending to a VAX system. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be sent. Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to send the file. or key in the appropriate name. the setting should be No IGDS. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to send the file. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the receiving machine. If you are sending a design file to a VAX. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. turn on the IGDS toggle. test1. Send Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the remote machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Be sure to include the entire filename including the extension (for example.

You can either select the desired file from the list. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the sending machine. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to receive the file. including its extension. Be sure to specify the complete filename._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to receive the file. File name — This field reflects the name of the file to be received. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the sending machine. or key in the appropriate name. specify the local path to the file. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the sending machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Also. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the transfer uses the TCP or XNS protocol to communicate between machines. otherwise the file will be placed in the <project_name>/eerway directory. depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. Receive will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are receiving.February 2003 Receive This option copies a file from a network node. The password may or may not be visible in the field. 84 .

_ _______________ Local path (dgn. rpt. Receive 4. tmp) — This field expects the path to the desired location of the file being received. chk. EERWAY Environment 85 .

86 . TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine to which you want to archive the file. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine to which you want to archive the file. Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine. page 46 . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active.February 2003 Archive This option creates a backup copy of a file to a network node or to a floppy disk. Field Descriptions Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Toggle between Network and Floppy by selecting the toggle button. The password may or may not be visible in the field. Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the receiving machine. see the description of Archive in Archive. Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the desired name of the archive file. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk.

Remote node name/address — This field expects the node name or address of the machine from which you want to restore the archive file. EERWAY Environment Password Echo toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the password of the archiving machine is visible or hidden upon keyin to the password field. Network/Floppy toggle — The setting of this toggle determines if the file will be archived over a network or to a floppy disk. This option will overwrite any file having the same name as the file you are restoring. TCP/XNS Protocol toggle — The setting of this toggle determines whether the communication between machines uses the TCP or XNS protocol. 87 . see the description of Restore in Restore. Use the Network/Floppy toggle to select between the two options._ _______________ Restore This option copies a backup file from a network node or floppy disk. For more information about the fields that display on the form when Network is active. Remote path directory — This field expects the path on the remote machine from which you want to restore the archive file. Restore Field Descriptions 4. page 48 . Archive file name — This field expects you to key in the name of the archive file to be restored.

Password — This field expects the password that corresponds with given username on the remote machine._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . depending on the setting of the Password Echo toggle.February 2003 Username on remote node — This field expects the username on the remote machine. The password may or may not be visible in the field. 88 .

or laser printer. for example – are not allowed. or select it from the list.dat) controls the available output options. plotter. The system manager may modify this file to add desired options. Output Destination List — Select the appropriate output device. Invalid operations – sending a drawing to the printer. If you do not specify an output destination. the selection displayed at the top of the list is the default selection._ _______________ Output This option sends files to the printer. IPLOT commands. or user programs may be added to support specific output requirements. Local commands. 89 . Output An external data file delivered with the environment (win32app\eenuc\data\print. Field Descriptions 4. screen. EERWAY Environment File name — Key in the name of the file to be submitted to the output process. NQS options.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 90 .

_ _______________ 5. see Document Conventions in the Preface to this document. EERWAY Graphics 91 . EE Graphics Interface Elements EE Graphics Interface Elements This chapter describes the graphics environment you will encounter while working in a design file. It also documents the on-line Help system and provides other general information needed to work in a design file. 5. If you are not familiar with the following terms: command button <C>. By default. This chapter contains more detailed information about using menus. or reset button <R> in reference to the cursor or mouse. You will use the panel menus and the bar menu to select the commands. You can also invoke commands by keying in the command name and pressing <Return>. This chapter contains the following sections: Start-Up Sequence Screen Display EERWAY Command Menu Bar Palettes in the EERWAY Graphics Environment Identifying Elements Working Units and Precision Key-ins All of the EERWAY graphics commands are menu-driven. data button <D>. the panel menu is located on the right side of your screen and the bar menu is at the top.

the system goes through the following processes: Displays all active design file views.February 2003 Start-up Sequence When you enter an EERWAY design file (see Design._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 92 . Initializes RIS with the reference schema. page 63 ). Displays a command window at the bottom of the screen.

contains the following six fields that display system messages and your inputs from the keyboard: 5. Screen Display If you have modified the default application menu configuration file.displays a list of window actions. MicroStation Command Window . press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list. your screen display may be different. EERWAY Graphics — Window Menu Button . 93 . When the correct item highlights. Only the Lower and Sink actions are available from the command window. as described in the previous section.) 1. release the data button. To select an action._ _______________ Screen Display The screen display you will see when you enter a design file is described below. (Check with your system manager if you have a customized rway.cmds file.

The number and name of each view appears in the window title area. — Key-In Field . 94 .displays a system prompt that directs you through a command. 2.displays the name of the current active command. Windows . Working Area . 3.displays alphanumeric values you enter from the keyboard. — System Prompt Field .moves the command window below views and other windows of its own type. — Current Command Field .displays elements as you place them. All your design work occurs in the screen working area. Select the type of command you want to use with a data point to see the pull-down menu of available commands or command palettes. — Command Status Field .provide ways for you to change the way you look at your design.displays startup file information and product name. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Command Menu Bar .contains the primary types of commands used in the EERWAY graphic environment.February 2003 — Sink Box .

appear when the cursor is placed at the top or bottom border. Double-clicking on this button deletes the window. EERWAY Graphics 95 . Minimize Button . the window is restored to its previous size and location. Size . Window Menu Button .enlarges a window to its maximum size.collapses a window. Move Arrows ._ _______________ Window Manipulation Buttons . Maximize .appear when the cursor is placed at the left or right border. Minimize . Restore . press and hold the data button and move the cursor through the list.moves a window around the workspace. Horizontal Arrows . release the data button.collapses a window. Press and hold the data button to change the width of the window as you move the cursor.moves a window to the bottom of the window hierarchy. Resize Borders .restores a minimized or maximized window to the previous size and location. Press and hold the data button to change both the height and width of the window without changing the position of the opposite corner. To select an action from the menu. If you select the maximize button on a window that is already at its maximum size. Diagonal Arrows . the window is restored to its previous size and location. If you select this entry on a window that is already at its maximum size.changes the height and width of the window in the direction indicated by the pointer.provide ways to manipulate windows.appear when the cursor is placed at the border corners.enlarges a window to its maximum size. Press and hold the data button to change the height of the window as you move the cursor. Screen Display 5.provide ways to move and resize windows. Vertical Arrows . Press and hold the data button to move the window. Close .appear when the cursor is placed over the window border. Maximize Button . Move .deletes a window.displays a list of window actions. When the correct item highlights. Lower .

Exit . Bar Commands . selecting File initializes the File pull-down menu. Remove Palettes .Executes the File Design command.Invokes MicroStation’s Compress Design command.Removes all palettes that have been invoked. which allows access to the most frequently-used MicroStation commands._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .Invokes the Integrated Commands menu. which allows access to the following commands: EERWAY Palette .Invokes the Bar Commands palette. when applicable. Each keyword on the command menu bar allows access to a menu of options relating to that keyword.Invokes the EERWAY command palette. you can also access command palettes from these pull-down menus. For instance. place the cursor over the button and press <D>. To select a keyword. Integrated Commands . 96 . and exits the graphics environment to return control to the EE Raceway menu interface. Using the Command Menu Bar The command menu bar is a logical menu. Each keyword leads to a pull-down menu that contains commands for various EERWAY tasks. Compress Design .February 2003 EERWAY Command Menu Bar The EERWAY command menu bar appears near the top of the MicroStation command window.

Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents. 5._ _______________ Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment. EERWAY Graphics 97 . then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu. Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette.

This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. then selecting Palette. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. 98 . Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette.

then selecting Palette from the resulting menu._ _______________ Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify from the resulting menu. 5. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. EERWAY Graphics 99 .

then selecting Palette._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette. 100 .February 2003 Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Modify Group Commands.

then selecting Palette. Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window. 5._ _______________ Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. EERWAY Graphics 101 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . then selecting Palette. Database This palette is activated by selecting Database from the MicroStation command window.February 2003 Utilities This palette is activated by selecting Utilities from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette. 102 .

To identify an element. the point you place to accept the element becomes the point from which the element is moved. The system then highlights another element. If the correct element highlights._ _______________ Identifying Elements Any structure. Identifying Elements 5. If there is more than one element in the location you want to identify. place a data point on it. press <R> to reject that element. press <D> again to accept the element. the wrong element may highlight. In many commands. or shape you place is called an element. Several of the command descriptions include steps where the accepting data point also serves as the placement point. one data point can serve more than one function in the same command. If the wrong element highlights. For example. EERWAY Graphics 103 . When you are moving an element. The system highlights the element. line. you must identify an element to perform certain manipulations.

Subunits. EERWAY lets you key in values (called precision key-ins) as well as place data points. we recommend that you use these default settings: Unit 1 Master Unit 1 Subunit 1 Positional Unit Imperial 1 foot = 12 subunits 1 inch = 8000 positional units 1/8000 inch Metric 1 meter = 1000 subunits 1 millimeter = 10 positional units 1/10 millimeter While these are the suggested working units for delivered cell libraries._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If using this cell library. Working Units in MU:SU:PU For Intergraph electrical designs. but placing data points does not always provide the accuracy you need. the smallest degree of accuracy that is possible in the design file (a fraction of an inch) In EERWAY. if a user-created cell library is being used. predetermined values for working units in imperial and metric projects were used to create the delivered cell library. (See your system manager for more information about the working units settings used at your location. The working unit dictates the degree of accuracy for placement of elements in a drawing and determines the scale relationship of elements in the design. a division of a master unit (1 inch) PU — Positional Unit. called MU:SU:PU. you are not limited to using only them. are established based on the project type (metric or English). Precision key-ins let you accurately place elements by using a working units system based on Master Units. MU — Master (main) Unit of measurement (for example. The following explains the format of MU:SU:PU. Working units are coordinate units corresponding to the position and definition of a point in the design file. 1 foot) SU — Subunit. You must understand the MU:SU:PU system before you can use precision key-ins. and Positional Units. the working units of measurement. You may set your working units to any desired value. Therefore. also known as MU:SU:PU.February 2003 Working Units and Precision Key-ins When you place elements or manipulate them. you can often use data points.) 104 .

105 . EERWAY Graphics XY= (absolute coordinates) To place a precision point. For example. key in DX=1:6.5 (1/2 subunit) = :1/2 (1/2 subunit) = :0:4000 (4000 positional units) 18 inches = 1. key in its absolute x and y coordinates. direction) To place a precision point. as described below: DI=(distance. For example.0. The new point is placed relative to the previous point. key in the delta x and delta y in MU:SU:PU that you want the point to be placed. if you want to place a point 10 inches directly to the right. DL= (delta coordinates) To place a precision point.1:6. if you want to place a point 18 inches over and 18 inches up. There are several ways to key in precision points. key in DI=0:10. You specify a distance and an angle from the last point placed.5 (1/2 master unit) 1/2 inch = :._ _______________ Below are some examples of values and how to key them in: 1/2 foot = :6 (6 subunits) = . The new point is placed relative to the previous point. Key-ins are entered through the alphanumeric keyboard.5 (1-1/2 master units) = 1:6 (1 master unit and 6 subunits) Working Units and Precision Key-ins Precision Key-ins Precision key-ins let you place points accurately to create elements and shapes with exact lengths and areas. or you can specify the delta values in X and Y to place another point. 5. key in the distance in MU:SU:PU working units and the direction in degrees that you want the point to be placed.

February 2003 106 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Preparation for the application or system manager is described in System/Application Manager Information. This includes setting up the design file. Workflow This section describes the overall workflow of EE Raceway Modeling software. 107 . This section covers the following topics: The drawing process EE Databases Reports Interference detection Because the steps of the workflow are covered in detail elsewhere in the document. this section will refer you to other documentation wherever possible. creating a raceway model._ _______________ 6. and running reports and processes on the file. page 415 . as an operator would typically use it. Workflow and Procedures Workflow and Procedures 6.

EE Raceway Modeling software allows you to place one-lines and then propagate them into three-lines or raceways. you should perform these steps in the order in which they are described. This section is divided into individual descriptions of the steps involved in the drawing process. it is important to describe basic raceway concepts._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Typically you begin drawing raceways with one-line elements (one-lines). These one-line drawings are the centerlines of raceways and through propagation become the threedimensional shapes (three-lines) that occupy the volume of the raceways. On the right are the same elements after propagation. In general. The following steps comprise the drawing process and this section: System manager setup Drawing setup Place one-lines Propagation 108 .February 2003 The Drawing Process Before outlining a typical workflow for drawing a raceway. The figure below displays one-line elements on the left.

Your system manager should also tell you the project name and design filename. using the Set Raceway Defaults command (see the section entitled Setup Commands for information about this command)._ _______________ System Manager Setup System Manager Setup 6. 109 . and vendor names) and the desired systems and one-line types to the reference database (see Specification. The system manager must also add vendor catalogs (parts. for example). Workflow Before you begin an individual drawing. see the appendix entitled System/Application Manager Information and the section entitled Installation Instructions. You can review the default and parameters settings while in the design file. specifications. the system/application manager should determine the defaults and parameters that will affect your project and drawing (tray sizes. page 507 for information about adding specifications to the database). For additional system manager information.

See Set Active One-Line Type. If you need one-line types that are not available to you. page 264 for more information. You can change the active system throughout the design session. You can also review and modify the default symbology settings with this command. If you need systems not available to you. Use the Symbology Control command to review and modify the symbology settings for those systems and one-line types you selected with the Set Symbology Control command. The command displays all one-line types available in the reference database. 110 .February 2003 Drawing Setup Define Systems and Set Active Systems Every one-line type is part of a system that reflects the purpose of the raceway. you must have at least one one-line type defined and active in order to draw raceways. The command displays all systems available in the reference database. Doing so involves two commands: Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control. ask the system manager to add them to the reference database. Then. See Symbology Control. you can change the default symbology settings for them. Use the Define System command to define your system(s) for the design file from the reference database. Use the Define One-Line Type command to define one-line types for the design file from the reference database. See Set Active System. See Define System. Use the Set Symbology Control command to define the matrix of systems and one-line types for the design’s symbology control. Then. See Set Symbology Control. You must have at least one raceway system defined and active in the design file. page 260 for more information. use the Set Active System command to specify the system you want active as you are drawing raceways. ask the system manager to add them to reference database. You can change the active one-line type throughout your drawing session. See Define One-Line Type. Set Symbology Once you have defined your systems and one-line types._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Define One-Line Type and Set Active One-Line Type Just as you must define systems from the reference database in the design file and set an active system. page 295 for more information. use the Set Active One-Line Type command to specify the one-line type you want active as you are drawing raceways. page 294 for more information. page 262 for more information. page 258 for more information.

Workflow Each one-line type has its own set of parameters or catalogs. As you place one-line segments. page 297 for more information. 111 . you should review the active propagation parameters. See Propagation Setup._ _______________ Set Active Parameters Drawing Setup 6. you are also placing the data associated with that one-line type in the reference database into the design file for loading later into the project database. Set Propagation Parameters Before you propagate one-lines in your model. and whether or not certain commands will automatically propagate one-lines. what one-lines will be propagated. These parameters determine how the system defines fittings. page 289 for more information. To review and modify this data you will use the Set Active One-Line Parameters command. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. To review and modify these parameters you will use the Propagation Setup command.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . A run is a group of connected segments that do not branch or change specification. 112 . page 119 for more information on these commands. The following figure displays the parts of a run. initially in phantom mode. page 132 . using the Place One-Line or Place Manual Fitting commands. and Precision Input Form. first place one-line segments (centerlines) in connected groups called runs. placing tentative segments. regardless of type. To draw a raceway. page 147 . a phantom run disappears. it becomes a permanent part of the design file (unless you later choose to delete it). Each run has a cross section on each end depicting the type of raceway and its orientation (for trays and wireways). until you accept them with the Accept option on the Precision Input form. and the Precision Input form. you can continue placing one-lines. An accepted run has a Raceway Connect Point (RCP) attached to each end of the run. Place Manual Fitting. See Place One-Line. page 129 for a description of the Place One-Line command. See Design Commands. Once you place and accept a run. If not accepted.February 2003 Place One-Line You will place all one-lines. When you accept the run.

This radius is used to propagate fittings between straight segments. All special fittings (conduit bodies. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the specification information. Sketch is the quicker mode of propagation for two reasons. Manual Fitting Placement You can place fittings manually in the design file using the Place Manual Fitting command. where two tray sections come together at a 90 degree angle. Sketch: In sketch mode. For example. page 194 for more information. and transition information stored for the one-lines and RCPs. you can define the fitting through Eden. the three-line element’s shape is determined by the one-line type (tray. While this mode of propagation is considerably slower than sketch. Propagation 6. The default fitting radius determines the radius of any bends between raceway segments. For example. EE Raceway provides rounded tray elbows. To convert this onedimensional view of the raceway to a three-dimensional view. the specification dimensions and part information are sent to the Eden symbol library where the symbol is generated. for example). Eden propagation allows you greater detail and accuracy in three-dimensional fitting design. and the width and height (or diameter) of a segment are determined by the active parameters when you placed the one-line. The length of each three-line segment is determined by the length of the one-line. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. You can use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. The system analyzes the environment in which the one-lines meet when determining the type of fitting to place. propagation will automatically sketch a 90 degree elbow. When you propagate a one-line segment into a three-line element. the three-dimensional elements are drawn in-line without accessing the Eden symbol library. For example. pullboxes. Once found. extension. page 147 for more information. it allows you to define the shape of your fittings. see Place Manual Fitting. 113 . Workflow Sketch and Eden Modes There are two modes of propagation in EE Raceway: Sketch and Eden. Eden: In Eden mode._ _______________ Propagation A one-dimensional raceway is composed of one-line segments. see Propagate Element. one-lines are propagated into three-lines based on the cross section and the radius. It then searches the database for the appropriate part for the proper specification. all information necessary for sketching the three-line is stored in the design file. and light fixtures) must be placed manually. Second. unusual angles. This may be particularly useful for later interference detection. so reference database access is not required. or fitting-to-fitting placement. If you require mitred elbows for production. Sketch propagation places the sketched fittings based on the environment in which the onelines come together. use the Propagate command. First.

page 377 . thus displaying a more realistic graphical representation of seamless tubing. To highlight errors that occur during propagation. regardless of the active propagation mode._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and specification. Any repropagation of such fittings will yield the same Eden symbols as well. You can turn off the one-line levels for display and plotting purposes. the one-line elements remain in the design file. 114 . select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. the propagation mode must be set to sketch. the corners that do not have an RCP display circles that make the bent conduit look like an elbow. In order for the circles to be placed on level 63. page 314 . see Error Messages. definition. You have the option of hiding these circles by turning off level 63.February 2003 Fittings placed through the manual placement command are Eden symbols. see Highlight Propagation Errors. For a detailed description of these error messages. After propagation (whether performed in sketch or Eden mode). This ensures that fittings will always be repropagated with the same orientation. Seamless Tubing Representations In the following three-line representation of a bent conduit.

The form that displays with this command contains the reference database key value in a separate field below the annotation input area (see Annotate Element. you can report on this information using the reports available through the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. The Raceway parameter information is supplied from the vendor catalog in the reference database._ _______________ Databases A basic understanding of EE Raceway databases is necessary for efficient use of the software. The override key gives you the ability to add to and/or modify default database information for RCPs. three-lines. Override Keys EE Raceway supports EE reference database override keys. The override key acts as a pointer to a row of data in the EE reference database. Once the project database is loaded. Much of this annotation is repetitious and not unique to any element in the drawing. one-lines. can now be overridden by specifying another valid database key. title blocks) in each drawing in a project. supplied by the reference database. For the purposes of this discussion. (The system manager may customize these values. 115 . and title blocks. The default annotation information. using the annotation forms. one-lines. The reference database automatically supplies default annotation values for the project database. The project database is normally created when the project is created. three-lines. Databases 6. Project Database The project database contains information about all the particular elements (RCPs. three-lines. The default annotation can be associated with RCPs. The Annotate Element command is used to place and modify the override key linkages.) You can also add this information to this drawing using the Annotate Element command. one-lines. (The project database can be created any time before the Load Database process is run. page 178 ). the default can be unique for each title block cell. a database is a collection of information about raceway models. The EE Raceway reference database provides a simple method for generating this repetitious annotation. Workflow Reference Database A large amount of annotation is used in raceway models. For title blocks. There are two databases that can be associated with your drawing: the reference database and the project database. You can both key in override values and display different annotation information.) It will contain information about a particular drawing only after the Load Database process has been run on that drawing. and title blocks.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a distinction is now made between schema and database. and also identifies which users will be allowed to use the database. 116 .) are stored. The database is the file where the non-graphic drawing data (onelines. three-lines.February 2003 With the addition of RIS to the EE Raceway product. etc. A schema is a RIS-specific file that contains a description of the columns and tables of the database.

_ _______________ Reports Reports 6. These reports run on the project and reference databases. See Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. Workflow Currently. 117 . page 545 . You can access these reports from the EE Raceway Drawing Menu by selecting the Report option. there are several reports delivered with the EE Raceway Modeling software: four standard reports and a rule check report. see Reports. For more detailed information about the individual reports. page 59 for general information about running reports.

the EE Raceway Modeling product creates an envelope file for input to the Plant Design interference detection task. This process reads the design file and then creates a data file that contains envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). 118 . You will use the Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process to create the envelope file needed for interference detection. page 342 for more information about the Interference Detection process. However. See Create Interference Envelope (default name)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Interference Detection Interference detection is processed through Plant Design software.

Specify a series of coordinate changes to move. Precision Input Form This chapter describes all the options available on the precision input form and how to use them. page 415 for instructions about changing the form design. When you select a command from the menu. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway. a precision input form displays and remains in view as long as you are working in the command. Since you will use the form with a number of commands. 119 . refer to the individual command sections for a description of operating sequences. For each command. the form displays the active command name as its title. Precision Input Form 7. Precision Input Identify an absolute point Specify a delta coordinate to move. This section describes each button and field available on the precision input form. The precision input form is used to: Accept/reject/cancel in response to the active prompt._ _______________ 7. Specify an absolute coordinate to move. See System/Application Manager Information.

The orientation of elements is most visible when placing annotation. In most cases. To change the displayed working view. Accept Enters an affirmative response to an active prompt. select the field. and scroll through the available views until the appropriate view displays. Cancel Terminates the active command. Pressing <D> in a view for the placement of points simultaneously overrides the active view setting. It can also reset a current command action by one step. In most cases. Maximize/Minimize Enlarges the form to its maximum size or reduces the form to its normal size. You can exit a command at any point by selecting Cancel. 120 . Reject Enters a negative response to an active prompt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Reject performs the same actions as pressing <R>. while collapsing the precision input form. and prompts the system to continue to the next step. Accept performs the same actions as pressing <D>. It also accepts any information you have entered through the form.February 2003 View This field displays the active working view. The displayed view determines the orientation of the elements you are placing in the design.

by selecting North and keying in 20. you move to a point that is at coordinate 20 (in master units) in the north direction. Active Point Coordinates Display The Active Point Coordinates display shows the coordinates of the active segment point. Using Move. For example. The coordinates display in the following order: East/West North/South Elevation The following two options are only available when placing ductbanks. Using Move To. The top field displays the active system and one-line type. by selecting North and keying in 20. while only Move To accepts a data point for input. you will select a directional button and key in a distance to place a point. 7. and direction. you will select a directional button and key in an absolute coordinate. Precision Input Form The Move (delta move) toggle allows you to specify the distance and direction to place an active point. Precision Input The Move To (absolute move) toggle allows you to place an active point at an exact coordinate. you move to a point that is 20 master units north of the original active point. The middle field displays the active one-line type specification description. Display Fields Displays some of your active parameters and general messages. A set of directional buttons accompanies each option. Both options accept key-in for distance. 121 . The bottom field displays various precision input messages._ _______________ Move/Move To Toggle Used to specify a delta distance or absolute coordinates. For example.

By using the justification point and the height and width option described below. 122 . Height and Width These fields are used to define a ductbank element’s dimensions during placement. and lower right. you can build duct bank elements similar to the one shown below.February 2003 Justification Point The justification point defines the location of the three-line duct bank graphic in relation to the one-line graphic. lower center. Three justification points are available: lower left._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

If you do select Accept. Activate the Any Point option. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Identify the one-line segment on which you intend to place a point. a toggle displays with the following options: The Midpoint option finds the midpoint of a specified one-line. When you select the command. You may place as many points as you want in this mode. Precision Input 123 . and return to the previous step to identify another one-line. you can route segments nonorthogonally. — OR — Press <R> to reject the segment. only the coordinates of the last point you placed are accepted by the command. The Any Point option allows you to identify either end of a segment and then specify a distance along that segment at which to place a point. When you identify a one-line. Select the Midpoint/Any Point command on the precision input form. The command highlights one of the segment’s endpoints._ _______________ Construct Point This command specifies a series of movement options before accepting the shortest distance to the displayed location. 2. Selecting the Reject button discontinues the command and returns you to the last point you placed before entering Construct Point mode. and set the toggle to Any Point if it is not already active. but they are only tentative until you select the Accept button. The command highlights the identified segment. Construct Point Midpoint/Any Point on Segment This command identifies a midpoint or any point on a segment at which to place an active point. Raceway one line Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line segment. 3. the option calculates and then enters its midpoint. 7. The operating sequence for the Any Point option is: 1. In Construct Point mode.

— OR — Press <R> to highlight the other segment endpoint. moving in the direction of the segment. 124 . — OR — Select Accept to enter the active endpoint._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If the specified distance exceeds the length of the one-line. — OR — Press <R> to return to Step 2. and then press <D> to accept it as the reference point. the command still calculates the point from the endpoint. Accept/reject end point Press <D> to accept the highlighted endpoint as your reference point. and select Accept. The command calculates the distance from the endpoint and then enters the point on the segment. 5.February 2003 4. Specify Distance Key in the distance from the reference point to the point you want to enter.

The command accepts as values the height and width of the active one-line type (as defined in its specification). Only after you select Accept will the system extend the run by the displayed distance. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the upcoming run by the displayed distance. Precision Input 125 . When you select the Distance button. When you select the Height or Width buttons. When you select the Height or Width buttons. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. You cannot use this command to place a first point. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. When you select the command._ _______________ Extend/Reduce Run Extend/Reduce Run The Extend/Reduce Run command allows you to extend or reduce the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. Only after you select Accept will the system extend the upcoming run by the displayed distance. When you select the Distance button. the Full/Half toggle displays. Using the toggle. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to extend the run. the Full/Half toggle displays. The distance you key in displays at the bottom of the form. you must key in a value by which to extend the run. the following toggles display: The Extend Run toggle allows you to increase the length of an upcoming run by the value you specify. Only after you select Accept will the system reduce the run by the displayed distance. or half the height/width of the active one-line type as the distance by which to reduce the run. You must already have defined an active point to establish the active direction before using Extend/Reduce Run. you can enter the full height/width of the active one-line type. The distance displays at the bottom of the form. 7. Using the toggle. you must key in a value by which to reduce the run. The distance you key in displays in master units at the bottom of the form. or any distance you key in. The Reduce Run toggle allows you to reduce the length of an upcoming segment by the value you specify.

Move to ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .These options define the change in the selected coordinate for the point in the direction entered. The coordinates of the active point and the angles of the active direction are displayed on the form.The direction is defined by the active horizontal and vertical angles initially displayed.Define the true length from the active point in the direction to be defined.These options define the absolute coordinate for the point in the direction to be defined. 126 . Select the Distance and Direction command from the main precision input form. Select the direction and key in the absolute coordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate. Negative values are acceptable. Angles . You can define direction by keying in values for horizontal and vertical angles. 2. You can define distance with this command using the Move To and Move toggles or by specifying the true length from an active point. The Distance and Direction form displays. Move . Specify Distance/Direction You can define the distance in one of three ways: Distance .February 2003 Distance and Direction The Distance and Direction command specifies the distance and direction from an active point to place a point or vertex. You can define the direction from the active point one of two ways: Active Direction . Steps 1. 3.Key in the horizontal angle and the vertical angle in decimal degrees.

The horizontal angle can be measured clockwise or counterclockwise. the horizontal angle starts at the east coordinate (zero degrees). the horizontal angle starts at the North coordinate (zero degrees). — OR — Select the Cancel button to terminate the active command. Accept/Reject Distance and Direction Select the Process button to accept the displayed distance and direction and return to the main Precision Input form. If counterclockwise. This option is set in the PDS product. The default setting is clockwise. 127 . page 287 for more information on the available commands. modify. 4. 7._ _______________ Distance and Direction The direction is always determined by both the horizontal and the vertical angles. If clockwise. The vertical angle is measured up or down from the horizontal plane of the active point. Precision Input Runtime Setup The Runtime Setup command is used to define. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. See Runtime Setup Commands. — OR — Select the Reset button or press <R> to reject the distance and direction option and return to the main Precision Input form.

February 2003 128 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Design 129 . then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. Route Around Vessel — Routes elements parallel to an arc. The commands on this palette place raceway elements – one-lines. Commands Place One-Line — Places the centerlines of raceway elements. and equipment pointer symbols – in the design file._ _______________ 8. rotate cross sections. There are also commands available for routing one-lines around vessels and for inserting vertices in an existing one-line. You can also use these commands to enter an active point. and right cylinder. Define Active Point — Places an active point in the design file. raceway connect points (RCPs). drop points. circle. Design Commands Design Commands The Design palette is activated by selecting Design from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Insert RCP — Places a raceway connect point (RCP) in your raceway model. Rotate Cross Section — Rotates a cross section at the current cross section angle. Place Manual Fitting — Places a manual fitting in the design file at the specified orientation and location. Place Drop Point — Places a drop point symbol in the design file. manual fittings. Set Active Parameters — Sets the active parameters in the design file based on an identified one-line or RCP. and size conduit and duct banks. change the active design parameters. 8. Place Equipment Pointer — Places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file.

Place Field Routed Raceway — Places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment. Place Stub Up — Places conduit stub ups from an underground ductbank. 130 . Define Duct Cross Section — Defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit for an underground conduit duct bank. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer.February 2003 Conduit Sizing — Sizes conduit by "placing" cables in the conduit to determine the percent fill._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Insert One-Line Vertex — Places a vertex in an existing one-line.

because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. You must have conduit one-lines placed in the design file before you can use the Conduit Sizing command._ _______________ Using the Design Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. Likewise. page 119 . Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. Design You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Design commands. 8. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 131 . See Setup Commands. For detailed information about precision input. you must have ductbank one-lines placed before you can use the Define Duct Cross Section command. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. see Precision Input Form. Using the Design Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file.

One-line routes begin and terminate with a raceway connect point (RCP). while the active system determines the system to which the one-line belongs. the system places a new RCP and routes the one-line from/to the RCP. Active raceway parameters supply the default data associated with each one-line segment as you sketch. This allows you to use the existing RCP as a beginning and/or termination point. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. Drop points establish connectivity between one-lines and RCPs where they are of different one-line types. one-line type. Connect will place a drop point cell on the identified one-line at the point of identification. Any one-line segment you are placing in space. based on every possible combination of routing options. Attach to RCP — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. you can resume routing an existing one-line. You can also combine two existing one-line segments using Continue. RCPs are required when you are changing the system. you can attach to an existing RCP. or specifications of a one-line. Connect to One-Line — If you identify either a one-line or an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. unattached to another element. One-line types with lower priority can only connect to one-line types with higher priority. is new. Continue One-Line — If you identify an RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. then connect will not be an option._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The values are defined by the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. one-line type.February 2003 Place One-Line This command places the centerlines of raceway elements based on points you give it. These two segments will retain the systems. The chart below illustrates the parameters that are assigned to one-lines as you place or modify them. or when you place a fitting. raceway parameters. If the priority levels are equal between one-line types. 132 . the system places a new RCP and breaks the existing one-line into two one-line segments. The active one-line type determines the type of one-line you place (tray. The following list describes each routing option in detail: New RCP — If you do not identify a one-line or RCP for the beginning and/or termination point. Whenever you begin or terminate a one-line segment. you will have at least one of five possible routing options. and annotation of the original one-line. you can connect to an existing one-line. Break One-Line — If you identify a one-line for the beginning and/or termination point. and so forth). conduit.

You can attach to or continue manually placed straights. First — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the first one-line you identified. then the command places a new RCP by default. If the beginning or termination action is break. the command will not allow the continue option. Design 133 . This allows RCPs to be placed on top of one another without establishing connectivity. 8. then the identified one-line must be of the same one-line type as the active one-line type. though it is not a recommended practice. If the beginning or termination action is break. Last — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the parameters of the last one-line you identified. or continue. If you reject all routing options for the beginning and/or termination points of a oneline. then the two identified one-lines must have all systems in common. then the identified one-line or RCP must have at least one system in common with the active systems. attach. You should keep the following points in mind when using the Place One-Line command: If an RCP on the end of a one-line belongs to a manual fitting._ _______________ Place One-Line In the above chart: Active — Indicates that the one-line you are placing is assigned the active raceway parameters. or continue. If the beginning and termination actions are continue. attach.

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Steps 1. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command. route one-lines. Begin entering points to sketch the one-lines. See Set Active One-Line Type and Set Active System in Runtime Setup Commands. You must set an active one-line type and system in the design file. see Precision Input Form. The Place One-Line precision input form displays. In addition. 3. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the cross section rotation. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input. 4._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. Refer to the description of routing options at the beginning of this section to determine proper routing. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. 134 . Data Point Accepts. and exit a command. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. 2. reset a command action. page 256 ). page 119. The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. and return to step 2. Complete the routing. The system places cross sections and RCPs (if they do not already exist) on the ends of the one-line. you should be familiar with the Set Raceway Defaults command (see Set Raceway Defaults. Using the form. prompting you to Enter first data point. Select the Place One-Line command. page 287 .

_ _______________ Route Around Vessel Route Around Vessel This command routes the active one-line type around a vessel (represented by an arc. 8. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. circle. or part of a cell. The route is attached to two terminating RCPs which may or may not have a fitting on them. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 135 . Wye and tee fittings cannot be used. see Precision Input Form. The arc. Design Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. or right cylinder) selected in either the active or reference design file. page 119. reset a command action. or right cylinder element can be a single MicroStation element. the route will come off the RCP at a 90 degree angle to the one-line. accept input. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. you can locate elements. If the RCP does not have a fitting. A fitting on the RCP can only have two attach points. circle. route one-lines. the fitting angle will be used when routing off the RCP and around the vessel. such as an elbow. If the RCP has a fitting on it.

— OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the vessel to route around. If you want the route to maintain the minimum distance all the way around the vessel. Key in minimum distance from vessel Key in the minimum distance. The route is not placed at the minimum distance from the vessel all the way around. the closest. be sure that the distance from the RCPs to the vessel is the same as the minimum distance you key in.February 2003 Steps 1. circle. Identify vessel to route around Select the vessel (the arc. 136 . or right cylinder element) between the RCPs. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the second RCP. The minimum distance key-in defines the closest the route can come to the vessel. 3. Select the Route Around Vessel command. 2. 5. the route can be placed to the vessel. You cannot key in a negative value. The precision input form displays. Identify first RCP Select the RCP where you want the route to begin and press <D> to accept it. which you want to route around and press <D> to accept it. Identify second RCP Select the RCP on the other side of the vessel where you want the route to end and press <D> to accept it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and respecify the first RCP. 4.

The number of segments must be greater than one (two segments or more)._ _______________ 6. — OR — Press <R> to place the elements on the other side of the vessel. — OR — Press <R> to back up one step and key in a new minimum distance from vessel value. Design 137 . 7. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept that the elements should be placed on that side of the vessel. The route is calculated and the elements display on one side of the vessel. — OR — Press <R> twice to back up one step and key in a new number of one-line segments. Route Around Vessel 8. Key in the number of one-line segments Key in the number of one-line segments to use when routing around the vessel.

2. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line element. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. and exit a command. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. the system displays the message Element not found. 138 .February 2003 Insert RCP This command breaks an identified one-line in the design file and inserts a raceway connect point (RCP). see Precision Input Form. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Steps 1. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. Select the Insert RCP command from the menu. route one-lines. The Insert RCP precision input form displays. reset a command action. The system highlights a valid one-line. page 119. accept input.

If you accept the one-line. the command inserts the RCP as specified. — OR — If you reject the one-line. Continue inserting RCPs. Go to Step 2._ _______________ 3. — OR — Exit the command. Design 139 . 4. Insert RCP 8. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept or reject the highlighted one-line. the system prompts you to identify another. Go to Step 2.

Select the Rotate Cross Section command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . route one-lines. page 119. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Identify Cross Section Identify a cross section and accept it with a <D>. accept input. page 256 for more information. reset a command action. Steps 1.February 2003 Rotate Cross Section This command rotates a cross section using the current cross section rotation angle. 140 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. see Set Raceway Defaults. go to step 4. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. You can change the rotation angle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. reject input. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. this command does not rotate duct bank’s cross section. 2. but changes the duct bank justification location. If you identified a duct bank cross section. For duct bank cross sections. Otherwise continue to step 3. Using the form. The Rotate Cross Section precision input form displays.

page 256 for information about changing the angle of rotation. If you do not locate an acceptable element. 4. 3._ _______________ — OR — Exit the command. The system rotates the cross section by the defined rotation angle. The message disappears when you identify a valid cross section. If Automatic Propagation is on. See Set Raceway Defaults. Reset Rotates Press <D> to accept the current cross section orientation and exit the command. The duct bank justification changes and the command exits. the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Press <R> to rotate the cross section. Repeat this step. Rotate Cross Section The system highlights a valid cross section. Design 141 . 8. Select New Cross Section Justification Select a new justification point from the precision input form and accept it. Data Point Accepts. the elements will repropagate at the new orientation angle.

At any point during this operating sequence. for instance. For example. and exit a command. Select the Place Drop Point command. 10 is of lesser priority than 5. If the drop point symbol is not on the one-line. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. You can place drop points between RCPs and one-lines of the same and/or different one-line type. Steps 1. You can also establish connectivity between two one-lines where graphic coincidence does not occur. the drop-out point will be calculated by determining the closest point on the one-line to the drop point symbol. The point on the one-line where you place the drop point symbol defines the drop-out point. If you do not locate an acceptable element. page 119. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. establish connectivity between a piece of conduit and a tray at the point where the cables drop out of the tray into the conduit. see Precision Input Form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The values which determine priority status are defined in the ee_priority_level column in the ol_type table. you can locate elements. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. route one-lines. 142 . a higher number indicates a lesser priority. Valid connections to one-lines are determined by the priority level assigned to each one-line type in the database. 2. Drop points establish connectivity between a RCP and a one-line. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Using the form. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file. The Place Drop Point precision input form displays. You can. The system highlights a valid RCP.February 2003 Place Drop Point This command places a drop point symbol in the design file. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. the system displays the message Element not found.

Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the one-line. Go to step 2. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design file. Place Drop Point 8. The system highlights the identified one-line. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Accept the highlighted RCP. The system places the drop point as specified. — OR — Press <R> or Reject to identify a different RCP. — OR — Reject the highlighted RCP._ _______________ 3. The system prompts you to identify another RCP. Go to step 2. — OR — Reject the one-line. Go to step 4. and returns you to the previous prompt. The system prompts you to identify another one-line. 5. 4. The identification point is the point at which the system will place the drop point. Design 143 .

see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. reset a command action. The system places the equipment pointer symbol as specified. For detailed information about precision input. Steps 1. Enter data point to place Place a data point at the desired location for the equipment pointer symbol. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. The equipment pointer should match the corresponding symbol in the PDS Equipment Modeling product. An equipment pointer symbol serves as a tag that identifies a particular piece of equipment. Continue placing equipment pointer symbols in the design. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. Select the Place Equipment Pointer command. the system displays the message Element not found.February 2003 Place Equipment Pointer This command places an equipment pointer symbol in the design file. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP in the design file and accept it. If you do not locate an acceptable element. reject input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. accept input. 2. 144 . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 3. The system highlights a valid RCP. Using the form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. page 119. — OR — Press <R> to select another RCP.

Define Active Point Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 2. you can locate elements. accept input. Steps 8. Enter active point Specify a data point in the design file where you want the active point to be. route one-lines. Design 1. page 119. Select the Define Active Point command. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ Define Active Point This command defines a new active point in your design file. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and exits the command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 145 . reject input. The command makes the specified data point the active point. and exit a command. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Enter Active Point precision input form displays. Using the form.

route one-lines. reset a command action. The command exits automatically. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. and one-line type parameters based on the highlighted element. The system sets the active one-line type. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Select a one-line or RCP to use to set the active parameters. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input. to those of a one-line or RCP you identify. and raceway parameters. system. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Set Active Parameters precision input form displays. 2. page 119. Return to step 2. reject input. you can locate elements. active systems. see Precision Input Form. The system highlights the identified element. accept input. 146 . Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element as the one to use. one-line type. Using the form. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Steps 1.February 2003 Set Active Parameters This command sets the active parameters. Select the Set Active Parameters command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

Otherwise. pullboxes. You can place special fittings (conduit bodies. When placing a straight section. If the new fitting and the existing one do not share the same system and one-line type. vertical tees. During placement. the location of a manual fitting is determined by the location of the active point. the system derives the default orientation for placing the new fitting from the placement point. and so forth) using this command. When attaching a manual fitting to the placement point of another fitting (or a straight). Design 147 . and light fixtures) as well as spec driven fittings (horizontal elbows. You will use manual placement in situations where placing a sparse model will not be sufficient or is not possible. then the system places the new fitting by itself. Place Manual Fitting 8. Such a fitting is placed with its own RCP. the system locates the closest attachment point on that fitting. or placing a fitting on the end of a straight section. the system extends the one-line for that straight to terminate on the RCP of the fitting. you may need to place fittings manually when dealing with tight spaces. For example. the new fitting is attached to the existing fitting and a one-line is automatically placed._ _______________ Place Manual Fitting This command identifies a unique part from the reference database and places it in the design file at whatever orientation and location you specify. unusual angles. If the active point lies in the vicinity of a fitting. or fitting-to-fitting placement.

Selecting a new active one-line type updates the part information elsewhere on the form. etc. straight. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Set Active Parameters — Defines the active system. page 294 . See Set Active One-Line Type. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. select a value from the list. To change the displayed qualifier. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values. See Define Active Point. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable. horizontal. and active one-line type parameters in the design. To change the displayed subtype. page 145 . select a value from the list. the command derives the orientation from the place point. rigid. Changing the active parameters updates the part information elsewhere on the form. page 146 . inside vertical. Modifying the value for Type also may change the active and available subtypes. the previous orientation will be retained. To change the displayed three-line type. See Set Active System.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification.February 2003 Commands Define Active Point — Defines the active point in the design file for the placement of fittings. etc. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to select a new active system. select a value from the list. 148 . If manual placement cannot locate a fitting.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. wye. See Set Active Parameters. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. Otherwise.) for that specification. one-line type. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. etc. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. page 295 . Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. key in a negative angle. select a value from the list. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. Design 149 . Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. The list contains all available specifications. You can only review the values in this field. select an angle from the list or select the field. select a value from the list. To change the displayed angle. Subtype. Spec1. To display the specification itself. To change the displayed specification. Doing so displays a specification form. If straight is not your active Type. and Qualifier. and key in the new value. Part — Displays the active part. When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). The list contains all available parts for the current specification. the Length field does not display on the form. select the corresponding Display button._ _______________ Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. and Qualifier for the current specification. To change the displayed part. (if applicable) Spec2. 8. or Angle (if applicable). Subtype. select the field. Qualifier. The list contains available angles. — OR — Change any of the values for Type. Place Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. Subtype. and key in the new value. To change the displayed length.

Then select the field. page 178 . If more than one row matches the criteria. Select . If Cutback Mode is on. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. containing all matching rows. Column value . 150 . select the *.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. Subtype.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. If Cutback Mode is off.Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. Override . select the Override button. and key in a new value. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. the RCP will be moved accordingly. then a second form. if any. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. Doing so displays a specification form.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Cutback Mode — Defines whether a straight section is to be cutback when placing a manual fitting. List . If only one row matches this criteria. displays. Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. See Spec1 for a description of the form. If an * displays in the List column. the existing RCP location is fixed. For a list of valid operators. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. You can review and modify the values in this column. select the slide bar. Type. see Annotate Element. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. Clear ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. To change the active placepoint.February 2003 Column name . for the given Spec1.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. then the column value has an associated codelist. You can only review the information in this column.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. and Qualifier. To change a value. To display the codelist. which automatically activates it.

Place Manual Fitting The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. then that fitting is used. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. — OR — Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Angle . select the field.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. To change the displayed angle. Rotate Orientation — Defines the active orientation matrix. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. To change the displayed axis. select the field. About . If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. 8. Design 151 . then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. the Place Manual Fitting form displays. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. then the largest fitting available is used. and key in a new value. You must specify the manual fitting type before using the button. Automatic Fit — Re-orients the fitting in reference to the one-line it is associated with._ _______________ Automatic Size — Automatically selects the correct size fitting. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. Secondary.

then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table that matches the attribute values. made of feraloy from vendor 3. material to feraloy. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. vendor to 3. type. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. see the descriptions earlier in this section. and size to 1/2 inch. if you set material to feraloy. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. For example. 152 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Similarly. select a table name from the list. size. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. When set to All. you set the active Table to cond_body. The list contains the available special part tables from the database.February 2003 Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. In other words. will be displayed in the size list. To change the active special part table. and vendor display as the active attributes. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. if you set type to form 7c. material. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database. and vendor to 3. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. regardless of the other attribute settings. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes.

3. 153 . and location until the desired fitting is seen in dynamics (phantom mode) in the design file. Change fitting descriptions. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements.) to construct the three-line symbols. On the other hand. some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts. For more information. page 119 . Design Steps 1._ _______________ Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. radius. orientation. The Place Manual Fitting form displays. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Such fittings are called special parts. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts: Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 8. and location. Select Accept to accept the fitting with the current settings. set the toggle to Driven By Table. 2. height. Place Manual Fitting When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. Go to step 4. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. Select the Place Manual Fitting command. 4. etc. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. The system accepts the fitting at the specified location and orientation. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. orientations. you should first consider a few points. — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. see Precision Input Form.

February 2003 5._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Exit the command. 154 . Continue placing manual fittings.

Conduit Sizing 8. Design 155 ._ _______________ Conduit Sizing This command places cables (wires) in a conduit to determine the correct conduit size based on the conduit’s percent fill calculation.

This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. then the Value has an associated code list. This operator is a wild card. This command also accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. Value — Select and key in values to use as search criteria to find corresponding cables in the database. A code list is a list of valid database values for that Column Alias.February 2003 Field Descriptions Column Alias — Displays the column aliases for each column in the database table. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Code List — Indicates whether a Value has an associated code list. If you do not enter another operator. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. To display the code list. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. If an * displays in the column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 156 . representing zero or more characters. the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. select the *. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value.

If more than one cable matches the search criteria. it is added to the conduit. Selected Cables — Displays information on all cables that have been selected to go in the active conduit. Conduit Size — Displays the size of the conduit in spec units. Copy Contents — Copies cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit. The field displays in red and the message Warning: Percent Fill exceeds maximum allowed displays when the conduit has reached its capacity as defined by the electrical code you are using. Percent Fill — Displays how full the conduit is as a percentage. from which you can select a cable or cables to route in the conduit. There are two methods to choose from: — Increase Size ONLY .When a conduit is calculated to be full. Design 157 . If only one cable is found that matches the criteria. Field Descriptions Increase Size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size — Defines how the conduit should be sized. Add Cable — Mode for adding cables to a conduit. Using this form you can select another conduit in which to route cables without having to exit the command. Any cables in the active conduit before the copy are removed. Append Contents — Adds cables from a selected conduit into the active conduit leaving any cables in the active conduit there._ _______________ Initialize Query — Clears all entries in the Value fields.The smallest conduit available in the spec that meets the percent fill criteria is used. Process Query — Queries the database to find cables matching the search criteria defined in the Value fields. Select Conduit — Displays the Conduit Sizing precision input form. the PseudoCable form displays. the next size larger conduit in the spec table is used until an adequately sized conduit is found. The Percent Fill calculation is based on the conduit’s cross-sectional area divided by the summation of all of that conduit’s cables’ cross-sectional areas. 8. — Increase/Decrease size .

2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . At any point during this operating sequence. This option is available only when Remove Cable is selected. Delete All Cables — Deletes all cables in the active conduit. The Conduit Sizing precision input form displays. Define the cables for the conduit. 4. route one-lines.February 2003 Remove Cable — Mode for removing cables from a conduit. accept input. and exit a command. This field can be edited to take positive integers other than zero (zero and blank are invalid entries). reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You can query the database and select them from the form or copy them from a conduit that has "cable" in it. Quantity — Defines the number of cables of that type. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 268 for more information. Select the Conduit Sizing command. Using the form. You must use the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command to define how the conduit sizes will be selected. 3. Set the Increase size ONLY / Increase/Decrease size toggle to the sizing method you want. 158 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. For detailed information about precision input. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Steps 1. you can locate elements. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. Identify CONDUIT Identify the conduit to size and accept it with <D> The Conduit Sizing form displays.

Select Accept to calculate and size the conduit. a warning message displays. Design 159 . Field Descriptions 8._ _______________ 5. If the largest size conduit available does not satisfy the percent fill calculation. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command and ignore any changes you have made.

Using the form. 3. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the one-line. The point that identifies the one-line in this step is the point where the vertex is inserted._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 160 . you can locate elements. route one-lines. 2. Select the Insert One-Line Vertex command. At any point during this operating sequence. page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The selected one-line highlights. page 192 for more information. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. use the Move One-Line Vertex command. see Precision Input Form. If Automatic Propagation is on. For detailed information about precision input. and exit a command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The vertex is inserted. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The Insert One-line Vertex precision input form displays. Identify Raceway One-line Select the one-line to which to add the vertex. — OR — Press <R> to reject the one-line. accept input. To move an inserted vertex. reset a command action. see Move One-Line Vertex.February 2003 Insert One-Line Vertex This command places a vertex in an existing one-line. reject input. the one-line will repropagate and the vertex will display with its cross-section.

there are instances where the raceway does not terminate at equipment and cables must be routed through airways (space) by the installer from the raceway to the equipment. To change the displayed length. conduit less than a particular size is typically not modeled in the plant model but is installed in the field by the installer. This command is intended primarily to support field routed conduit and airways.) When set to Keyin. You are prompted to position the annotation after the equipment pointer is placed in the design. To change the value. When on. Keyin/Calculate — Defines the method for entering the distance from the beginning of the placed one-line to the equipment (that is. The Distance to equipment specifies the field routed length (in subunits) of the placed one-line. but can also be used for other raceway types that are field routed. select the field and key in a new length. select the field and key in the new value. 161 . This length represents the estimated length of raceway to the equipment from the beginning point of the placed one-line. Similarly. These sections represent raceway components that are field routed by the installer. the value is displayed in the design. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. field route length. Field routed raceway sections are needed to get appropriate material takeoff (MTO) reports and to facilitate cable routing. Design Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for the columns (attributes) in the reference schema that unique identify equipment. This field is informational only. you must key in the length in the Distance to equipment field. Display — Enables or disables the annotation of the Column value. For example. Column value — Defines a value for the corresponding equipment identifying attribute in the Column name field. The column names reside in the ee_unique table in the reference schema._ _______________ Place Field Routed Raceway The Place Field Routed Raceway command places short raceway sections from the raceway model to equipment.

Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. select the field. select the field. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. When placing the one-line element using the First Point & Orientation method the Rotate Orientation gadgets display. and exit a command. After specifying the orientation and the length of the one-line. For detailed information about precision input. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Or you can identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. page 119. The calculated distance is stored with the one-line as field routed length. y. Angle — Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. you are prompted for the beginning and ending plant coordinates of the one-line. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. sum of the x. and key in a new value. you are prompted for the first point (that is. and key in a new value. About — Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. and toggle between the three axis (Primary. you are prompted to identify the location of the equipment. see Precision Input Form. First Point & Orientation/Beginning & Ending Point — Defines the method for entering the plant coordinates of the one-line element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Length of Placed Raceway Field — Displays the length by which to project the oneline along the orientation tee from the first point. At any point during this operating sequence.February 2003 When the Keyin/Calculate toggle is set to Calculate. Secondary. When placing the one-line element using the Beginning & Ending Point method. reject input. To change the displayed angle. The software calculates the orthogonal distance (that is. placement point) of the one-line element. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. route one-lines. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. reset a command action. To change the displayed axis. 162 . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.) I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. you can locate elements. select the field. z deltas) from the beginning of the placed one-line to the identified equipment location. To change the displayed length.

_ _______________ Operator Sequence 1. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line element to which you want to connect the field routed raceway section and accept it when it highlights. Select the Place Field Routed Raceway command. The precision input form displays. 3. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. Place Field Routed Raceway 8. The Place Field Routed Raceway form displays. Design 163 . 2. — OR — Exit the command.

you assign that area in the duct bank. Unassigned or unused buttons in the matrix are not used in calculating the ductbank’s cross sectional size unless they are in the middle of assigned buttons.February 2003 Define Duct Cross Section This command defines the cross section configuration of the contained conduit or cable for underground duct banks. The duct bank will automatically resize after configuration to accommodate the defined conduit or cable. Copy section layout from — Copies an existing duct cross section layout from a specified duct into the active duct. Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that extends the size of the duct bank. 164 . cable or gap to a button._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . All assigned buttons (areas) are then used to calculate the duct bank’s cross section. By assigning a conduit.

_ _______________ Add — Assigns a conduit. The cable schedule is not the same table as the cable table in the EE Wiring Diagram and Panel Design software. Horizontal spacing — Defines the horizontal spacing between each button (area). page 256 for more information. cable or gap to a matrix button. A form displays all available conduit/cables in the project database for the defined control number. Design 165 . The conduit/cable identification will appear on the button after assignment. If conduit routing is selected. Move — Moves a conduit/cable or gap from one matrix button to another. Vertical spacing — Defines the vertical spacing between each button (area). Define Duct Cross Section Delete — Removes a conduit/cable or gap from a matrix button. See Set Raceway Defaults. Gap Distance — Defines a gap between two conduit/cables in the matrix. The gap distance will appear on the button after assignment. The gap is measured from the center of the left conduit/cable to the center of the right conduit/cable and can only be defined on the top row of buttons. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cabsch_spec table. You can define any control number that is loaded to the project database. 8. These tables are the cable/conduit schedule listings used for this project. If cable routing is selected. Modify — Removes an existing button assignment and replaces it with new assignment. You define whether you are routing conduit or cables by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. Control Number — Displays the control number to use for retrieving the conduit/cable information from the project database. this information is retrieved from the drawing_numb column of the cndsch_spec table.

Likewise. page 119. both width and height. The precision input form displays. any changes you made will be ignored. 2. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without saving any changes. you can define a margin width. the duct bank will automatically repropagate. Select Confirm (√) to exit the form and save your changes. page 256 for more information. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 3. all conduit/cable information. If Automatic Propagation is on. Using the form. See Set Raceway Defaults. For detailed information about precision input. Define whether you are placing conduit or cables in the duct bank by setting the Duct toggle in the EE Raceway Defaults form. a warning form displays confirming that you want to exit without saving changes.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If you select Cancel on the warning form. reject input. 4. reset a command action. route one-lines. If you select Cancel after having modified the ductbank’s layout. The Duct Cross Section Layout form displays. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. is assigned to the duct one-line. Define cross section layout using the various commands. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 166 . The duct bank section layout. Select the Define Duct Cross Section command. a space between the button matrix and the outside of the ductbank in the EE Raceway Defaults form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Steps 1. The duct bank size is checked and resized as necessary. you cancel your "exit without saving" and are returned to the command. Identify duct element Select the duct bank element for which to define the cross section layout and accept it with <D>. If you select Confirm (√) on the warning form.

See Set Active One-Line Type. Stub ups are pieces of conduit associated with a conduit or cable contained in an underground duct bank and are placed in the raceway model for making above ground conduit connections. See Set Conduit Sizing Attributes. material) are used to determine the conduit stub up sizes available. You must define the conduit sizing attributes using the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. See Set Active One-Line Type Parameters. page 289 ._ _______________ Place Stub Up Place Stub Up This command manipulates conduit stub ups. See Define One-Line Type. 8. units. 167 . page 294 . See Define Duct Cross Section. page 268 . You must define conduit as the active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. vendor. page 260 . Design Before Using this Command You must define conduit as an available one-line type using the Define One-Line Type command. You must define the duct cross section layout using the Define Duct Cross Section command. The conduit specification and the conduit sizing attributes (for example. You must select the a conduit specification using the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command. page 164 . The stub up is connected to the corresponding underground duct bank section by means of a drop point.

Select Duct Segment — Selects an existing duct segment in the raceway model as the active duct segment. Change Association — Changes the association of a conduit stub up from the currently associated conduit/cable to another conduit/cable in the active duct segment. meters) The user can optionally override the displayed value. the size of stub up will be retrieved from the conduit schedule table in project schema based upon conduit number that user selected from matrix. Delete Stub Up — Deletes a conduit stub up. Place Stub Up — Places a conduit stub up in the raceway model associated with a conduit/cable in the active duct segment. you are required to select the desired size from the available sizes. If underground cable routing is selected for this model or the conduit size is not defined for the conduit number. 168 . The displayed value is simply the value from the previous place stub up selection. If underground conduit routing is selected for this model. this field displays the associated conduit stub up size. Stub Up Length — Displays the conduit stub up length as measured in the model master units (feet._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Stub Up Size — After selecting the Place Stub Up button and selecting a conduit/cable from the active duct segment. This matrix is used in the Change Association and Place Stub Up options to identify which cross section (that is. You can optionly override the displyed value by selecting a conduit stub up size from the available sizes as determined by matching the conduit sizing attributes to the active conduit specification. conduit/cable) to manipulate.February 2003 Field Descriptions Button Matrix — Each button represents an area in the duct bank’s cross section that has or has not been assigned during the Define Duct Cross Section command.

The identified duct one-line’s cross section layout displays in the Button Matrix. Go to Step 9. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Select Duct Segment option. Go to Step 2. 4. — OR — Select the Delete Stub Up option. 5. Design — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. Select Option Select the Select Duct Segment option. Steps 8. Identify duct element Identify a duct one-line in the design file. Select the Place Stub Up command. — OR — Select the Place Stub Up option. Go to Step 6. — OR — Exit the option. Go to Step 14. — OR — Select the Change Association option. The identified element highlights. 169 . The Place Stub Up form displays. 3. 2. The precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4. — OR — Reject the highlighted element.

Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The precision input form displays. 12. Go to Step 2. 11. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. Conduit/Cable Number = [conduit/cable number] Select another cable/conduit to modify existing stub up. propagated elements. Go to Step 7. The identified element highlights. 170 . and RCP’s that are associated with the selected one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the option. It also deletes all cross sections. 10. Select the Change Association option. is displays in the form message field. 8. The precision input form displays. The identified element highlights. Go to Step 2. 9. Select the Delete Stub Up option. — OR — Exit the option. — OR — Reject the highlighted element.February 2003 6. 7. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Go to Step 10. Identify stub up element Identify a stub up one-line in the design file. Select stub up for modification. Go to Step 7. annotation.

Place a data point at the desired location for the top of the conduit stub up. Select location to place stub up. The precision input form displays. Select a button from the Button Matrix. Select a button from the Button Matrix. displays in the message field. Select location to place stub up. Go to Step 2. Go to Step 2. Select the Place Stub Up option. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 15. Stub up spec. — OR — Select a option button. Go to Step 2. — OR — Override the stub up size or length. — OR — Exit the placement of the selected conduit/cable. 13. Design Go to Step 14. 14. displays in the message field. 16. The system places the stub up and connects it to the duct bank by means of a drop point located on the duct bank one-line closest to the bottom of the conduit stub up. The stub up is placed down from the given data point. 171 . Steps 8. has been changed. Go to Step 17._ _______________ Select a button from the Button Matrix. Select cable/conduit to connect stub up. 17.

February 2003 172 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Commands The commands on the Modify palette both activate other command palettes. 9. then selecting Palette. within the design file. Modify Commands Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. annotating. and so forth). These palettes and their commands will be described in this chapter. 173 . annotation. The Modify palette is activated by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar._ _______________ 9. one-lines. Modify Commands The Modify commands manipulate elements. such as RCPs. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Modify Element Commands — Manipulate single elements within the design file. moving. You can elect to manipulate either single elements or those elements belonging to an active group. and three-lines. Modify Modify Group Commands — Define elements for inclusion in a group and manipulate elements belonging to the active group. Available element manipulations include copying. and propagation. deleting. three-lines.

Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands.February 2003 Using the Modify Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see the Design Commands. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For detailed information about precision input. See Setup Commands. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and one-line types. see Precision Input Form. 174 . you should use these commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for the commands in this group. not MicroStation manipulation commands. For reliable results. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. page 119 . any time you are modifying raceway elements.

then selecting Palette. and delete specified elements. reviews. annotation. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (oneline. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. Commands Annotate Element — Places. Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. within the design file. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and three-lines. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Modify Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. one-lines. three-lines. to review or edit element annotation. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. 175 . copy. Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate onelines in your raceway model. You can use individual commands to move. including RCPs. Modify Element Commands The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements._ _______________ Modify Element Commands The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. and so forth). 9. then selecting Modify Element Commands.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. 176 . from the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. and elements associated with it. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file.

annotation. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. For detailed information about precision input. For reliable results. 177 . Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. and so forth). not MicroStation manipulation commands. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. 9. page 119 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Element commands. see Precision Input Form. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. any time you are modifying raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file. Using the Modify Element Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. you should use these commands. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. See Setup Commands. three-lines. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form._ _______________ Using the Modify Element Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups.

You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes. intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. 178 . three-lines. By definition. reviews. Using this command. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for a one-line. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. and fittings. and edits intelligent annotation for individual raceway elements. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. For straights and fittings.February 2003 Annotate Element This command places. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). you are allowed only to review the annotation. straights. The following graphic shows the Annotate Element form for an RCP._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. where New had displayed. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Display On/Off — Enables or disables the graphic display for each column value. To display the codelist. Otherwise. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. enter nothing into the design. the value will display in the design where you place it. the field remains null. Where the toggle is On. and key in the new value. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. If you can only view (read) the column value. Where UD displays in the column. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. If blanks exist for a field. select the *. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. select the Column value field and delete the blank character. Once you have deleted the override. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. Empty <Return>s. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. then it will display an R. Modify 179 . If an * displays in the List column. however. select the field. the Access column displays a R/W. the value is saved back to user data. You can enter blank spaces into the design. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database._ _______________ Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. The next time you enter the annotation form. You can only review the Column name column information. using your keyboard space bar. the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. 9. You can only review the information in this column. then the value derives from the reference database. Field Descriptions Source — Displays the source of the corresponding column value. it becomes an override key to the reference database. The key field is updated. the corresponding column value comes from user data. To change the values associated with the element. If you change a column value. then the value derives from the design file. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If Dgn displays in the column. When modified. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. You can review and modify the values in this field. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. If Ref displays in the column.

Once you place an override key on an element. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. If no key exists in the user element. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. select the row you want. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. 180 . The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. the Default key is used. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). which automatically activates it. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. you can modify it. If you select Cancel (X). To add values from the displayed specification table rows. You can only review the information in this field. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. Available operators are described later in this section. the field remains null. the key specified in the user element is used. and then select Confirm (√). You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. select the field. and key in a new value. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. If more than one row matches the criteria. From this form you can select the row(s) containing the desired values. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. To change the displayed value.February 2003 If you delete the value in this field. Otherwise. but cannot delete it.

reset a command action. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. 181 . you can locate elements. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. the system assumes =. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If you do not enter another operator. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. route one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. Field Descriptions > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR 9. representing zero or more characters. This operator is a wild card. page 119. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. reject input. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card. and exit a command. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

three-line. 2. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. drop point. return to Step 2. — OR — Exit the command.February 2003 Steps 1. When there are no more values to place. 182 . Position the column value. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify Raceway element Identify the element to annotate (one-line. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. The annotation form displays when you accept the element. The Annotate Element precision input form displays. It also identifies all the possible values (column values) associated with this element. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted element. The prompt indicates the column alias being placed. 3. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and place a data point. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 5. or RCP). This step repeats for each new value. The system highlights the specified element. Return to step 2. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. Select the Annotate Element command. The new value displays in the design file. equipment pointer. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 6. If you do not locate an acceptable element. reset <R> to skip. Return to Step 2. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. The form displays all the current values associated with the element. 4.

optionally. Modify 183 . When you load the project database. if you see graphics extending into the next raceway element. repropagate all of the connected raceway elements. displayed. Field Descriptions 9. these values are loaded into the project database. When you annotate any raceway element._ _______________ Any value placed with the Annotate Element command will be entered into the drawing and.

184 . page 119. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.February 2003 Copy Element This command copies raceway elements to specified locations within the design file. accept input. This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. reject input. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. you can locate elements. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. reset a command action. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. For detailed information about precision input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

2._ _______________ Steps 1. Repeat this step. Return to Step 2. Steps The system highlights the specified element. the system displays the message Element not found. Enter placement point Specify a location for the copied element. The system copies the element to the specified location in the design file. Modify 185 . Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the one-line or RCP element you intend to copy and accept it with <D>. Select the Copy Element command. 9. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to copy. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Copy Element precision input form displays.

For detailed information about precision input. reject input. route one-lines. RCPs. reset a command action. see Precision Input Form. equipment pointers. drop points. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If a one-line is moved. and exit a command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and annotation.February 2003 Move Element This command moves individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. You can use this command to move one-lines. 186 . all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. At any point during this operating sequence. and equipment pointers will also be moved. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. accept input. three-line fittings. three-line fittings. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. you can locate elements. All associated annotation. If an RCP is moved._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. All associated annotation. page 119. Using the form.

9. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. the system displays the message Element not found. The system moves the element to the specified location. Steps The system highlights the specified element. — OR — Press <R> to select another element to move. 3. Enter placement point Specify the new location for the element. Identify Raceway element Identify the element you intend to move and accept it with <D>. Modify 187 ._ _______________ Steps 1. Select the Move Element command. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Repeat this step. 2. Return to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The Move Element precision input form displays.

This command will copy a single RCP provided that no one-lines are attached. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input.February 2003 Clone Element This command copies raceway elements multiple times to specified locations within the design file. you can locate elements. route one-lines. reset a command action. 188 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You can use this command to copy one-lines and their associated elements. see Precision Input Form. Equipment pointers and drop points cannot be copied using this command. For detailed information about precision input. page 119. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reject input. Using the form. and exit a command.

Select the Clone Element command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 4. 3. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified element._ _______________ Steps 1. Identify Raceway One-Line or RCP Identify the element you want to clone (copy) and accept it with <D>. If you are placing more than one clone. Steps 9. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. 5. Return to step 2. Confirm (√) the number of times to clone the element. The clone elements are placed in the design file. Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Modify 189 . The element highlights. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified element. 2. The point you identify the element with becomes the origin of the copy. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original element.

and exit a command. reject input. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. any RCPs that are associated with a segment by a drop point will move only if the RCP and the drop point are coincident. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. you can locate elements. If the first or last segment of a one-line is moved. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. reset a command action. page 119. Using the form. Any one-lines attached to the RCP will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. the attached RCP will also move. route one-lines. 190 . For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Move One-Line Segment This command moves one-line segments. accept input. Segments attached to the moved one-line segment will stretch or shrink to maintain connections with the moved one-line segment. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Also. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence.

_ _______________ Steps 1. 2. 3. The point that identifies the one-line segment in this step will be reference point used when placing the one-line segment at the new location. Identify Raceway One-Line Segment Select the one-line segment you want to move and accept it with <D>. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the one-line segment. Select the Move One-Line Segment command. The selected one-line segment highlights. Modify 191 . — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line segment to move. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. page 297 for more information on this toggle. See Propagation Setup. Repeat this step. Steps 9. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on. The system moves the segment to the specified location. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

along with any annotation. equipment pointers. route one-lines. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. For detailed information about precision input. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. Steps 1. and exit a command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. reject input. you can locate elements. 192 . also move with the vertex.February 2003 Move One-Line Vertex This command moves a one-line vertex. page 119. Select the Move One-Line Vertex command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If a one-line end vertex is moved. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Using the form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. Any segments attached to a moved vertex will stretch or shrink to maintain connection. 2. the attached RCP. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to move and accept it with <D>. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The selected vertex highlights. and equipment pointer annotation that is associated with the RCP. reset a command action.

_ _______________ 3. Enter data point to place Identify the new location of the vertex. the one-line will automatically repropagate after the move. Modify 193 . — OR — Press <R> to select another one-line vertex. Repeat this step. page 297 for more information on this toggle. See Propagation Setup. Move One-Line Vertex 9. If you have the Automatic Propagation toggle set to on.

A description of some of the delivered fittings follows the operating sequence in this section. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. you can locate elements.February 2003 Propagate Element This command expands one-line segments and RCPs into three-dimensional elements (a process called propagation). To view errors that occur during propagation. 194 . and exit a command. see Highlight Propagation Errors. see Propagation Setup. All other element will propagate depending on the specific situation of the element. The Propagate Element command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For information about the form. page 314 . For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. page 119. see Precision Input Form. route one-lines. Manually placed or edited fittings will propagate exactly as placed. reject input. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. This command displays to the screen the pro. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. page 297 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file. Using the form. At any point during this operating sequence.

Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. the system displays the message Element not found. Reducers: fittings produced by propagating two or three intersecting one-line segments which have different raceway parameters. Go to step 2. The system propagates the identified one-line and returns you to step 2 to continue identifying elements for propagation. Fittings are produced through propagation and can be divided into the following categories: Straights: fittings produced by propagating a one-line segment. 2. Elbows: fittings produced by propagating two intersecting one-line segments. 195 . see Specification. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. 3. For information about this table. If you do not locate an acceptable one-line or RCP. Wyes: fittings produced by propagating three intersecting one-line segments. The Project Run precision input form displays. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Modify This section describes some of the fittings available with the delivered raceway one-line types. Crosses: fittings produced by propagating four intersecting one-line segments._ _______________ Steps 1. The attributes associated with each fitting are contained in the tray_part table in the reference database. page 507 . Identify Raceway element Identify a raceway one-line or RCP. — OR — Exit the command. Select the Propagate Element command. Propagate Element The system highlights the specified element. Go to step 1. Fittings 9.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The following illustrations detail some of the fittings available for each raceway one-line type: Tray Fittings Wireway Fittings 196 .

Modify 197 ._ _______________ Conduit Fittings Propagate Element 9.

wye. and Qualifier for the current specification. The list contains all available subtypes (vertical. To change the displayed angle. select a value from the list. See Remove RCP. straight. etc. To change the displayed subtype. etc. Options Remove RCP — Deletes an RCP from the design file. Subtype — Displays the active subtype for the displayed Type value. horizontal. Qualifier — Displays the active qualifier for the displayed Type and Subtype. Modifying Type or Subtype values may change the available qualifiers. Subtype. Field Descriptions Type — Displays the active three-line type for the current specification.) for that specification. etc. You can only review the values in this field. To change the displayed three-line type. Modifying the value for Type also changes the active and available subtypes. inside vertical.February 2003 Edit/Insert Manual Fitting This command is used to edit fittings that have been manually placed in the design file. The list contains available angles.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification.) for the active type and subtype in the current specification. page 214 . Symbol — Displays the name of the Eden symbol you are placing. select a value from the list. and key in the new value. The list contains all available three-line types (elbow. To change the displayed qualifier. select an angle from the list or select the field. 198 . rigid. Angle — Displays the active angle associated with the Type. Modifying the value in the Part field may also change the active and available Type values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select a value from the list. The list contains all available qualifiers (adjustable.

You can review and modify the values in this column. Part — Displays the active part. — Column value . Modify The specification form has these parameters: — Column name .Displays the aliases of those columns in the database that are associated with the specified type. The list contains all available specifications. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting Length — Displays the length by which to project a straight. Then select the field._ _______________ When placing a fitting (such as a vertical tee). The list contains all available parts for the current specification. select a value from the list. To change the displayed length. select the corresponding Display button. Spec1. You can only review the information in this column.Displays the column name values currently associated with the specified type. the Length field does not display on the form. Qualifier. 9. To change a value. and key in the new value. and Qualifier. select the field. If straight is not your active Type. To change the displayed specification. and (if applicable) Spec2. To display the specification itself. and key in a new value. Spec1 — Displays the active specification for the displayed Type. To change the displayed part. You can also change any of the values for Type. if the placepoints and RCPs do not line up correctly. select the Override button. 199 . Subtype. key in a negative angle. select a value from the list. Subtype. (-90 degrees) to shift the RCPs and placepoints to the correct location.

If only one row matches this criteria. You can display the current specification itself by selecting the Display button. Rotate Orientation — These fields define the orientation matrix: 200 . See Spec1 for a description of the form. Overrides from the secondary specification are not passed to the Eden symbol. which automatically activates it. then the largest fitting available is used.Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. and Qualifier. and drag it along the scale until it reaches the appropriate value. — Select . Doing so displays a specification form.February 2003 — List . The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. For a list of valid operators.Allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). Automatic Size — Automatically selects the appropriate size fitting base on the onelines connected to the fitting. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. and then automatically depresses the Override button so that you can select a different row(s) from the specification. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. then a second form containing all matching rows displays. if any. select the *._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Type. The list contains all available secondary specifications for the current settings. Secondary specifications are generally used with reducers. select the slide bar. see Annotate Element. You can use certain relational operators as search criteria. page 178 . Spec2 — Displays the active secondary specification. Placepoint — Defines the point of attachment for the fitting you are currently placing. To change the active placepoint. then that fitting is used. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. Automatic Fit — Correctly orients the fitting to the one-lines. — Override . If an * displays in the List column. — Clear . Subtype.Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. If more than one row matches the criteria. for the given Spec1. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. then the column value has an associated codelist. To display the codelist.Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size.

Similarly. will be displayed in the size list. To change the displayed angle. 9. If you set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to Table. vendor to 3. Secondary.Defines the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. material. select a table name from the list. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Attribute — The next four display lists on the form are the first four Part Key attributes from the active table and will change depending on which Table is active. To change the displayed axis. — About .) Edit/Insert Manual Fitting I Button — Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. and vendor display as the active attributes. The list contains the available special part tables from the database. select the field. size. and size to 1/2 inch. OR Identify the appropriate axis name (text) on the orientation matrix diagram (to the right of the Angle and About fields. Field Descriptions Table — Displays the active special part table from the database. select the field. The attribute display lists are used to interactively query the database for the desired Part Key. made of feraloy from vendor 3. material to feraloy. and vendor to 3. To change the active special part table._ _______________ — Angle . type. if you set material to feraloy. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Each attribute displays only those values that have corresponding matching values for the other three attributes in the database.Defines the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and toggle between the three axes (Primary. For example. then only the sizes the form 7c comes in. and key in a new value. then only those types that are 1/2 inch in size from vendor 3 and made of feraloy will be displayed in the types list. you set the active Table to cond_body. In other words. Modify 201 . the form changes. if you set type to form 7c. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis.

some fittings derive their information from their own database tables because they are not so easily classified into a common group of parts._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When deciding whether your fitting information will come from a specification or from a table in the database. For more information. Part Key — Displays the current part for the displayed Table. Before Using This Command You should be familiar with precision input and its functions. See the description of the Spec1 field earlier in this section for detailed information about the form parameters. all available values for that attribute are displayed in the list. Such fittings are called special parts. Specification-Driven Fittings straight elbow wye cross dropout Special Parts pullbox conduit body light fixture 202 . regardless of the other attribute settings. On the other hand. Specification-driven fittings rely on the specification information (width. To change the active part.February 2003 Select/All toggles — Overrides the interactive queries of the attribute fields. All parts of a given specification will inherit the attributes of that specification. height. You can display the current table information for the part by selecting the Display button. see the descriptions earlier in this section. These fields and the commands operate identically in either Driven By Spec or Driven By Table modes. When set to All. you should first consider a few points. The following table indicates fittings that are specification-driven and those that are special parts.) to construct the three-line symbols. select a part from the list. The list contains all available parts from the table. radius. Modifying the Table value also changes the active and available Part values. etc. For information about the Placepoint and Rotate Orientation fields as well as the form commands. page 119 . see Precision Input Form.

3. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form without editing the fitting or RCP. 2. Go to step 4. Select the Edit/Insert Manual Fitting command. Set the Driven By Spec/Table toggle to meet your requirements. set the toggle to Driven By Table. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting 9. Select Confirm when finished. set the toggle to Driven By Spec. Modify 203 . — OR — To derive fitting attributes from a special part table in the database. The Edit/Insert Manual Fitting form displays. To derive fitting attributes from a specification in the database. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command._ _______________ Steps 1. 4. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting or RCP you want to edit and accept it with <D>. Edit the fitting as needed.

The Modify One-Line precision input form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The dashed segment will then be modified. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. you can locate elements. reset a command action. and exit a command. You can reverse the segment to be modified by pressing <R>. the system displays the message Element not found. reject input. The system highlights a valid one-line. You will identify the one-line to be modified at the point where modification should begin. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Select the Modify One-Line command. Identify Raceway One-Line Identify a one-line in the design. You cannot modify the termination points of a one-line. see Precision Input Form. Steps 1. route one-lines. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the other segment appears as a dashed line. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. For detailed information about precision input.February 2003 Modify One-Line This command modifies the route of an existing one-line. one segment of the one-line will display as a solid line with increased line weight. 2. page 119. accept input. When identified. 204 . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command.

6. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) a second time rejects the one-line. 4. Repeat this step. Raceway one-line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. prompting you to Identify Raceway One-Line. The system saves the rotation and returns to the beginning of the command._ _______________ 3. — OR — Reject the element. Enter next point Enter points to draw new one-line routes. — OR — Reject the one-line element as displayed. Modify One-Line 9. place a data point on the original one-line. Part of the one-line displays with an increased line weight. while the part to be modified displays as a dashed line. Reset Rotates Accept the cross section. The one-line highlights. Accept/reject Accept the one-line element as displayed. — OR — Rotate the cross section by the rotation angle defined in Raceway Defaults. To terminate the new routes. The command reroutes the one-line according to your specifications. or at the RCP containing the end of the one-line you are modifying. — Pressing <R> (or Reject) once reverses the segments to be modified. Go to step 2. Go to step 2. You can press <R> (or Reject) to reject the last segment drawn. Accepting the element identifies the one-line for modification. Data Point Accepts. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. Modify 205 . 5. — OR — Reset to return to the previous step. and return to step 2.

206 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The system rotates the cross section and prompts you again to accept or continue rotating it. Accept the rotation and return to step 2. — OR — Continue rotating the cross section. 7.

a LB fitting be placed. See EE Databases. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. For example. and exit a command. one rule might define that at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. reject input._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. route one-lines. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. you can locate elements. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. Using the form. then that fitting is used. You must define the rules in the reference database. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. Modify Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. accept input. 207 . page 119. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. then the largest fitting available is used. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Place Fitting by Rule 9.

2.February 2003 Steps 1. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 208 . Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. Select the Place Fitting by Rule command. If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the RCP on which you want to place the fitting.

then you need to fix the coincident RCPs in your model. you are given a choice of which RCP to keep. then the RCPs can be merged. All coincident RCPs must be of the same one-line type. 9. 209 . If no coincident RCPs are found. RCPs can be combined if the following criteria are true: No more than four (4) RCPs are coincident. All RCPs must have a system in common. Select the Combine Coincident RCPs command. Status — Defines if the RCPs can be merged. Steps 1. the message No coincident RCPs found displays and the command exits. — OR — If coincident RCPs are found. Systems — Displays which system each RCP belongs to. If Invalid._ _______________ Combine Coincident RCPs Combine Coincident RCPs This command is used to check for coincident RCPs in the design file. the Combine Coincident RCPs form displays listing the coincident RCP information. Modify Each set of coincident RCPs is listed in the form separated by the horizontal dotted line. Connectivity is re-established for the attached one-lines after RCPs have been combined. One-Line Type — Displays which one-line type each RCP belongs to. If Combinable. If coincident RCPs are found and can be combined. Combine — Merges the coincident RCPs into one RCP.

the one you selected. 3. For each set of coincident RCPs. Select the Combine button to merge that set of coincident RCPs._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Choose which RCP in the set of RCPs you want to keep and leave that line highlighted. The RCPs are combined. You can not combine RCPs that have an Invalid status. 4. and the Status of the remaining RCP. select the RCP information on the form to highlight the associated elements in the model.February 2003 2. The status of the removed RCP changes to Combined. changes to Kept. 210 .

Select Cancel when finished. The Status of the one-line you chose changes to Save. Modify 3. If no duplicate one-lines are found. then the Delete Duplicate One-Lines form displays. Continue to select the one-line to keep and deleting the other. Select the Delete button to delete the other one-line(s). For each set of duplicate one-lines in the form. The Status of the one-line you wanted to keep changes to Kept. Select the Delete Duplicate One-Lines command. — OR — If duplicate one-lines are found. Delete Duplicate One-Lines Steps 1. then the message No duplicate one-lines found displays and the command exits. Choose which one-line out of each set you want to keep. 211 . 5. Each set of duplicate one-lines is listed in the form separated by a dotted horizontal line. 4. select the one-line information on the form to highlight that one-line in the model._ _______________ Delete Duplicate One-Lines This command is used to check for and correct duplicate one-lines (having only two vertices) that occupy the same geographical space and terminate on the same RCPs. 9. 2. The one-line is deleted and its Status changes to Deleted.

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Identify Raceway element Identify an element for deletion. Using the form. route one-lines. Select the Delete Element command from the menu. see Precision Input Form. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. and annotation. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can locate elements. page 119. cosmetic graphics._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 212 . Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. RCPs (only if no one-lines are attached). Steps 1. equipment pointers. The system highlights the specified element. and exit a command. You can use this command to delete one-lines. drop points. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. For detailed information about precision input. The Delete Element precision input form displays. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. reject input. If you do not locate an acceptable element.February 2003 Delete Element This command removes elements from the design file. the system displays the message Element not found. 2.

Return to Step 2. the system deletes it. propagated fittings. Return to step 2. 9. It also deletes all cross sections. 3. Modify 213 . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element. Delete Element If you accept the highlighted element._ _______________ — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element for deletion. and RCPs (unless shared by another one-line) that are associated with the selected element. annotation.

page 119. reject input. route one-lines. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 214 . and exit a command. the annotation for the second one-line is deleted. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.February 2003 Remove RCP This command removes a raceway connect point (RCP) from the design file. You cannot use the Delete Element commands to remove an RCP. — The two attached one-lines belong to identical systems._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — The two attached one-lines are of the same one-line type. see Precision Input Form. accept input. The command will remove an identified RCP only if all of the following conditions are true: — Two one-lines are attached to the RCP. unless the RCP has no one-lines attached. Using the form. reset a command action. If both onelines are annotated. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the two one-lines form a single one-line element. Once such an RCP is removed. you can locate elements. At any point during this operating sequence. For detailed information about precision input.

If you accept the RCP. The system highlights the specified element. the command deletes it or displays an error message to the screen. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. the system prompts you to identify another. the system displays the message Element not found. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted RCP for deletion. Remove RCP 9. Raceway connect point Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted RCP for deletion. Return to step 2. The message disappears when you identify a valid RCP. If you reject the RCP. Modify 215 . 2. Identify Raceway RCP Identify an RCP to remove. 3._ _______________ Steps 1. The Remove RCP precision input form displays. Go to Step 2. If you do not locate an acceptable RCP. Select the Remove RCP command.

Identify Raceway Fitting or RCP Select the fitting. to delete. or the fitting’s RCP.February 2003 Delete Fitting This command deletes the raceway fitting from a selected RCP. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. 216 . 3. Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted fitting and delete it._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted fitting and return to step 2. 2. Steps 1. Select the Delete Fitting command. useful for removing manually placed special fittings (like pullboxes and conduit bodies) and replacing them with bends. This command does not remove the RCP.

reject input._ _______________ Remove One-Line Vertex This command deletes an internal one-line vertex. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. reset a command action. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Using the form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Modify Steps 1. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. 9. For detailed information about precision input. The selected vertex highlights. At any point during this operating sequence. and exit a command. You can not delete the end points of the one-line using this command. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Identify Raceway One-Line Vertex Select the vertex of the one-line you want to remove. Remove One-Line Vertex Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Precision Input Form. Select the Remove One-Line Vertex command. route one-lines. accept input. you can locate elements. 2. The one-line vertex closest to the point where you identify the one-line is automatically selected. 217 . page 119.

The vertex is removed. Return to step 2. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted vertex as the one to remove. If Automatic Propagation is on. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted vertex and choose another one.February 2003 3. the one-line repropagates._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Return to step 2. 218 .

the command will repropagate the one-line. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. (See Propagation Setup. reject input. and exit a command. Modify 219 . At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. route one-lines._ _______________ Minimize Joints This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in an identified one-line. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. you can locate elements.) Minimize Joints Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. For detailed information about precision input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. Using the form. reset a command action. If automatic propagation is toggled on. page 119. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line. 9. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation.

Select the Minimize Joints command from the menu. 3. The message will disappear when you identify a valid element. — OR — Reject the element. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line to minimize the number of its vertices. If you do not locate an acceptable element. the system displays the message Element not found. Identify Raceway one line Identify a one-line in the design.February 2003 Steps 1. The command reduces the number of vertices comprising the one-line to a minimum (while retaining the original geometry). The system highlights a valid one-line. Go to step 2. The command prompts you to identify another one-line. 220 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Go to step 2. The Minimize Joints precision input form displays. 2.

Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. To clear the Project Rule. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned._ _______________ Change System Parameters This command changes the system parameters. then the Project Rule can be assigned. If an * displays in the List column. the system Percent and the Project Rule. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. 9. Modify Percent — Specifies the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. Change System Parameters Field Descriptions Primary System — Displays the primary system. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. When a row is selected. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. select the *. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Project Rules cannot be assigned. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. The primary system determines the symbology of the elements. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Systems — Displays all the systems associated with the selected element. for the systems associated with a single raceway element. 221 .

2. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Select the Change System Parameters command. The precision input form displays. page 119. Using the form. you can locate elements. — OR — Exit the command. see Precision Input Form. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 3. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. 222 . route one-lines. reject input.February 2003 Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. 4. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reset a command action. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. For detailed information about precision input._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without making any changes to the selected element. The identified element highlights. 5. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. and exit a command. The selected element is changed to reflect you selections. Steps 1. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications.

copy. Modify Group Commands You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. You can also propagate one-lines in a particular group using these commands. Topics 9. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Annotate Element by Group — Places. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. Modify Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. annotation. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. reviews. and delete elements of specified groups. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. three-lines. then selecting Modify Group Commands. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model._ _______________ Modify Group Commands The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. then selecting Palette. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. and so forth). 223 . and to review or edit element annotation.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group. 224 .February 2003 Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line.

any time you are modifying raceway elements. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify Group commands. you can use these commands throughout the design session. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. page 119 . Group Workflow You must use the Define Group command to create and activate an element group before using other Modify Group commands. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file. page 287 for instructions about setting up your systems and oneline types. 9. page 253 and Runtime Setup Commands. three-lines. annotation. See Setup Commands. Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. you should use these commands. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. 225 . For detailed information about precision input. page 129 for information about placing elements in the model). Modify Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. not MicroStation manipulation commands. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. For reliable results. You must also have an active system and one-line type defined in the design file._ _______________ Using the Modify Group Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Using the Modify Group Commands Before Using These Commands These commands require that you have existing raceway elements in your design file (see Design Commands. and so forth). see Precision Input Form.

select the group name key-in field. The system adds the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. All groups you create using this command are dropped when you exit the EE Raceway design session. To change the active group. then a command will prompt you once to accept/reject the specified group as a whole before performing the command action. Use caution when you are manipulating groups in Entire Group mode. The system prompts you just once to accept/reject a group for manipulation. Once you have defined a group of Raceway elements using this command. If the toggle is set to Entire Group. using the Hilite option. however. A group is a temporary association of Raceway elements in your model. 226 . Available Groups — Lists the groups you have already created. select a group from the list. In general. The active group is highlighted in the list. To enter a group name. you should assign your groups meaningful names that reflect their contents. Identifying the contents of an existing group can be done graphically.February 2003 Define Group This command compiles a group from elements you specify. If the toggle is set to Single Element. and key in a name. Single Element/Entire Group — Determines how Modify Group commands will act upon existing groups. you can manipulate the group as a whole or in part. then a command will prompt you to accept/reject every element within a specified group before performing the command action. The key-in field above the list accepts input for group name when you are defining a new group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Create — Creates a group containing the elements you specify in the EE Element Types list.

Add to — Adds elements you specify from the EE Element Types list to an existing group. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. When processing is complete. select the button. You must choose at least one element type when creating. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. To initiate the Drop operation. Copy — Copies the specified contents of one group to a new group. or dropping elements from a group. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements the new group contains. select Add to. It is not necessary to select Accept. three-lines. When processing is complete. select Drop from. select Drop. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. Clear Hilite — Clears all highlighting placed in the design when you use the Hilite command. and then select Accept. the system automatically drops the entire group. Drop — Removes the active group (the highlighted group in the Available Groups list). and select Hilite. The system compiles the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. and all annotation. RCPs. 9. The system drops the elements using the selection method you specified in the Graphic Method list. drop points. Drop from — Removes elements you specify in the EE Element Types list from an existing group. If you remove all elements from a group. review the form message display for information about the number of elements dropped from the group. EE Element Types — Displays all available element types available for inclusion in or deletion from a group. The system then compiles a group according to your specifications. key in a group name. Hilite — Highlights in the design file the entire contents of an existing group. and select Accept. Types include one-lines. select Copy. To initiate the Copy action. To initiate the Hilite action. select an existing group from the Available Groups list. The system automatically highlights the group contents in the drawing. to equipment. Modify 227 . To initiate the Drop from action. review the form Message Area for information about the number of elements added to the group. and then select Accept. adding elements to. and key in a new group name. Define Group To initiate the Add to operation. select a group from the Available Groups list. and then select Accept._ _______________ To initiate the Create operation. When processing is complete. select an existing group from the Available Groups list.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . EE Method — This list displays optional restrictions for the items selected in the EE Element Types list. three-lines. Clear All — Clears all selected element types from the EE Element Types list. only those element types (RCPs. – Attributes . 228 . Once you have displayed the System list. or you can select all displayed systems (using Select All). Once you have displayed the One-Line Type list. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before selecting the Accept button on the main form. you must Cancel (X) or Confirm (√) your selections before you can select the Accept button on the main form.February 2003 Select All — Selects every element type from the EE Element Types list. and so forth) belonging to that one-line type will be included in your group. When you select a system from this list. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. – System .Displays a list of available element types from which you can define selection attributes.Displays a list of available one-line types. You can select individual one-line types from this list. Clear All cancels the selections you have made from the list. and so forth) belonging to that system will be included in your group. When you select a one-line type from this list. You can select individual systems from this list.Displays a list of available systems. onelines. one-lines. or you can select all displayed one-line types (using Select All). – One-Line Type . only those element types (RCPs. three-lines. You can use the three options in this list to restrict the elements in your group to those belonging to particular one-line types or systems.

the system inserts into the group only those one-line trays contained within the fence you place.Prompts you to identify specified element types in the design file to drop from or include in a group. – Fence Shape . You will use these methods to identify elements for group creation. These methods can serve to further restrict the element types you are including in your group.Drops from or includes in a group all specified element types in the design. Modify 229 . select the Accept button on the main form. – All Elements . an attribute list form displays for that element type in which you can specify the attributes to include in the group identification. 9. select the Cancel (X) button on the attribute form. To reset out of the attribute list form and disregard the attributes. For example. – View . – Fence Block . insertion into groups.Drops from or includes in a group those specified elements types contained in a view you identify.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence shape you place in the design._ _______________ When you select an element type from this list.Drops from or includes in a group those specified element types contained within a fence block you place in the design. Define Group Graphic Method — Displays the available methods for selecting group elements. Once you have defined the attributes. and select Fence Block from this list. or deletion from groups. if you identified one-line trays for insertion into a group. – Selection .

Create a group of elements: — Key in a name for the group in the field provided. 230 . The Groups form displays. Set the Entire Group/Single Element and Hilite On/Hilite Off toggles the way you want. Select the Define Group command. 4. — Using the Graphic Method you defined. and Graphic Method lists to define which elements to place in the group and how you want to select them in the design file. Select one of the group modification commands. The group is created. EE Method. — Select the Create button under Group Operations. — Select the Process button at the top of the form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select your elements for the group. — Use the EE Element Types. The number of elements added to the group displays at the bottom of the form. 2. — OR — Select one of the available group from the list 3.February 2003 Steps 1.

press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Copy Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reject input. — If you have a fence in the design. see Define Group. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. route one-lines. 9. A fence group overrides the active group. 231 ._ _______________ Copy Element by Group This command copies all or selected valid elements in the active group. using the Define Group command. 2. Select the Copy Element by Group command from the menu. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. Steps 1. go to step 3. At any point during this operating sequence. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. and exit a command. page 226. see Precision Input Form. For detailed information about precision input. If you have not defined a group. page 119. the message No active group defined displays. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. you can locate elements. go to step 4. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Using the form. Modify The Copy by Group precision input form displays. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. You must define a temporary group of elements.

the command exits automatically. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. the command exits automatically. Define origin Enter a point to use as a base for the group copy. Enter placement point Enter a point for the location of the element you are copying. the command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the element you are copying. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Otherwise. 5. Elements within the active group highlight. The command exits automatically. The system returns you to step 3 if there are group elements that remain uncopied. 4. Otherwise. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. The system copies the element as specified.February 2003 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If there are group elements that remain uncopied. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. you are returned to step 3. 6. Repeat this step. 232 . — OR — Reject the active group. Otherwise.

select the column value field and delete the blank character. You can enter blank spaces into the design. you are allowed only to review the annotation (read only access). To delete an override on a reference database attribute. 233 . you can change the specifications or sizes of raceway components. The displayed columns reside in the mscolumns table in the database. Intelligent annotation is recognized by the EE Raceway product and can be added to an EE database. The Annotate Element command recognizes one-lines. Empty <Return>s. straights. Using this command. Modify Field Descriptions Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified element. Annotate Element by Group 9. using your keyboard space bar. reviews. You can only review the Column name column information. and key in the new value. and fittings. though the product does not recognize such annotation nor can the product add it to an EE database. and edits intelligent annotation for some or all raceway elements associated with a specified group. enter nothing into the design. Once you have deleted the override. For straights and fittings. Otherwise. You can review and modify the values in this field. however. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. Raceway Connect Points (RCP). You can also add cosmetic text to a raceway model for display purposes._ _______________ Annotate Element by Group This command places. the field remains null. Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. select the field. To change the values associated with the element. three-lines.

Where the toggle is On. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. If no key exists in the user element. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. 234 . If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. If an * displays in the List column. Where UD displays in the column. the value is saved back to user data. it becomes an override key to the reference database. The next time you enter the annotation form. List column — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. Key Description — Displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. Source — Dislays the source of the corresponding column value.February 2003 If blanks exist for a field. If you change a column value. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. then the value has been defined from the design file. Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key into the reference database. If Ref displays in the column. the Access column displays a R/W. To display the codelist. The key field is updated. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. Once you place an override key on an element. select the *. You can only review the information in this column. the Source column will display either Ref or Dgn. When modified. If you can only view (read) the column value. then it will display an R. where New had displayed. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. the corresponding column value comes from user data. select the field. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. If you delete the value in this field. Access column — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. and key in a new value. the Default key is used. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. but cannot delete it. the key specified in the user element is used. If Dgn displays in the column. Otherwise._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the column displays New until you select Confirm (√) to save your changes. then the value derives from the reference database. the field remains null. You can only review the information in this field. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. you can modify it. the value will display in the design where you place it. To change the displayed value. Display On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the design display for each column value.

9. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. and then select Confirm (√). Annotate Element by Group From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. To add values from the displayed specification table rows. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. then a second form containing all matching rows displays._ _______________ Global/Single — Determines whether or not the annotation modifications you are making to the specified element will be applied to all identical element types within the group. setting the toggle to Global while annotating an RCP will change the annotation for all RCPs within the group when you select Confirm (√). Override — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R). If the toggle is set to Single for the same RCP annotation. which automatically activates it. If more than one row matches the criteria. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. Modify 235 . select the row you want. Clear — Clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. For example. Available operators are described later in this section. the system will modify annotation only for that RCP when you select Confirm (√). the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. Clearing the column values allows you to key in new select criteria. If you select Cancel (X).

February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. This operator is a wild card. the system assumes =. You must define a temporary group of elements. reset a command action. This operator is a wild card. 236 . If you do not enter another operator. A fence group overrides the active group. representing a single character. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. page 119. (For information about the command. see Precision Input Form. and exit a command. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. using the Define Group command. representing zero or more characters. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. accept input.) Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Types numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. page 226 . you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. reject input. see Define Group. route one-lines. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. Using the form. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value.

Repeat this step._ _______________ Steps 1. The prompt indicates the column alias you are placing. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted group element. The command exits automatically. The system highlights the group contents. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. 237 . 4. The column value displays in drag mode attached to the cursor. — If you have a fence in the design. Go to Step 3. Select the Annotate Element by Group command from the menu. 2. 5. The Annotate by Group precision input form displays. reset <R> to skip. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the annotation form. the command exits. The system highlights another group element. Go to step 1. — If there is not a fence in the design. 6. The system displays the Annotate Element form for the identified element. go to step 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. go to step 2. Modify Reject the highlighted group element. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. 3. If no group elements remain. Placing [column alias] Data point <D> to place. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the annotation form without saving your changes. — OR — Annotate Element by Group 9.

Go to step 3.February 2003 Position the column value. When there are no more values to place for the element type. If you set the toggle to Global. Go to step 3. these values are loaded into the project database. — OR — If you set the toggle to Single. The system places all new displayed annotation for the specified element. optionally. the system prompts you to annotate other element types within the group. Any value placed with the Annotate Element by Group command will be entered into the drawing and. the system places the same annotation for all identical element types in the group. 238 . the system returns you to step 3 to annotate other elements within the group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . displayed. When you load the project database. The new value displays in the design file. and place a data point.

Equipment pointers and drop points are not copied even if they are part of the defined group. page 119. you can locate elements. page 226. see Define Group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 2. Clone Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. Modify The Clone Group precision input form displays. You must define a temporary group of elements. and exit a command. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For detailed information about precision input. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 3. — If you have a fence in the design. useful when the same elements are to be placed at regular intervals. Steps 1. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. reset a command action. Using the form. using the Define Group command. go to step 2. route one-lines._ _______________ Clone Element by Group This command copies the active group multiple times. If you have not defined a group. accept input. go to step 4. 9. 239 . reject input. Select the Clone Group command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence. the message No active group defined displays. A fence group overrides the active group.

Confirm (√) the number of time to clone the group. Go to step 6. — OR — Reject the active group. 4. — OR — Cancel the form and reenter the number of clones. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. A warning box displays verifying the number of times you want to clone the identified group._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The clone elements are placed in the design file. Return to step 2. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. the command exits automatically. each successive clone is placed the same distance and direction from the previous clone as the first clone is from the original group. 8. 6. 5.February 2003 3. Repeat this step. Define origin Identify a point in the group to use as the origin for the copies. 240 . Enter placement point Identify the location of the first copy. Otherwise. If you are placing more than one clone. Key in number of clones Key in the number of times to clone the identified group. 7.

241 . you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. go to step 3. Modify Steps 1._ _______________ Propagate by Group This command expands into three-dimensional elements all or selected valid one-line segments and RCPs from the active group. The Project by Group precision input form displays. Select the Propagate by Group command from the menu. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. — If you have a fence in the design. reject input. You must define a temporary group of elements. 9. page 226. You can set active parameters for propagation through the Propagation Setup form. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. This command displays to the screen the pro. Using the form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reset a command action. see Propagation Setup. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. route one-lines. A fence group overrides the active group. go to step 2. see Highlight Propagation Errors. page 297 . using the Define Group command. which resides in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory). page 119. The Propagate by Group command automatically adds propagated (three-dimensional) fittings between non-straight raceway segments with a common RCP. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For a description of some of the delivered fittings. page 194 . To view errors that occur during propagation. see Define Group. select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. For information about the form. page 314 . For information about using this command. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. accept input. and exit a command.err file. For detailed information about precision input. Propagate by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Propagate Element. go to step 4.

and then highlights another group element for propagation. or until you exit the command. the command exits automatically. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to manipulate them as a group. or until you exit the command. If no group elements remain. The command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. The system highlights another group element for propagation. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group.February 2003 2. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. — OR — Reject the active group. The system propagates the element. If no group elements remain for propagation. — OR — Reject the highlighted element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. go to step 3. Go to step 1. and exits automatically. 4. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Repeat this step until you have processed all elements within the group. 242 . — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the command propagates all valid elements within the fence. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system propagates every element belonging to the group.

9. then the first fitting that is of greater nominal size than the one-line nominal size is used. page 119. page 425 for a list of the delivered default rules. If in the fitting table there is a nominal size the same as the largest one-line nominal size. For detailed information about precision input. You must define the rules in the reference database. If there is no fitting of that nominal size. see Precision Input Form. you can locate elements. See EE Databases. Place Fitting by Rule by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You can add to or replace the delivered rule set by editing the tl_fit_env table in the database. Using the form._ _______________ Place Fitting by Rule by Group This command places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. A fence group overrides the active group. accept input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. For example. The spec table and the fitting table are defined in the rule. 243 . one rule might define that a CLB fitting be placed at a 90 degree intersection of two conduits. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. then the largest fitting available is used. Modify You must define a temporary group of elements. The fitting size is determined by comparing the spec table nominal size of all one-lines at the RCP and selecting the largest nominal size among them. reject input. That nominal size is then compared to the fitting table nominal sizes. page 226. then that fitting is used. route one-lines. and exit a command. If there is no nominal size fitting larger than the one-line nominal size. see Define Group. reset a command action. using the Define Group command. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. At any point during this operating sequence. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element.

— OR — Reject the highlighted element. then the message Unable to find a rule that applies. The Group Place Fitting by Rule precision input form displays. Go on to step 3 if Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. The system highlights another group element if any elements remain uncopied. Go to step 5 if Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Repeat this step. — OR — Reject the active group. go to step 3. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. Otherwise the correct fitting as defined by the rule is placed on the RCP. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. the command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If no rule is defined for the selected RCP’s situation. If you have not defined a group. The command exits automatically. Select the Place Fitting by Rule by Group command. Otherwise. 244 . displays. 4. — If you have a fence in the design. the message No active group defined displays. go to step 4. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. 3.February 2003 Steps 1. 2.

Add Systems Group Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. Press <D> to accept the group as the one to add systems to. The Add Systems form displays. using this command you can add an alarm and control system to an existing element with a communication system. it will not be duplicated. Select the system or systems you want to add and select Confirm (√). A fenced group will override the active temporary group. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and command. This command will not change the master system. The group that the systems will be added to highlights. It will only append systems to the element. For example. The system(s) is added. Select the Add Systems Group command. 3. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. see Define Group. If you try to add a system that already exists on the element. the system defined at placement. 2. Modify 245 . 9._ _______________ Add Systems Group This command defines multiple systems for a single one-line. page 226 . Steps 1.

Systems — Displays all the available systems. Changing the active system will cause the graphic symbology to change to the symbology define for the new system. use this command when you want to change an existing high voltage tray to a low voltage tray. Project Rules cannot be assigned.February 2003 Replace Systems by Group This command changes the defined active system(s) for a group. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. If the Project Rule Set is not defined. While this button is depressed. Subsystem — This button allows the selection of subsystems. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. This command performs a total replacement of all systems. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. 246 . all defined systems for the group are removed and replaced by the new systems. The total Percent space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. For example._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the subsystem are all unselected. Percent — Displays the current Percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. The total of the system Percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. Field Descriptions Systems — This button allows the selection of the active system. This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. When a new active system is selected. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s "project" table. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. that is.

A network may be thought of as all RCPs. The active group is changed to the new system type. When a row is selected. To clear the Project Rule. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the form and the command. Select the Replace Systems by Group command._ _______________ List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. see Define Group. When defining the group for this command. 9. 3. If an * displays in the List column. then the Project Rule can be assigned. Modify 2. Before Using this Command You must define a temporary group of elements using the Define Group command and the group mode must be set to Entire Group. The active group to be changed highlights. Select the new system type from the form and select Confirm (√). To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Press <D> to accept the group. You can not replace a system on just one element in a network of elements that have connectivity. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for this command. Replace Systems by Group Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. — OR — Press <R> to reject the group and exit the command. select the *. Steps 1. and so forth that are associated through a series of graphically connected one-lines. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. you must define a group that contains all elements that have connectivity. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. one-lines. A fenced group will override the active temporary group. drop points. 247 . The Replace Systems form displays. page 226 .

you can locate elements. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.) The following example demonstrates the effect of the Minimize Joints command on a oneline. page 297 for information about the Automatic Propagation toggle. Using the form. (Automatic propagation is on to show the resulting seamless representation.February 2003 Minimize Joints by Group This command reduces to a minimum the number of vertices in valid one-line(s) within the active group. the command will repropagate each affected one-line. 248 . page 226. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input.) Automatic propagation must be toggled on in order for the results of this command to be visible. page 119. If automatic propagation is toggled on. using the Define Group command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . see Precision Input Form. You must define a temporary group of elements. and exit a command. A fence group overrides the active group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. while retaining the original geometry of the one-line(s). (See Propagation Setup. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. see Define Group. reject input.

— If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. The system minimizes the number of vertices comprising the one-line. Repeat this step. Go to step 3. The command exits automatically. Modify 3._ _______________ Steps 1. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. Raceway one line Accept/reject Accept the highlighted one-line. 4. If there are no valid one-lines remaining in the group. — OR — Reject the highlighted one-line. the command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the system prompts you to minimize the number of vertices for each one-line within the fence. — If you have a fence in the design. 2. Repeat this step. The system then identifies another valid one-line in the group. Minimize Joints by Group — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. Select the Minimize Joints by Group command from the menu. Accept/reject Group ([group name]) 249 . go to step 4. if any remain. go to step 3. go to step 2. the vertices of all one-lines within the fence are reduced to a minimum number. 9. and the command exits automatically. The Minimize Joints Group precision input form displays. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. and then identifies another valid one-line within the group (if any remain). — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form.

The command exits automatically._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The command exits automatically. The system minimizes the number of vertices for all valid one-line elements within the group. 250 . — OR — Reject the active group.February 2003 Accept the active group.

For detailed information about precision input. If you have not defined a group. Accept/reject fence contents Accept the contents of the fence to define them as a group. 251 . and the command exits automatically. 2. the system prompts you to delete each element within the fence. route one-lines. using the Define Group command. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form. the message No active group defined displays. Go to step 3. go to step 3. Delete Element by Group Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. see Define Group. page 226. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. — OR — Reject the contents of the fence. page 119. you can locate elements. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. Modify — If you have a fence in the design. The Delete by Group precision input form displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. A fence group overrides the active group. and exit a command. You must define a temporary group of elements. Placing a fence around elements in the design also constitutes a group for the purposes of this command. go to step 4. reject input. 9. see Precision Input Form. reset a command action. Select the Delete Element by Group command from the menu. — If Entire Group is the active toggle on the Define Group form. go to step 2. Using the form. Steps 1. At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. the contents of the group are deleted. — If Single Element is the active toggle on the Define Group form._ _______________ Delete Element by Group This command deletes all or selected valid elements in an active group from the design file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. The system deletes the element. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. The command exits automatically. — OR — Reject the highlighted element. Accept/reject Group [group name] Accept the active group. The system deletes all valid elements within the group.February 2003 The command exits automatically. Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. Repeat this step. If there are no remaining group elements for deletion. 4. — OR — Reject the active group. and prompts you to delete another group element. the command exits automatically. the command exits automatically. The system prompts you to delete another group element if any remain for deletion. 252 . The command exits automatically.

review. and modifies the graphic symbology control for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command. and symbology settings for your design file._ _______________ 10. 10. Your system/application manager should ensure that the reference database contains the necessary systems and one-line types before you use these commands. Setup Commands In a new design file. The Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Cell Creation Commands — Create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. systems. reviews. you must use the Setup commands before using any other command group. Symbology Control — Defines. text nodes. and cross sections. one-line types. Set Text Defaults — Defines. then selecting Palette from the resulting pulldown menu. and modifies the raceway default parameters for symbols. Setup 253 . model annotation. RCPs. working view. Set Conduit Sizing Attributes — Defines which conduit attributes will be used selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command. and modify the default parameters. Commands Set Raceway Defaults — Defines. and engineering units. reviews. Set Symbology Control — Selects the standard graphic symbology control for all systems and one-line types in a design file. reviews. report IDs. Define System — Selects any or all systems from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. and modifies the default parameters for text. Define One-Line Type — Selects any or all available one-line types from those available in the reference database for use in the design file. Setup Commands The Setup commands allow you to define.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Model Commands — Place and manipulate a model information in the design file. 254 .

Using the Setup Commands Before Using These Commands You must have a valid reference database attached to your design file before using the Setup commands. Some of the setups performed by this group of commands are required for later design work and database operations. Setup 255 . see the appropriate command descriptions. 10. you must have defined at least one system and one-line type from the database using the Define System and Define One-Line Type commands._ _______________ Using the Setup Commands When to Use These Commands You will typically use Setup commands when you enter a design file for the first time. Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. For individual command prerequisites. Group Workflow Before using the symbology commands in this group (Set Symbology Control and Symbology Control).

and key in a new value. You will enter all raceway default values through the EE Raceway Defaults form. You can review. Duct — Specifies whether to use conduit or cable when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. To change a displayed value. You can review. select the field. and Raceway Connect Point (RCP) parameters. Cross Section — Displays the default Scale Factor and Rotation Angle for cross sections. page 164 for more information. page 164 for more information. and key in a new value. and/or modify the settings. define. Use the Set Symbology Control to make changes to individual. It also allows you to view the reference database contents for RCP. see Define Duct Cross Section. define. and modifies raceway defaults. The system uses these settings when annotating the model either during cell creation or after you have placed one in the design file. between the routed cable/conduit. and/or modify the values in these fields. see Define Duct Cross Section. and/or modify any of the values in these fields. in sub-units. symbol defaults. To change a displayed value. Use these fields to set the default symbology for different systems in a design file. select the field. represented by the matrix buttons. and key in a new value._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . select the field. Parameters — Displays the EE Raceway default digitizing parameters. including cross section parameters. and the shell of the duct bank when using the Define Duct Cross Section command. reviews. such as Color or Active Angle. Default settings are applied to new systems created in or added to a design file. To change a displayed value. Margin Width — Defines the distance.February 2003 Set Raceway Defaults This command defines. You can review. 256 . define. Global Symbology — Displays the default symbology settings for Model Annotation. existing systems. Changes in these fields do not affect existing systems.

select the field. select first the key field and then the Display button. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit without saving your changes. select the field. 10. Set Raceway Defaults Steps 1. Default Key — Displays the current default keys for RCP (raceway connect point). 3. or drop point). Setup 257 . and key in a new value. Select the Set Raceway Defaults command. The scale includes views 1 through 8. This value will also become the default RCP weight on the Symbology Control form. The EE Raceway Defaults form displays._ _______________ Working view — Displays the current working view for the design file. and key in a new value. To change a displayed value. and drop point annotation. 2. To change the current working view. You can review. To display the current default data from the database for a particular element (RCP. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. select the slide bar. Symbols — Displays the names of the cells that represent equipment pointers and drop points. and/or modify the value in this field. precision input uses the working view to place and locates points in the design. The working view determines the orientation of text and cells you place through precision input. You can only view this data. define. RCP — Displays the Default Weight for RCPs. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. equipment pointer. and/or modify this key. define. To change the displayed value. and drag it along the scale until the desired view number displays. Additionally. The information will display in the scrollable list in the lower right corner of the form. equipment pointer. You can review.

February 2003 Define System This command allows you to select any or all available systems from the reference database for use in the design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. you must have at least one system defined in the design file. 2. If you need systems not available to you. The systems you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√). Caution should be used when adding these to the database._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . as well as those already selected for the current design file. The System Definition form displays those systems available for selection from the reference database. — OR — Select those systems listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. The System Definition form displays. Select the systems in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. To remove ALL systems from definition in the design file. so as to avoid duplication of elements. To define ALL systems from the reference database in the present design file. In order to place one-lines. select the Clear All button. select the Select All button. 258 . Steps 1. Select the Define System command.

Define System 10. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. Setup 259 . 3._ _______________ The systems you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file.

To define ALL one-line types from the reference database in the design file. If you need one-line types not available to you. Select the Define One-Line Type command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 260 . The One Line Type Definition form displays those oneline types available in the database. as well as those already selected for the current design file. Steps 1. Caution should be used when adding these to the database. select the Select All button. select the Clear All button. You must define one-line types for the design file before you can use related commands. Select the one-line types in the From Database column that you want to define in the present design file. you should ask the system/application manager to add them to the reference database. so as to avoid duplication of elements. To remove ALL one-line types from definition in the design file.February 2003 Define One-Line Type This command allows you to select any or all available one-line types from the reference database for use in the design file. 2. such as Set Active One-Line Type and Place One-Line Type. The One Line Type Definition form displays. — OR — Select those one-line types listed in the To Design column that you no longer want defined for the design file. The one-line types you select display in the To Design column and will be defined in the design file once you select the Confirm button (√).

_ _______________ 3. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Setup 261 . 10. Define One-Line Type The one-line types you select are deleted from the To Design column and will no longer be defined in the design file. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.

For more information. see Symbology Control.February 2003 Set Symbology Control This command defines the standard graphic symbology for all systems and one-line types in a design file. In cases where you do not specify overrides for the one-line types within a system. page 260 . to make any changes in symbology. You can specify the one-line types for which to change the standard symbology by setting them to override mode. Therefore. see Define System. you must first use the Set Symbology Control command to specify the systems and one-line types that can be changed. those oneline types will use a system default. all symbology is taken from the system defaults. For more information. 262 . page 264 . page 258 and Define One-Line Type. You can also modify the system default symbology details if necessary. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays a matrix of systems and one-line types and the standard graphic symbology assigned to each system (all one-line types within a system are originally assigned the same symbology). When you enter a new design file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Before Using This Command You must have defined at least one system and one-line type in the design file. The Symbology Control command allows you to set up the symbology details for all the override cases within a system.

select the individual area that matches a system and one-line type to "turn on" an override for that case. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. 3. Using your cursor. Each one-line type within the system will then have its own symbology defined. — OR — Steps Toggle the Available button in each field to None to change the defaults symbology for all one-line types within a system. Select the Set Symbology Control command. The Override settings you selected are deleted from the Override field and the default settings restored. select the No Overrides button. The Override setting displays in the appropriate field(s). — OR — Select the individual Override settings you wish to "turn off" (return to default status). Setup 263 ._ _______________ Steps 1. so default symbology is not necessary for that system. 10. To turn off ALL selected Override settings. — OR — Select a one-line type from the list to "turn on" the override for that type in all systems. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Set Graphic Symbology Control form displays. 2.

and key in a system name. You must have at least one system and one-line type defined for the design file in order to use this command. select another system from the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . To change the displayed system. or select the field. or select the field. and key in the new value.February 2003 Symbology Control This command defines. select the field. One Line Type Overrides — Displays the one-line type within the displayed system for which you can change the symbology settings. 264 . System Default will display in the One-Line Type display list. System — Displays the system for which you can currently change the symbology settings. To change the displayed one-line type (or system default). The display list contains a list of available one-line types within the currently displayed system. and modifies the graphic symbology for those one-line types you specified using the Set Symbology Control command (see Set Symbology Control. The display list contains a list of available systems. You can review and edit these settings. Symbology — Displays the symbology settings for the selected system and one-line type. reviews. page 262 for more information about this command). and key in a new value. If you have not set overrides for all one-line types within a system. To change a value in the list. The Symbology Control form displays the current symbology settings for all systems and corresponding one-line types. select another one-line type from the list.

_ _______________ Steps 1. The Symbology Control form displays. Select the Symbology Control command. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Setup 265 . Symbology Control 10. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3. 2.

Text Nodes — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text nodes in the design file. Field Descriptions Font — Displays the default font style number. or select a value from the list.February 2003 Set Text Defaults This command defines. or select a value from the list. and modifies the MicroStation default parameters for text. To change the current text string justification. You will enter all values using the Text form. To change the current text node justification. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. select the button that graphically represents the desired justification. Line length — Displays the default length for lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. and engineering units. Height — Displays the default text height in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Line spacing — Displays the default vertical spacing between lines of text in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). text nodes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can modify the justification using either the buttons or the list. 266 . Width — Displays the default text width in a ratio of master units to sub units (#:#). Text String — These buttons and the associated display list display the current justification for text strings in the design file. reviews.

— OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ Engineering Units — These fields (Master units. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. Select the Set Text Defaults command. 2. You can only review the displayed settings. and Positional units) display the current PDS engineering units. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Sub units. Set Text Defaults Steps 1. Setup 267 . 10. The Text form displays.

Steps 1. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the form without saving any changes. Select the Set Conduit Sizing Attributes command. The Set Conduit Sizing Attributes form displays. — THEN — Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the form. Define which attributes to use. 2. 268 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Set Conduit Sizing Attributes This command defines which conduit attributes will be used in selecting the correct size conduit in the Conduit Sizing command.

You must have write access to the library before modifying it. This section contains detailed descriptions of the following commands: Create Model Cell — Creates or recreates a model cell to carry the sheet name of a drawing. Create Cell Commands 10. You must have a cell library attached to the design file in order to activate the Create Cell commands. Create Equipment Pointer Cell — Creates an equipment pointer symbol for later placement in the design file. Setup 269 . and modify the copied version. rway. The cells you create using this command are stored. which resides in win32app\eerway\dgn. If you want to modify the delivered library. EE Raceway is delivered with a sample cell library. Create Drop Point Cell — Creates a drop point symbol for later placement in the design file._ _______________ Create Cell Commands The Create Cell commands create various types of raceway cells necessary for creating EE Raceway models. copy it to a nonproduction directory. along with all existing cells.cel. in your cell library.

Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 270 . To display a list of available cell libraries. key in rc= in the MicroStation Command Window. For detailed information about precision input. Before Using These Commands You must have a cell library with read/write privileges attached to the design file. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the Create Cell commands. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Create Cell commands. see Precision Input Form. you can use these commands throughout the design session. because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. page 119 .February 2003 Using the Create Cell Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups.

_ _______________
Create Model Cell
Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Create Model Cell

This command allows you to create a model cell and to store that cell permanently in your cell library.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Model button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

10. Setup

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to Accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

271

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 10. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing sheet, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

272

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Model Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

273

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Create Equipment Pointer Cell
This command allows you to create a equipment pointer symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the To Equipment button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence.

5.

Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

274

_ _______________
6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

Create Equipment Pointer Cell

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing equipment tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip

10. Setup

For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

275

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

276

_ _______________
Create Drop Point Cell

Create Drop Point Cell

This command allows you to create a drop point symbol and to store that cell permanently in your cell library. Your cell library must contain a drop point cell for the placement of onelines in the design file (the drop point establishes connectivity between an RCP and a one-line where the two are of a different one-line type). Make sure you have a cell library attached to the design file before using this command and be sure the library is not read only. To display a list of available cell libraries, key in rc=.

Steps
1. Select the Create Cell command from the command menu. The Select cell type form displays.

2. 3.

Select the Drop Point button from the form. Enter first fence point If no fence is defined, place the first data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to include any existing annotation that you want as part of the cell. Make enough room within the fence to include all text elements within the fence. Do not include any elements within the fence that you do not want as part of the cell. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command.

4.

Enter second fence point

10. Setup

Place the second data point of a fence block diagonal. Include all the graphic elements of the component. Be sure to make room to include any text elements within the fence. 5. Accept/reject fence (This is the first prompt if a fence is already established when you start the command.) Press <D> to accept the fence. — OR — Press <R> to reject the fence. Go to step 2.

277

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 6. When you accept the fence, a form displays prompting you to Close or Annotate.

If you select Annotate, go to step 7. If you select Close, go to step 11. 7. The Annotate Element form displays, allowing you to add annotation to the cell and displaying those values already in the cell.

8.

To enter a value, select the Column value field, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the field again and key in the new value. Turn the Display toggle on for any text attribute you want displayed in the cell. For detailed information about the annotation form, see Annotate Element, page 178 . When complete, save your modifications by selecting Confirm (√). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving the changes. Return to step 7.

9.

Placing drop point tag, etc. Data point <D> to place, reset <R> to skip For all new displayed text attributes, you are prompted to place any new values. Any values (including empty enter data fields) already present in the cell are edited automatically. The prompt tells you which value you are placing. Underlines (for empty enter data fields) will not be displayed on the screen cursor like other new values. However, they will be placed in the cell (and visible) when you press <D>.

278

_ _______________
Move the text to the desired position in the drawing and press <D>. The value is placed in the cell as you indicated. This step repeats for each enter data field. When complete, you are returned to step 7. All new non-displayed text attributes are placed at the center of the active fence. 10. If you try to close with the fence around invalid elements, various error messages will display. Refer to Error Messages, page 377 for descriptions of these messages. When you select Close, the Close cell parameters form displays.

Create Drop Point Cell

11.

To enter a value, select the input box, key in the value, and press <Return>. To make a change or correction, select the input box again and key in the new value. You must enter a cell name. The description is optional. When complete, confirm your entries by selecting Confirm (√). Identify cell origin Place a data point to define the cell origin. This point must be within the graphic extent of the fenced elements. The cell is created and placed into the attached cell library. The message Accept/reject Successful Completion displays as long as the fence is still active. — OR — Press <R> to reject the cell. Return to step 11.

12.

10. Setup

279

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Model Commands
These commands are used to place and manipulate model information in your design file.

Commands
Lock Model — Locks the symbology control parameters, the defined systems, and the defined one-line types. Move Model Annotation — Moves the model annotation within the design file.

Unlock Model — Unlocks the model.

Annotate Model — Adds, changes, or reviews the sheet name in a model.

280

_ _______________
Using the Model Commands When to Use These Commands
You may want to use the Lock Model command after performing basic design setups to lock the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. However, you can use these commands throughout the design session. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Using the Model Commands

Before Using These Commands
You should complete the symbology and basic design file setups before locking the model. You should be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Model commands, because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. For detailed information about precision input, see Precision Input Form, page 119 .

Group Workflow
Before you can annotate or move annotation in the model, you must have locked the model using the Lock Model command.

Operating Information
During the operating sequence for any of these commands, you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file.

10. Setup

281

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Lock Model
This command locks the model. The locking of the model locks the symbology control parameters and the defined systems and one-line types. Therefore, you should lock your model after setup, but before placing graphics in a file in order to protect your parameters. You must lock the model in order to load the drawing into the project database.

Steps
1. Select the Lock Model command. The model is locked. If the model was locked when you selected this command, the message Model is already locked displays.

282

The Move Model Annotation precision input form displays. Steps 1. and place it. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Enter placement point Move the annotation to the desired location. page 119. Setup 283 . Using the form. route one-lines. 10. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. accept input. At any point during this operating sequence. reset a command action. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. For detailed information about precision input. 2. you can locate elements._ _______________ Move Model Annotation This command moves the model annotation within a design. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Select the Move Model Annotation command. Move Model Annotation Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. — OR — Exit the command. see Precision Input Form. reject input. The command checks the design file for the existing model annotation and places it in drag mode.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 3. 2. Select Confirm (√) to unlock the model. A warning form displays. Steps 1. Select the Unlock Model command. If you want to change the symbology control or add new systems and one-line types to a model that has been locked. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without unlocking the model.February 2003 Unlock Model This command unlocks the model. 284 . you must first unlock the model using this command.

_ _______________ Annotate Model Annotate Model This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. 3. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. 2. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. Select Confirm (√) to accept the new annotation. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. The Load Database process. will prevent such duplication. If you want to display the annotation in the model. 4. Setup 285 . Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. however. The Annotate Element form displays. If you toggled Display to On. Steps 1. 10. Select the Annotate Model command.

February 2003 286 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu. modify. Runtime Setup Commands 11. based on the current active one-line type. Runtime Setup Commands The Runtime Setup commands allow you to define. Runtime Commands Set Active One-Line Parameters — Displays the active one-line parameters. The Runtime Setup palette is activated by selecting Setup from the EE Raceway Command Menu Bar. and allows you to set new active parameters. Set Active One-Line Type — Displays the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new active one-line type. 287 . Display Element Information — Displays characteristics of selected elements. Set Active Levels — Displays the current active level(s) and allows you to turn Off displayed levels and to turn On new level displays. and review the active drawing parameters in your design file. Set Active System — Displays the current active system and allows you to set a new active system._ _______________ 11. Propagation Setup — Sets the active parameters for propagation in the design file.

Before Using These Commands You must have at least one system and one-line type defined in the design file in order to use these commands. Group Workflow There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group. page 253 for more information about defining systems and one-line types.February 2003 Using the Runtime Setup Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. you can use these commands throughout the design session. 288 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Operating Information See individual command descriptions for specific operating information. See Setup Commands.

Entering a space or a text value for an attribute will override that value in the reference database. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. Column value — Displays the current value for the column whose alias displays in the Column name field. For example. When you change the active one-line type or end your design session. Otherwise. a value will display in the field only if the value can be retrieved from the reference database. page 294 ). Save to Memory (M) — Temporarily saves your overrides and specification changes._ _______________ Set Active One-Line Type Parameters This command displays the active one-line parameters based on the current active one-line type you set using the Set Active One-Line Type command (see Set Active One-Line Type. Once you have deleted the override. if you defined tray as your active one-line type. then the Active TRAY Parameters form will display when you use this command. To delete an override on a reference database attribute. 289 . the field remains null. You can only review the information in this field. select the column value field and delete the blank character. select this field. Column name — Displays the aliases for those columns in the database that are associated with the specified one-line type. but empty <Return>s enter nothing into the design. the cursor will jump to the end of the blanks when the field is tagged beyond value. and key in the new value. You can review and modify the values in this field. which is based on the current active one-line type. The previous set of specifications becomes active again. If blanks exist for a field. To change the values associated with a one-line type. You can enter blank spaces into the design. you lose the overrides and specifications you saved to memory. Runtime The Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command allows you to enter values through the appropriate form.

it becomes an override key to the reference database. The lower portion of the Active [One_Line Type] Parameters form displays a specification table. To display the codelist._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and key in a new value.February 2003 List — Indicates whether or not a column value has an associated codelist. then the column value has a corresponding codelist. you can modify it. a value will automatically redisplay if it can be retrieved from the reference database. If you delete the value in this field. If the specified key does not exist in the reference database. If the linkage is not present on a connect point or one-line. You will be prompted to place displayed values when placing one-lines in the drawing. You can use relational operators when keying in your own select criteria. but cannot delete it. Otherwise. the key specified in the user element is used. Any annotation you placed in the drawing will override the reference database defaults on the form. 290 . Display On/Off — Enables or disables the design display for each column value. and corresponding database values are retrieved and displayed on the annotation form. the Default key is used. You can only review the information in this field. Select — Retrieves the row(s) from the specification table that meet the select criteria defined in the form. the Access column displays a R/W. select the field. The key field is updated. You can only review the information in this column. If an override linkage is not present on a device or a title block. If an * displays in the List column. an error message displays and the annotation form returns to the previous values. Once you place an override key on an element. If no key exists in the user element. then it will display an R. To change the displayed value. Where the toggle is On. The EE spec key field on the upper portion of the form is used as the key for the Column name values on the lower portion of the form. The select criteria are those values that display in the Column value column on the lower portion of the annotation form. select the *. the field remains null. Access — Indicates whether or not you can manipulate a particular column value. the value will display in the design where you place it. If you can view and modify (read and write) the column value. then the cell name or the Default key will be used to locate default data. EE Reference Database Key — This field allows you to insert an override key in the reference database. When you enter a new value in the EE Reference Database Key field. If you can only view (read) the column value. Key Description — This field displays the description from the reference database of the current EE Reference Database Key.

select the row you want. You can activate the Override button by selecting it directly or by selecting the Clear button. and then select Confirm (√). then a second form containing all matching rows displays. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. the system cancels the form and retrieves the values from the EE spec key field on the original form. then the Column values fill in with the matching row’s values. Runtime From this form you will select the row(s) containing the desired values. Override button — This button allows you to override those columns whose access is Read Only (R)._ _______________ If only one row matches the select criteria you provide. If you select Cancel (X). 291 . Clear button — This button clears the Column values from the lower portion of the form. and then automatically depresses the Override button to select a different row(s) from the specification table. If more than one row matches the criteria. which automatically activates it. To add values from the displayed specification table rows.

You should be familiar with the following operators: Symbol Name Data Type numeric Description = equal to This is the default operator. This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than or equal to the given value. Select the Set Active One-Line Type Parameters command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This operator indicates that the queried values should be greater than the given value. This operator indicates that the queried values should NOT be equal to the given value. > greater than numeric < less than numeric >= greater than or equal to less than or equal to not equal to numeric <= numeric != numeric % wild card CHAR _ underline CHAR Steps 1. 2. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than the given value. The queried values must have every character aside from the % in common with the given value. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. If you do not enter another operator. 3. the system assumes =. This operator indicates that the queried values should be less than or equal to the given value. This operator is a wild card. This operator is a wild card. The queried values must have every character aside from the underline in common with the given value. An Active One-Line Type Parameters form displays.February 2003 This command accepts certain relational operators as search criteria. representing a single character. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. 292 . representing zero or more characters.

these values are loaded into the project database. displayed. When you load the project database. Set Active One-Line Type Parameters 11. optionally._ _______________ Any value you place with the Set Active One-line Parameters command will be entered into the drawing and. Runtime 293 .

February 2003 Set Active One-Line Type This command displays all one-line types available in the design file. From the list._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . based on your selections from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command (see Define One-Line Type. Steps 1. select the one-line type you want to make active. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command. The one-line type you selected highlights. 294 . 2. The command also highlights the current active one-line type and allows you to select a new one from the set of those available. Select the Set Active One-Line Type command. You must set an active one-line type in order to use the Place One-Line Type command. The Active One Line Type form displays. page 260 ). — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. 3.

you can select a new active system from the set of those available. 295 . This is done by specifying a system and one or more subsystems. Systems Column — Displays all the available systems. Subsystem — Selects the subsystems. Active System — Displays the active system which determines the symbology of the raceway. Set Active System 11. Runtime Field Descriptions Systems — Selects the active system. based on those you selected from the reference database using the Define System command (see Define System. You can have no more than six systems active for each one-line type. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Project Rule Set — Displays the Project Electrical Code from the your project schema’s project table. page 258 ). If the Project Rule Set is not defined. whereas subsystems do not. The active system is automatically included as a subsystem. Selecting a row in this field defines the Active System or Subsystems. This is defined in EEmgr with the EE CMS Project Definition process. the subsystems are all unselected. The active system determines the symbology of the raceway._ _______________ Set Active System This command displays the current active system and all available systems. You can have multiple systems defined for a single one-line type as a way of defining split trays or elements. When a new active system is selected. The active system determines the symbology of the one-line type. Using the Set Active System form. The Project Rule Set determines which rules can be assigned to the active systems. the Percent and Project Rule can be defined for each subsystem. Project Rules cannot be assigned. While this button is depressed.

Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and exit the command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This Percent is used when calculating the cable fill of the raceway section in the EECMS product.February 2003 Percent — Displays the current percent space allocation assigned to each of the selected systems. Define the percentages and the project rules you want to use. Project Rule — Displays the Project Rule assigned to each of the selected systems for calculating raceway fill. The total space allocation cannot exceed 100 percent. To access the list of subsystems. select the *. press the Subsystem button. When a row is selected. List — Indicates whether or not a Project Rule can be assigned. then a Project Rule can be assigned. All the selected systems percentages are summed to calculate the total percentage. select the row and select the Cancel (X) on the list of Rules. Select the system and subsystem(s) you want to make active. To display a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process. Select the Set Active System command. The Active System form displays. 3. To clear the Project Rule. The Percent represents the portion of the raceway’s width assigned to that system. Steps 1. 2. 296 . 4. If an * displays. The total of the system percents is displayed in the field at the bottom of the Percent column. a list of available rules for the Project Rule Set defined with the EE CMS Project Definition process is displayed for review and selection. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes.

Propagation Mode — Defines the active propagation mode. page 108 . but lacks the detail that Eden propagation provides. Runtime Field Descriptions Propagation Style — Defines the active style of propagation. using the dimensions of the cross sections and the transition._ _______________ Propagation Setup This command sets the active parameters for propagating one-line elements in the design file. For additional information about propagation. Rough .Retrieves one-line type and RCP dimensions from specifications in the database and from overrides. Smooth . and extension on the one-lines and RCPs. radius. All fittings you place manually are propagated with Eden. Cutback .Sketches standard straights and fittings. Part Verification — Enables or disables part verification.Propagates straight sections.Propagates straight sections and fittings. Eden . Propagation sends these dimensions to the Eden symbol.Propagates straight sections only. regardless of the settings on this form. cutting them back to leave room for fittings. 297 . Set the toggle to Off to skip part verification before propagation. Propagation Setup 11. see The Drawing Process. Sketch propagation is considerably faster than Eden propagation. Sketch . Set the toggle to On to verify that an element exists in the database before you propagate it.

Select the Propagation Setup command. automatic propagation is disabled._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Automatic Propagation — Enables or disables the automatic propagation of elements. like editing the size. 298 . 2. Steps 1. will cause the propagation to be deleted and redrawn to reflect the change.February 2003 If Eden is the active propagation mode. regardless of the status of this toggle. that affect the graphical display of the propagation. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. elements are automatically propagated when placed. part verification will be performed. Define the form parameters to meet your specifications. When the toggle is set to Off. Also. If you set the toggle to On. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving any changes to the form. The Propagation Setup form displays. any changes you make to an element. 3.

To turn on or off the display of a particular level. 299 ._ _______________ Set Active Levels This command displays the current active level(s) and allows you both to turn off any active levels and to activate new levels. All On — Turns on the display of all levels in the design. select the appropriate level number. To turn on or off the display of a particular level. You can only review the system and oneline information in these fields. select the Turn Levels On/Off toggle. and key in a new value. Levels — Indicate what levels display in the design. They also allow you to turn off or on the display of some or all available levels. Runtime View — Displays the active view. their corresponding one-line types. Systems/One Line — Displays the available systems. the button appears to be depressed. To change the active view. All level display settings on the form are valid for whatever view is active. or select the field. and then select the desired level number displayed in the Systems/One Line list. 1 .63 indicate whether or not each available level displays in the design. select a value from the list. but can select the level numbers (in combination with the Turn Levels On/Off toggle). Restore — Returns the display of levels in the selected view to its state prior to entering the Set Active Levels command. All Off — Turns off the display of all levels in the design. Turn Levels On/Off — This toggle enables or disables the display for the levels associated with the one-line types in your design file. Set Active Levels 11. and the levels on which they display. When a level has its display turned on.

February 2003 Graphics — Displays the level display for title block annotation in the design file. Select Confirm (√) to save your changes and to exit the command. 300 . Set up the form parameters to meet your requirements. 3. Select the Set Active Levels command. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The Levels form displays. Steps 1. 2.

location and radius of each bend in the run. a straight section. Display Element Information 11. Select the Display Element Information command. If either a one-line. then the four key attributes associated with the fitting are displayed. — OR — Press <R> to reject the highlighted element and select another element. Accept/reject Press <D> to accept the element and display that element’s information. then run information is displayed. Runtime If a fitting or an RCP that is at the termination of a run is selected. 2. and coordinate location of ends and bends._ _______________ Display Element Information This command displays raceway element characteristics. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. Return to step 2. Identify Raceway element Select the element you want to review. Return to step 2. a fitting within a run. This information includes: segment lengths. 3. 301 . or an RCP within a run is selected. Steps 1.

February 2003 302 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Highlight Element by Link — Highlights an element with given entity and mslink values._ _______________ 12. Utilities Commands Toggle Construction Display On/Off — Turns the display of construction class elements on or off. You can also use the commands to display the identification criteria of specified elements and the system and one-line type of an identified element. you can highlight propagation errors in the design file. 303 . Display System and One-Line Type — Displays the associated system and one-line type of an identified element. Highlight Propagation Errors — Identifies existing propagation errors in a design file. In addition. Highlight Element by Sector/Word — Highlights elements with a given sector/word position. Highlight Element by ASID ID — Highlights an element with a given ASID ID. Display Link — Displays the entity and mslink values of an identified element. Display Element Type and ASID ID — Displays the element type and ASID ID of an identified element. Utilities Commands 12. Utilities Commands The Utilities commands highlight elements within your design file based on the identification criteria (ASID ID. sector/word position) you provide. Display Sector/Word Value — Displays the sector/word position of an identified element.

304 .February 2003 Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System or Plant Coordinate System associated with the design file. or shows the coordinate system currently active._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

because it is through the Precision Input form that you will enter values for the placement of points and for the location of raceway elements. you can use these commands throughout the design session. you will use those commands that display the attribute information of an element (Display ASID ID. you can exit the command session by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Pressing <R> or selecting Reject on the precision input form will either reset the active command by one step or reject a highlighted element in the design file._ _______________ Using the Utilities Commands When to Use These Commands Once you have performed the necessary setups. Using the Utilities Commands Before Using These Commands 12. 305 . see Precision Input Form. Operating Information During the operating sequence for any of these commands. Group Workflow In general. for example). For detailed information about precision input. Utilities You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using any of the Modify commands. for example) before the commands that highlight elements based on the attribute information you specify (Highlight Element by ASID ID. page 119 .

select the Update View command to see the results of the display toggle. The top of the prompt area displays all views in which the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command is toggled to On. All non-displayed EE text elements are automatically placed in construction class. this command allows you to view all the non-displayed EE elements as well as any other construction class elements. 3._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . When construction display is On.February 2003 Toggle Construction Display On/Off This command turns On and Off the display for construction elements within each individual view in the design file. the view number displays in a prompt. Once you have exited the command. Steps 1. Select the Toggle Construction Display On/Off command from the menu. 2. 306 . Therefore. Select view Place a data point in the view in which you want the annotation display toggled On or Off. Press <R> to exit the command.

If you do not specify a pathname for the file. allowing you to select the sector/word value from the displayed file. Go to Step 4. The file will display in a form on the screen. 7 (text node). 4 (line string). 4. Key in another sector/word combination to continue highlighting elements by sector and word. and both are relative to 1. 307 . The sector/word position must be the location of an element type 2 (cell). but is not added to a working set. 3. Element highlighted The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. The position of the sector and word are compatible with EDG. the entire complex element highlights._ _______________ Highlight Element by Sector/Word This command highlights elements by a sector/word position that you specify. If the position is valid. Highlight Element by Sector/Word Highlight Sector/Word With Filename 12. Key in sector and word value or file name Key in the sector and word value separated by a space. If the element is part of a complex element. 2. the element highlights. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. Steps 1. 3 (line). Press <Esc> to exit. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. Utilities You can specify a filename instead of the sector/word position to highlight an element. or 17 (text). 6 (shape). — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the sector and word values. The file must contain the sector/word position of the element(s) you want to highlight. Select the Highlight Element By Sector/Word command.

7. Go to Step 6. 308 . (When you press <D> the form redisplays. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. Return to Step 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Return to Step 1. Point to view for window Identify the view where you want the element highlighted.February 2003 5. Press <D> to select another sector/word value from the File Display form. select Confirm (√) to accept the sector and word value in the line. Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified sector and word highlights in the view you identified. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command.) Go to Step 4. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the file display form. 6. Select sector and word value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. After you select a line. Identify a line that contains a sector and word value.

The Select hilite asid mode form displays. Select the appropriate Highlight by ASID ID button. The All Elements button highlights all raceway elements associated with the element having the given ASID ID: the element itself and all of its children. Utilities Steps 1. 309 . For example. Highlight ASID ID With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the ASID ID to highlight an element. the raceway element highlights. you can specify the file pro. The file will display in a form on the screen. but is not added to the working set. The file must contain the ASID ID of the element(s) you want to highlight. The Parent of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the parents of the element having the given ASID ID. to see where propagation errors exist in your design file._ _______________ Highlight Element by ASID ID Highlight Element by ASID ID This command highlights elements by an ASID identification (ID) that you specify. The Children of Elements button highlights the raceway elements that are the children of the element having the given ASID ID. the command searches for it in the <current_project>/rway/tmp directory. allowing you to select the ASID ID from the displayed file. The Only the Element button highlights only the raceway element having the given ASID ID. 12.err. Select the Highlight Element By Asid Id command. — OR — Select Cancel to exit the command. 2. If the ASID ID you specify is valid. If you do not specify a pathname for a file.

Key in another ASID ID to continue highlighting raceway elements. 6.February 2003 3. — OR — Key-in the filename of a file containing the ASID IDs. Continue highlighting the elements according to the specified Highlight by ASID ID mode. — OR — Press <Esc> to exit. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. a file display form displays._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — OR — Press <Esc> to exit the command. 310 . 4. — OR — Press <R> to select a different Highlight by ASID ID mode. Element highlighted The raceway element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the elements highlighted. Return to step 2. Key in asid id or file name Key in the ASID ID. Select asid id from form After you enter the filename. Return to step 1. Return to step 2. Go to step 6. 5.

Return to step 1. 12. Highlight Element by ASID ID After you select a line. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to modify the highlight by asid mode. 311 . Go to step 8. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element(s) highlighted. — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in step 3. Utilities 8. Press <D> to select another ASID ID from the file display form. 9.) Go to step 5. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. select Confirm (√) to accept the ASID ID in the line. (When you press <D> the form redisplays. Return to step 2._ _______________ Select a line that contains an ASID ID. 7. Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element(s) associated with the specified ASID ID highlight in the view you identified. Return to step 3.

2. Point to view for window Identify the view in which you want the element to highlight. the entire complex element highlights. Go to Step 4. 4. If you do not specify a pathname for the file. The file will display in a form on the screen. the command searches for it in the <current project>/rway/tmp directory. 3. 312 . allowing you to select the mslink from the displayed file.February 2003 Highlight Element by Link This command highlights elements by given entity (table) and mslink values that you specify. Key in entity and mslink (###:###) or filename Key in the entity and mslink values separated by a :. the element highlights. Press <Esc> or <R> to exit. Steps 1. If the entity and mslink are valid. The file must contain the entity and mslink of the element(s) you want to highlight. Select entity/mslink value from form A File Display form displays after you enter the filename. — OR — Key in the name of a file containing the entity and mslink values. Select the Highlight Element By Link command. 5. Key in another entity/mslink combination to continue highlighting elements by mslink. Identify a line that contains the entity and mslink values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 7 (text node). The entity and mslink values must correspond with an element type 2 (cell). 4 (line string). but is not added to a working set. Element highlighted The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Highlight Link With Filename You can specify a filename instead of the entity and mslink combination to highlight an element. 6 (shape). 3 (line). or 17 (text). If the element is part of a complex element.

Element highlighted Point to continue/Reset to exit the file The element with the specified entity and mslink values highlights in the view you identified. Go to Step 6._ _______________ After you select a line. Press <D> to select more entity and mslink values from the file display form. Utilities Point to the view where you want the element highlighted. 7. 313 . — OR — Press <R> to exit the file you identified in Step 1. (When you press <D> the form redisplays.) Go to Step 4. Point to view for window Highlight Element by Link 12. Return to Step 1. select Confirm (√) to accept the entity and mslink values in the line. — OR — Select the Return button to cancel the File Display form. — OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command. 6. Return to Step 1.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Review the errors listed on the form. — OR — Exit the form without highlighting any propagation errors. The pro. Steps 1. To highlight a particular error(s) in the design file. The propagation error(s) highlights in the design file. Select the Highlight Propagation Errors command. 314 .err form redisplays. Continue highlighting propagation errors.February 2003 Highlight Propagation Errors This command highlights propagation errors in the design file. 2. select the error(s) from the list. 3. and select Confirm (√). — OR — Select Reset or Cancel (X) to exit the command. Go to step 2. and the pro.err file displays.

Identify element Select the element to display the sector/word for. and accept it with a <D>. 2. Display Sector/Word Value Steps 1. Utilities 315 . in the MicroStation command window. The sector and word for the selected element displays in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> to exit the command. 12. Select the Display Sector/Word command._ _______________ Display Sector/Word Value This command displays the sector and word position. of an identified element.

of an identified element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Display Element Type and ASID ID This command displays the element type and the ASID identification (ID). 2. in the MicroStation command window. Select the Display Element Type and ASID ID command. Steps 1. Identify element Select the element for which to display the ASID ID and accept it with <D>. The element type and ASID ID display in the MicroStation command window. — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. 316 .

_ _______________ Display Link This command displays the entity (table) and mslink. Display Link Steps 1. mslink = <value> — OR — Press <R> or <Esc> to exit the command. The entity and mslink values display in the MicroStation command window in the following format: Entity (table number) = <value>. 12. Identify element Select the element you want to display the link for and accept it with <D>. Utilities 317 . Select the Display Link command. of an identified element. 2. in the MicroStation command window.

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. reject input. reset a command action._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . page 119.February 2003 Display System and One-Line Type This command displays the system and one-line type associated with an element you identify. route one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. accept input. — OR — Exit the command. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. see Precision Input Form. Identify Raceway element Identify an element in the design file. 2. Using the form. The precision input form displays. and exit a command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. Select the Display System and One-Line Type command from the menu. 318 . along with the Print System and One-Line Type form. The identified element highlights. Steps 1. you can locate elements.

Raceway [element] Accept/reject Accept the highlighted element. The system prompts you to identify another element. system. Go to step 2. Continue identifying elements in the design file. Utilities — OR — Reject the highlighted element. — OR — Exit the command. Display System and One-Line Type 12. The system prompts you to identify another element. 319 . 4. The fields on the form fill with information about the element’s one-line type. Go to step 2. and subsystems (if applicable)._ _______________ 3.

Activate Design Volume Coordinate System The Activate Design Volume Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Design Volume Coordinate System. Activate Plant Coordinate System The Activate Plant Coordinate System command allows you to work in the Plant Coordinate System. and Show Active Coordinate System commands. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. Activate Plant Coordinate System — Activates the Plant Coordinate System (PCS). Show Active Coordinate System The Show Active Coordinate System command displays the active coordinate system in the status field. The Plant Coordinate System is common to all models and drawings in a project. you can select either the Activate Design Volume Coordinate System or Activate Plant Coordinate System commands. 320 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Show Active Coordinate System — Displays the active coordinate system in the status field. Commands Activate Design Volume Coordinate System — Activates the Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) allowing you to define a local coordinate system for a particular model. If you desire to change the coordinate system. Activate Plant Coordinate System. When the coordinate system is switched between the PCS and DVCS. Instead. model graphics do not rotate to reflect the active coordinate system.February 2003 Active Coordinate System This palette provides the Active Design Volume Coordinate System. The Plant Coordinate System uses this global coordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models. the coordinate system rotates when the active coordinate system is changed. This becomes important when attaching reference models to the active model.

Reports — Displays the information in an EE Raceway database. Database Rulecheck — Displays the design rule errors occurring in the design process. 321 . then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu._ _______________ 13. Database Commands Topics Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. 13. The Database palette is activated by selecting Database from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. Database Commands The Database commands are used to load and run reports from the database.

Before Using These Commands Refer to the individual command descriptions for any requirements which may be necessary before using each command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and screen prompts vary for each command. 322 . instructions for using these commands are described in each individual command section.February 2003 Using the Database Commands When to Use These Commands Use these command to run limited database commands while still in the graphic design session. command key-ins. Operating Information Because the operating sequence. Group Workflow You must load the database before you can run a report or rulecheck.

_ _______________ Load Database This command loads a relational database with information generated by the EE Raceway design file. the command removes the occurrences of the previous load and completely reloads the design file. Load Database When you run the Load Database command on a design file that has been loaded previously into the database. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. All RCP’s and segments must have a tag number before using this command. 13. This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw Column Name pds_east* Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Database rcp_to_drw pds_north* rcp_to_drw pds_elev* rcp_to_sys ee_percent*** drop_point ee_dist_down_ol** drop_point ee_dist_to_rcp** one_line ee_ol_length** ol_to_sys ee_percent*** 323 . Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin.

The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. 324 . The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. straight pds_north* straight pds_elev* str_to_sys ee_percent*** fitting pds_east* fitting pds_north* fitting pds_elev* fit_to_sys ee_percent*** * The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system.February 2003 straight straight ee_tl_length pds_east* The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The columns are optional for Load Database. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range.

_ _______________ Steps 1. and is displayed automatically to the screen. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen. the message above displays. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen. The message file is created on every run of the process. The Load database screen displays. Select Load database command. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. and the process begins. 13. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. 325 . The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields. Database 3. select Confirm (√). When you are finished completing the input information. or accept the displayed defaults. Accept will load database. Enter error and output filenames. Steps 2. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. where you may review the errors. the message above displays. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. When complete.

See Reports. select the output file box and key in a new name. These reports report on the project and reference databases. When you process a report. Key in any information that is not supplied by default. an input screen displays.dat file (win32app\eerway\data). All reports are kept in the /reports directory. page 545 for more detailed information about individual reports. see Create Project for the directory structure. You must load the project database before running any reports. (No file extension is automatically appended to the name you key in. allowing you to enter all input necessary to run the report.) 326 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can change the name of the output file or error file. The system manager can change the names of the reports that display in the listing area and can add additional reports by editing the report. Overview This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway reports. To change the output filename.February 2003 Report This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports.

you should name the output files yourself. Select the report you want to run from the list. Database You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. Define the report input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the report. 2. If a new output file has the same name as an existing file. Select the Report command. 13. the new file will overwrite that file. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. You should give each report you want to save a unique name. 3. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. 234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate._ _______________ If you want to save reports throughout a project. 4. For instance. Report Steps 1. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting 327 .

February 2003 direction. 328 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction.

_ _______________
Rule Checks

Rule Checks

This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. You must load the project database before running any rule checks.

Overview
13. Database
This section contains general information about running all EE Raceway rule checks. For more detailed information about each rule check, see Reports, page 545 . The system manager can change the names of the reports or add new reports to the listing area by editing the rule_chk.dat file in win32app\eerway\data. When you process a rule check, an input screen displays.

The name of the rule check report displays at the top. Accept the default information that displays in the input fields, or change that information according to your specifications.

329

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 If you want to save reports throughout a project, you should name the output files yourself. If a new output file has the same name as another file created previously, the new file will destroy the previously created file. You should give each report that you want to save a unique name.

Steps
1. 2. 3. 4. Select the Rule command. Select the rule check report you want to run from the listing area. Select Confirm (√) to invoke the input form for the specified process. Define the input form as needed and select Confirm (√) to process the rule check report.

330

_ _______________
14. Raceway Processes
This chapter provides detailed descriptions of EE Raceway processes. You will run all EE Raceway processes from the Process menu found on the EE Raceway Drawing menu. (See Process in the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about running all processes.) The individual EE Raceway processes are described in the following sections:

Raceway Processes

Load Database — Loads the project database with information generated from the EE Raceway drawing. Unload Design — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the design filename you specify. Unload Sheet — Removes all the information associated with a particular drawing from the project database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. Cleanup Database — Removes any data from a project database that is not currently associated with a design in the project’s ../rway/dgn directory. Create Interference Envelope (default name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks. Create Interference Envelope (given name) — Reads the design file and creates a data file, with the name you specify, that contains envelopes for input to Plant Design interference detection tasks.

14. EERWAY Processes

331

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Load Database
This process loads a relational database with information generated by an EERWAY design file. Information in the design file is merged with information from the reference schema and loaded into the project schema. 1. You must create a RIS schema on an existing relational database before loading, using the Database Utilities option from the EE Project Menu. Both a project and a reference schema must exist before running the Load Database process. Load database tracks drawing information based on the "Drawing" table of the project database. Thus, you must annotate the drawing or model and enter the unique "SHEET" information, using the Lock Model and the Annotate Model commands respectively.

2.

This process calculates the following values: Table Name rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_drw rcp_to_sys drop_point drop_point Column Name pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent*** ee_dist_down_ol** ee_dist_to_rcp** Comments The PDS east coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS north coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. The PDS elevation coordinate of the corresponding RCP’s origin. Indicates what portion of the corresponding RCP is set aside for the corresponding system. The distance down the one-line to the point on the one-line closest to the drop point origin. The orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the RCP’s origin, and the orthogonal distance from the drop point origin to the closest point on the oneline. The total graphical length of the one-line in master units. Indicates what portion of the corresponding one-line is set aside for the corresponding system. The graphical length of the straight in master units. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the straight’s range.

one_line ol_to_sys straight straight straight straight

ee_ol_length** ee_percent*** ee_tl_length pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev*

332

_ _______________
str_to_sys fitting fitting fitting fit_to_sys ee_percent*** pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* ee_percent***

Load Database

Indicates what portion of the corresponding straight is set aside for the corresponding system. The PDS east coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS north coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. The PDS elevation coordinate of the center point of the fitting’s range. Indicates what portion of the corresponding fitting is set aside for the corresponding system.

* The Raceway bill of material by volume report relies on these columns to be in the fitting and straight tables. The columns are optional for Load Database. ** You can override the value for these columns by annotating the appropriate elements in the design file. *** These values indicate the portion of a split raceway dedicated to each system within the split raceway.

Steps
1. Select Load database from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Load database screen displays.

14. EERWAY Processes

2.

Enter drawing name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

333

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 3. Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between Foreground, Background, and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections. When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The error file lists all the errors that occurred during processing. This file will be displayed automatically to the screen, where you may review the errors. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The message file is created on every run of the process, and is displayed automatically to the screen. It lists everything that was loaded into the database. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

334

_ _______________
Batch File Option
The load database process can be executed from a batch file. Setup an rway.bat file to export the necessary Microstation and EERWAY environment variables to execute the load database process. Include the following EERWAY environment variables: EES_REFDB — RIS Schema name for reference database EE_SCHEMA — RIS Schema name for project database EERD_MSGS — Directory path for EERWAY message files EERD_TBLS — Directory path for EERWAY database table files Example of rway.bat:

Batch File Option

SET SET SET SET SET SET

MS=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION MS_EXE=D:\WIN32APP\USTATION EES_REFDB=CERT60_REF EE_SCHEMA=CERT60_PRJ EERD_MSGS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\ EERD_TBLS=D:\WIN32APP\INGR\EERWAY\MSG\

14. EERWAY Processes

335

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Design
This process unloads a design from a relational database, based on the design filename you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Design process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database, nor will it delete information from user-defined tables.

Steps
1. Select Unload from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Design database screen displays.

2.

Enter design name. Select a design file from the Drawing List or key in a design filename (you may specify multiple design files).

3.

Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names. The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields.

336

_ _______________
4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Design

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

14. EERWAY Processes

337

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Unload Sheet
This process unloads an EE Raceway drawing from a relational database, based on the internal sheet name you specify. You must have loaded the database using the Load Database process before unloading. The Unload Sheet process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), one-lines, and three-lines that are part of the specified drawing. The process will not modify anything in the reference database. The drawing you are unloading must have a title block, and the sheet name in the title block must match the database entry for that drawing, since the process keys off the sheet name in the title block. If the sheet name contains blanks, it must be specified in single quotes.

Steps
1. Select Unload Sheet from the Process menu, and select Confirm (√). The Unload Sheet database screen displays.

2. 3.

Key in a sheet name. Key in unique filenames for the error and message files (or accept the default filenames). The default error and message filenames are displayed in appropriate fields. You may change the defaults by selecting the fields and keying in new names.

338

_ _______________
The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process is run, unless you specify unique filenames in these fields. 4. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. You may choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes for most processes (see Process, page 64 ). 5. Confirm your selections.

Unload Sheet

When you are finished completing the input information, select Confirm (√), and the process begins. When complete, the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the message above displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, is created on every run of the process, and lists everything that was loaded into the database. The file is automatically displayed to the screen for your review.

14. EERWAY Processes

You can view both files using the Output option on the Utilities page.

339

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Cleanup Database
This process removes information from the database that is not in any drawing currently loaded in the database. For example, information may have been added through the Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to test for a special case or to create customized tables. This process also removes information on any EE Raceway drawing which has been deleted, but for some reason was not removed from the database. The Cleanup Database process deletes all records of raceway connect points (RCP), onelines, and three-lines that are part of the project database but which are not part of any raceway design file. This process will not unload records of customized tables in the database. The process uses the filenames in the drawing table of all current drawings. It then makes a list of all valid drawings, and deletes anything from the database which is not connected to one of these drawings. This process will not delete drawings. It will delete from the database only that information which is not in any current drawing.

Steps
1. Select Cleanup Database from the Process Menu, and select Confirm (√). The Cleanup Database screen displays.

2.

Enter error and output filenames. Key in unique filenames in the Error file and Output file fields, or accept the displayed defaults.

340

The . select Confirm (√). 4. and it includes a log of what was unloaded during processing.err file. The process begins. is created. Confirm your selections. It will display mostly zeroes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and Batch operating modes for most processes (see Process. 14. page 64 ). 3. the process will return one of two messages (described below) to the screen.msg file. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur._ _______________ The default error and message files will be overwritten every time the process runs. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. You must specify unique filenames to save the default files. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. When complete. The . the message above displays. The current operating mode is displayed in a box at the lower right of the screen. EERWAY Processes You can view either file using the Output option on the Utilities screen. Select the desired operating mode. You may choose between Foreground. Background. 341 . the message above displays. Cleanup Database When you are finished completing the input information.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .prj/rway/dgn/<filename. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). 342 . The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. 2.env>. Upon completion. The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays. Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway. 3. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (default name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). the process writes the file to <current_project>. Enter design name. Steps 1. you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection.

Otherwise. 14. Confirm your selections. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. EERWAY Processes 343 . You may choose between foreground. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. The process begins. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. select the Confirm button (√). When complete. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. the above message displays. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. The . This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. The . lists all errors that occurred during the process. background.prj/rway/tmp directory. 5. and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes).err file. the above message displays. Create Interference Envelope (default name) When you finish completing the input information. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen._ _______________ 4. Select the desired operating mode. Otherwise.prj/rway/tmp directory. displays all processing information.msg file.

Enter design name. 344 . 3. The purpose of the entire process is to ensure that each raceway does not occupy the same space as other raceways. Upon completion. The Create Interference Detection Envelope form displays: 2.prj/rway/dgn/<filename. the process writes the file to <current_project>. — OR — Select a design file from the Drawing List (use the Select All button to select all files from the list) or key in a design filename. After running the Interference Detection process in EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . you may send the file to Plant Design software and run it against PDS interference detection. Key in unique filenames for the error and output files (or accept the displayed default filenames). Select Interference Detection from the Process menu and select the Confirm button (√). The default error and output files will be overwritten every time you run the process unless you specify unique filenames in the fields.env>.February 2003 Create Interference Envelope (given name) This process reads a design file and creates from that design a data file containing envelopes (spaces in which valid raceway shapes reside). Steps 1. Key in a name for the envelope file. 4.

and batch operating modes (see the section entitled EE Raceway Environment for information about operating modes). 6. 14.prj/rway/tmp directory. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ 5. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Create Interference Envelope (given name) When you finish completing the input information. select the Confirm button (√). the above message displays. the process returns one of the two messages (described below) to the screen. an ASCII file located in the <current_project>. lists all errors that occurred during the process. the above message displays.err file. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. This file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The . Otherwise.msg file. you can view the file through the Output option on the Utilities screen. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You may choose between foreground. When complete. The . an ASCII file located in the <current_project>.prj/rway/tmp directory. EERWAY Processes 345 . background. displays all processing information. The process begins. Otherwise. Select the desired operating mode. Confirm your selections.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 346 .

and gives you the option of placing the symbol in an Eden symbol library. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library — Extracts a specified symbol from an Eden symbol library. Extract EDEN User Function From Library — Extracts a specified user function from an Eden symbol library. Eden Processes For a general description of Eden symbol generation. For information about accessing the processes. exporting RWAY_EDEN_LIB to specify the appropriate directory. Each Eden process is described in a separate section. The path to the extracted symbol source file called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. Compress EDEN Symbol Library — Compresses an Eden symbol library to remove unused space left by deleted symbols.EErc file in your home directory. Delete EDEN Symbol — Deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. You will use these processes to compile Eden symbols. and edit the Eden symbol file. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries — Merges the contents of two Eden symbol libraries into one library. List EDEN User Functions — Lists Eden user functions in a selected Eden symbol library. page 59 . see Electrical Engineer (EE) Raceway Environment. The delivered default symbol source file path is <current_project>/rway/tmp. You will access the Eden processes from the EDEN option found on the EE Raceway Drawing Menu. then edit the . If you want to place your Eden library in a different directory. The delivered default symbol library path is win32app\eerway\eden. manipulate the Eden symbol library. Eden Processes This chapter provides detailed descriptions of available Eden processes. Eden Processes 347 . see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. 15. If you want to place your source symbol files in a different directory. You should also consult the appendix in this guide entitled Eden Symbol Generation ._ _______________ 15. List EDEN Symbol Library — Lists Eden symbols in a selected Eden symbol library. The path to the symbol library called in many of the Eden processes is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_LIB. as follows: Compile EDEN Symbol — Compiles an Eden symbol file. then edit the to specify the appropriate directory.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Edit EDEN Symbol File — Uses a standard ASCII editor to edit a specified symbol source file. 348 .

and key in a new filename. and key in a new option._ _______________ Compile EDEN Symbol This process compiles an Eden symbol file. and key in a filename. The -l option simply lists the compiled Eden symbol file. To change the displayed error filename. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. Eden Processes Before Using This Command You must create an Eden symbol file. and gives you the option of placing the compiled symbol in an Eden symbol library. select the field. select the field. For information about the path to the symbol source file. To enter the symbol source file. The -o option lists the compiled Eden symbol file. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. Enter option — Displays the default compile option (-o). To change the displayed option. page 513 for information about symbol file creation. and then adds the symbol to the specified library. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. and key in a new filename. select the field. Compile EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. See Eden Symbol Generation. To change the displayed default library name. Enter symbol source file — Displays the name of the symbol source file to compile. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new library name. select the field. 349 . 15. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent.

see Output. the message above displays. page 89. The . For information about operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Select Compile EDEN Symbol from the list. and select Confirm (√). You can choose between foreground. see EDEN. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. the above message displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. background.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. 2.February 2003 Steps 1. select Confirm (√). The . 3. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. The Compile EDEN Symbol form displays. When you have completed the input information. You can view either file on the screen. 350 . 4. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and batch operating modes. and the Eden process begins. Confirm your selections. Select the desired operating mode._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file. page 67 .msg file. contains any output from the process. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen.

Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. For information about the path to the symbol source file. To change the displayed library name. Delete EDEN Symbol Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in the name. Eden Processes 351 . and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. select the field._ _______________ Delete EDEN Symbol This process deletes an Eden symbol from the Eden symbol library. select the field. and key in a new filename. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to delete from the library. To enter the symbol name. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. select the field. To change the displayed error filename. 15. select the field. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed output filename. For information about the path to the symbol library.

msg file. The . the message above displays.err file. page 89. and batch operating modes. page 67 . Select the desired operating mode. see Output. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. contains any output from the process. You can view either file on the screen. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . For information about operating modes. When you have completed the input information.February 2003 Steps 1. 3. 2. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Confirm your selections. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. and select Confirm (√). Select Delete EDEN Symbol from the list. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and the Eden process begins. select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the above message displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The Delete EDEN Symbol form displays. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground. background. see EDEN. 352 . 4.

Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. List EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. For information about the path to the symbol library. To change the displayed library name._ _______________ List EDEN Symbol Library This process lists the Eden symbols in the selected Eden library. To change the displayed output filename. select the field. select the field. 15. and key in a new filename. Eden Processes 353 . and key in a new library name. select the field. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed error filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

page 89. The .err file. 354 . and batch operating modes. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. see Output. select Confirm (√). contains any output from the process. Confirm your selections. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.msg file. The . For information about operating modes. background. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 2. see EDEN. the message above displays. The . You can choose between foreground. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. 3. the above message displays. Select the desired operating mode. The List EDEN Symbol Library form displays. 4. page 67 . Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications.February 2003 Steps 1._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. and the Eden process begins. and select Confirm (√). You can view either file on the screen. When you have completed the input information. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred.

For information about the path to the symbol library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new filename. List EDEN User Functions Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. The List EDEN User Functions form displays. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. To change the displayed error filename. Steps 1. and key in a new library name._ _______________ List EDEN User Functions This process lists the Eden user functions in the selected Eden library. You can choose between foreground. 15. 355 . To change the displayed library name. see EDEN. 2. 3. select the field. For information about operating modes. select the field. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. page 67 . and batch operating modes. Select List EDEN Symbol Library from the list. Eden Processes Select the desired operating mode. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet you specifications. and key in a new filename. and select Confirm (√). background.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can view either file on the screen. select Confirm (√). The . and the list will display.February 2003 4. contains any output from the process. see Output.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections.msg file. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The . an ASCII file located in the current working directory. 356 . the message above displays.err file. The . page 89. the above message displays. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. When you have completed the input information. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.

see the description at the beginning of this chapter. select the field. 15. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new filename. and key in a name. 2. Merge from library name — Displays the name of the symbol library whose contents you will merge with first library. and key in a new filename. For information about the path to the symbol library. The Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries form displays. select the field. To enter a library name._ _______________ Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries This process merges two Eden symbol libraries into one. For information about the path to the symbol library. Eden Processes Steps 1. 357 . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. and select Confirm (√). select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. and key in a name. To change the displayed output filename. Merge into library name — Displays the name of the symbol library into which you will merge the contents of a second library. select the field. Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To enter a library name. Select Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries from the list. To change the displayed error filename.

The . Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. see Output. You can choose between foreground. Confirm your selections. 358 . The . and batch operating modes. the message above displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and the Eden process begins. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. page 89. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. lists all the errors that occurred during processing.msg file.err file. The . Select the desired operating mode. page 67 . When you have completed the input information. see EDEN. the above message displays.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.February 2003 3. You can view either file on the screen. For information about operating modes. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. background. contains any output from the process. 4. select Confirm (√).

15. Steps 1. Select Compress EDEN Symbol Library from the list. background. Eden Processes 2. 359 . Select the desired operating mode. The Compress EDEN Symbol Library form displays. Compress EDEN Symbol Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. select the field. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. and key in a new filename. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename. You can choose between foreground. 3. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. To change the displayed library name. For information about operating modes. and key in the name of the library you intend to compress. Compressing the library removes the unused space left by deleted symbols. select the field. and select Confirm (√). The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen._ _______________ Compress EDEN Symbol Library This process compresses the selected Eden symbol library. To change the displayed error filename. select the field. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. For information about the path to the symbol library. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. page 67 . see EDEN. and batch operating modes.

the above message displays. 360 . Confirm your selections. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur.err file. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . contains any output from the process. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. and the Eden process begins. The . the message above displays. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. When you have completed the input information. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The . see Output.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review.February 2003 4. page 89. The . You can view either file on the screen. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. select Confirm (√).msg file.

The symbol is not deleted from the library when you extract it. To change the displayed error filename. Eden Processes 361 . Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. and key in a new filename. then edit the . Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the symbol you intend to extract from the library. For information about the path to the symbol library. If you want to store your source symbol files in another directory. The path to the extracted symbol source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. To change the displayed output filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. The delivered default source symbol path is win32app\eerway\eden._ _______________ Extract EDEN Symbol From Library This process extracts a symbol from the selected library. select the field.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. Extract EDEN Symbol From Library Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed library name. select the field. The extracted symbol is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. and key in a new filename. and key in a new library name. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. select the field. select the field. 15. for example). and key in the name. To enter the symbol name.

The Extract EDEN Symbol From Library form displays. When you have completed the input information. page 89. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. and batch operating modes. 2. see EDEN. The . The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Confirm your selections. background. the above message displays. Select the desired operating mode. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. contains any output from the process. 3. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. and the Eden process begins. see Output. an ASCII file located in the current working directory.err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. You can choose between foreground. 4. For information about operating modes. The . select Confirm (√).February 2003 Steps 1.msg file. The . the message above displays. and select Confirm (√).err file. Select Extract EDEN Symbol From Library from the list. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred. page 67 . lists all the errors that occurred during processing._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can view either file on the screen. 362 .

select the field. The delivered default source user function path is win32app\eerway\eden. select the field. To change the displayed library name. and key in the name. The user function is not deleted from the library when you extract it. Enter symbol name — Displays the name of the user function you intend to extract from the library. exporting RWAY_EDEN_SRC to define the appropriate directory. for example). and key in a new library name. 15. Enter library name — Displays the default Eden symbol library name. For information about the path to the symbol library. select the field. Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. and key in a new filename. see the description at the beginning of this chapter. and key in a new filename. To change the displayed output filename.EErc file in win32app\eenuc. The extracted user function is the form of an ASCII file that you can edit using a standard editor (vi or emacs. To change the displayed error filename. To enter the user function name. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent._ _______________ Extract EDEN User Function From Library Extract EDEN User Function From Library This process extracts a user function from the selected library. Eden Processes 363 . then edit the . select the field. The path to the extracted user function source file is defined by the variable RWAY_EDEN_SRC. If you want to store your source user function files in another directory.

3. 4. and select Confirm (√). and the Eden process begins. You can choose between foreground. the message above displays.February 2003 Steps 1. Confirm your selections. page 67 . The . see EDEN. Messages Error occurred during process If any errors occur. For information about operating modes. Select the desired operating mode. lists all the errors that occurred during processing. select Confirm (√)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. The Extract EDEN User Function From Library form displays. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. 2. When you have completed the input information. background. an ASCII file located in the current working directory. The .err file. Select Extract EDEN User Function From Library from the list. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. 364 . and batch operating modes.

_ _______________
Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

Extract EDEN User Function From Library

15. Eden Processes

365

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Edit EDEN Symbol File
This process allows you to edit a symbol source file using a standard ASCII editor. It is only available on a graphics terminal.

Output file — Displays the file to which process messages are sent. To change the displayed output filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Error file — Displays the file to which error messages are sent. To change the displayed error filename, select the field, and key in a new filename. Enter editor — Displays the name of the default ASCII editor (vi) that you will use to edit the Eden symbol file. To change the displayed editor, select the field, and key in a new standard ASCII editor name. Enter symbol file name — Displays the name of the symbol file you intend to edit. To enter a symbol filename, select the field, and key in a symbol file name. For information about the path to the symbol source file, see the description at the beginning of this chapter.

366

_ _______________
Steps
1. Select Edit EDEN Symbol File from the list, and select Confirm (√). The Edit EDEN Symbol File form displays: 2. 3. Set up the form parameters to meet your specifications. Select the desired operating mode. The current operating mode displays in a box at the lower right of the screen. You can choose between foreground, background, and batch operating modes. For information about operating modes, see EDEN, page 67 . 4. Confirm your selections. When you have completed the input information, select Confirm (√), and the Eden process begins.

Steps

Messages
Error occurred during process If any errors occur, the message above displays. The .err file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, lists all the errors that occurred during processing. The .err file displays immediately to the screen for your review. Process successfully completed If no errors occurred, the above message displays. The .msg file, an ASCII file located in the current working directory, contains any output from the process. The file displays immediately to the screen for your review. You can view either file on the screen, see Output, page 89.

15. Eden Processes

367

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

368

_ _______________
16. Integrated Commands
The Integrated Commands are common to EE Raceway and several other PDS modules, providing greater interoperability among the various disciplines. These commands allow you to review an element’s attributes, review the PDS clashes in a model, create a window containing a specific element, and display information about the reference models attached to the current model. The Integrated Commands are only available when running EE Raceway inside PDS, not when running standalone EE Raceway.

Integrated Commands

The Integrated Commands palette is activated by selecting Integrated Commands from the EE Raceway File Menu Bar, then selecting Palette from the resulting pull-down menu.

16. Integrated Commands

369

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

Using the Integrated Commands
When to Use These Commands
Once you have performed the necessary setups, you can use these commands throughout the design session.

Before Using These Commands
Review PDS Attributes – You must have an existing component in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Reference PDS Model – There are no prerequisite conditions for using this command. Window to Named PDS Item – You must have existing items in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. Review PDS Clash – You must first have run IFC Clash Detection, and must have an existing clash in the design area.

Group Workflow
There is no required or suggested sequence for using the commands in this group.

Operating Information
See individual command descriptions for specific operating information.

370

_ _______________
16.1 Review PDS Attributes
The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected component. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS reference file. To view pipe centerlines (to review the line segments), you need to display construction type elements. Use the MicroStation Settings > View Attributes > Turn on construction command.

Review PDS Attributes

Parameters
Attribute Name – Lists the item’s attributes. Value – Displays the item’s attribute value that is defined in the database. Close – Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.

16. Integrated Commands

371

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.2

Reference PDS Model
The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project.

Parameters
Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area which contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Attach – Attaches a reference model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.

372

_ _______________
Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command.

Reference PDS Model

16. Integrated Commands

373

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003

16.3

Window to Named PDS Item
The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute you identify. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS reference files.

Options
Active Model / Reference Files – Specifies whether to look for the item in the active model or in the attached reference files. Discipline – Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. You can select: Piping, Equipment, PE HVAC, or Raceway. Depending on which discipline you select, the item attributes you can search for changes. — Piping Attributes – Line Number Label, Line ID, Inspection Iso ID, Piping Component Number, Pipe Tag, Instrument Component Number, or Pipe Support Number — Equipment Attributes – Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle Number — PE HVAC Attributes – System ID or Item ID — Raceway Attributes – RCP Tag, One Line Tag, Drop Point Tag, or Equipment ID Item Name – Specify the attribute value to search for. Restore View of Model – Restores the view setting.

374

_ _______________
16.4 Review PDS Clash
The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves existing clashes.

Review PDS Clash

Parameters
Project Name – Displays the active project name. Design Area – Displays the active design area name. Clash Type – Displays the clash type. Date – Displays the date and time the clashes were detected. Unapprove Clash – Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved. Approve Real Clash – Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control Database. Approve False Clash – Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control Database. Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash – Specifies if you want to review approved or unapproved clashes. Clash Marker – Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker number with the left and right arrows; or, select the field and key in a marker number.

16. Integrated Commands

375

_ _______________
EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide - February 2003 Item A – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Item B – Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the model name and design area. Comments – Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select the field and type in any additional information. Highlight Clash – Highlights the clash in the selected view. Select View – Zooms in and updates the selected view. Click Select View then select the view you want to update.

376

<string> connected to invalid system! Reason: The element belongs to a system that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. The likely reason for the error and the recovery are listed with the error message wherever this is possible._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Appendix A Error Messages A: Error Messages This appendix has an alphabetical listing of error messages you may receive when you are running EE Raceway Modeling. Recovery: Key in an acceptable command name. fitting connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The fitting is connected to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line loads without errors. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Active Raceway type not found Reason: There is no active one-line type defined in the design file. 377 . Recovery: Use the Set Active One-Line Type to set an active one-line type. fitting connected to invalid system! Reason: The fitting is attached to a one-line or RCP belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system loads without errors. Ambiguous Command Reason: The command name you keyed in is not unique. Asid <numeric value>.

<string> not on valid raceway connect point! Reason: The element is attached to an RCP that failed to load. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the one-line will load without errors. Asid <numeric value>. Asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . raceway connect point has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. Asid <numeric value>. raceway connect point connected to invalid system! Reason: The RCP belongs to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Change element annotation. straight connected to invalid oneline! Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line that failed to load. Recovery: Make corrections to the RCP so that it loads without errors. 378 . Recovery: Change element annotation. Recovery: Review the fitting in the design. If the fitting is a specification-driven part.February 2003 Asid <numeric value>. <string> has invalid codelist value! Reason: Element annotation does not match with entries in a codelist table. then the given specification does not have that part defined in its part table. Asid <numeric value>. part could not be found for fitting! Reason: A part matching the description of the fitting could not be found in the part table.

when highlighting by sector and word. Recovery: Give the correct filename or access to the file._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Asid <numeric value>. 379 . Asid:<numeric value> <string> Reason: Display the element’s asid number along with a message. Cannot access filelist <string>! Reason: The file containing the filelist is not available. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. Recovery: None. Bad user data in design file: cannot continue! Reason: Element has been corrupted. Bad user data on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. straight connected to invalid system! A: Error Messages Reason: The straight is attached to a one-line belonging to a system that failed to load. Recovery: Be sure the database exists and that you have privilege. Recovery: Make corrections so that the system will load without errors. Cannot attach to database Reason: The database does not exist or you do not have privilege.

and replace the one-line.February 2003 Cannot convert to RAD50: <<string>> Reason: A key-in contains characters that cannot be converted to RAD50. Recovery: Verify that a valid system is active. the name input already exists in the attached cell library. Cell <string> not found in library Reason: The cell name you keyed in does not exist in the cell library. Recovery: Key-in in only characters. call Intergraph support. or ". Recovery: Either key in another name or delete the cell from the cell library so it may be recreated. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the system user element has been removed. Cannot Place Cross Section. If the problem persists. 380 . Invalid olt on oneline. Recovery: The program will restore the original text. call Intergraph support. Reason: There is a corrupt one-line segment or the one-line type user element has been removed. Invalid sys on oneline. Recovery: Verify that a valid one-line type is active. digits. Cell exists in library: <string> Reason: During cell creation. "$". and replace the one-line.". If the problem persists. Cannot Place Cross Section._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Key in another cell name. Cannot Override <string> Reason: The field or key cannot be overridden.

Could Not Read PDS Data Element Reason: The PDS user element is not found in the design file. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 127._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Color not in range 0 to 127 Reason: The input is not within the valid range for a color. Either the element was removed externally or this design file is not a Raceway or PDS design file. Corrupt or no informational link on raceway element Reason: Element has been corrupted. Recovery: Key in another column number for the given table. Could not find alias file Reason: The alias file containing the command names and acceptable key. Recovery: Have the system manager place the file where it belongs. Recovery: None. Could not find a cross section on one line Reason: Cross section was removed using the Delete command.ins is not in the proper location. A: Error Messages Column does not exist Reason: The given column number is greater than the number of columns in the table. Recovery: Contact Intergraph support. 381 . Recovery: Use the Delete command to remove the associated one-lines and then replace them.

Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Could not open design file Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Could not get one line type part table from user data. Could not open <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support. Recovery: Replace the corrupted element or call Intergraph support._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file.February 2003 Could not find EE_CURPRJ. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Recovery: Export EE_CURPRJ = <current or project directory> Could not get defaults from reference db Reason: Entries for element not found in reference database. Reason: Corrupt user data on one-line or RCP. Reason: Environment variable EE_CURPRJ needs to be exported in order to run this process from the command line. 382 . Could not get one line type from user data. Recovery: Add entries to appropriate tables. Please export this variable.

383 . Recovery: There are various recoveries. Could not read system user element Reason: Rmon could not read the system user element. Could not read the PDS 2 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. A: Error Messages Could not open logfile <string> Reason: A number of factors may result in this error. Recovery: Check the file permissions and the existence of the file. Could not read the PDS 1 user element Reason: The Raceway design file was not created using a PDS or EE Raceway seed file. Could not read one-line user element Reason: Rmon could not read the one-line user element. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Could not open file <string> Reason: No permission to open file or the file does not exist. Recovery: None. Recovery: None. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. based on cause of error.

Recovery: Enter correct filename. insert it into the reference database. Could not retrieve codelist values Reason: The value placed in the codelist column does not appear in the codelist table. Design file <string> does not exist! Reason: The referenced design file was cannot be found. Recovery: Change the value to one that appears in the codelist table. Could not write to TCB._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The database is case-dependent. Recovery: Make sure you have write access to the design file. Cutback Error at oneline <numeric value> Reason: Problems occurred in calculating the cutback from the fitting at the end of a one-line. Recovery: Key in a new key value. Could not retrieve specifications for key <string> Reason: You key in a value for the key to the secondary table. Recovery: Check to see that the design file has a type 63 element and at least 7 blocks in it. If the key does not exist. Defaults do not exist for <string> key = <string> Reason: An entry in the database does not exist for the specified key. Recovery: Make sure the key is correct.February 2003 Could not read the Raceway user element Reason: Rmon could not read the Raceway user element. 384 . status = <numeric value> Reason: The process tried to write a TCB variable to the design file.

Drop point cell ‘‘<string>’’ not found in library Reason: The drop point cell does not exist in the library. Directory <string> not found Reason: A referenced directory cannot be found. Recovery: Enter design filename._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Design file name <string> too long Reason: The filename you specified exceeds 128 characters. Recovery: None. Recovery: Enter correct directory name. Elbow Error: acute angle at oneline index <numeric value>. 385 . Recovery: Modify the radius or extension of the fitting. A: Error Messages Design filename required! Reason: No filename entered. Elbow Error with cutback <numeric value> at index <numeric value>. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. so it will go past the previous fitting or end of linestring. Reason: Acute bends are not supported in this release. Recovery: Create a drop point cell and/or enter the correct drop point cell name in the EE Raceway defaults form. change the spec. Recovery: Key in a filename with fewer than 128 characters.

Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Reason: Widths of the cross sections must be equal. Elbow Error: contradictory widths at index <numeric value>. Reason: Height of the cross sections must be equal. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. 386 . Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same horizontal orientation. Recovery: Rotate the cross section or place one-line again. Reason: The cross sections were not placed with the same vertical orientation. Elbow Error: skewed angle at oneline index <numeric value>. Recovery: Try to rotate cross sections or place one-line again. Elbow Error: contradictory vertical directions at index <numeric value>. Elbow Error: contradictory horizontal directions at index <numeric value>. Reason: Cross section cannot be propagated around bend without being skewed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Elbow Error: contradictory heights at index <numeric value>.

Propagation status may not be recorded. A: Error Messages Element not found Reason: There does not exist an element with the given sector/word or asid.err did not close properly. Error could not write to design file! Reason: No write access to design file. Recovery: Enter a new asid number. Reason: File pro. Error building user data Reason: Could not build user data. Recovery: Change access to design file. 387 .err file and the rway/tmp directory have read/write privileges. Recovery: Change access to design file. Recovery: Exit the command and retry. Error closing propagation log file. Recovery: Enter a new value._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Element has no parent Reason: The element with the given asid has no parent element. Recovery: Make sure the pro. Error could not write user element! Reason: No write access to design file.

Error getting column names from reference for table <string>! Reason: No privilege. Recovery: Add entries to reference database. Recovery: Delete and replace element in design file. Error getting information from <string> table! Reason: Table not found in schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add table to schema or change schema. Error getting mslinks for tables! Reason: Tables missing in project database. Recovery: Place or annotate title block. Recovery: Add privilege to database.February 2003 Error getting annotation information for element! Reason: Element in design file is corrupt. Error getting values from reference for table <string>! Reason: Values for table not found in reference database. Recovery: Add appropriate tables to project database. Error getting sheet name from design file! Reason: Title block not found or not annotated. 388 .

Recovery: Add the ee_unique table to the reference database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Reason: Could not open Eden symbol library. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading drawing! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Correct entry. 389 ._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error in graphic bang placement. Recovery: Make sure that RWAY_EDEN_LIB and EDEN_LIB are set up properly in your . Error initializing unique table! Reason: ee_unique table missing from the reference database. Reason: Internal error. Error initializing validity table! Reason: Mscodelist table not found.EErc file. A: Error Messages Error initializing eden library ‘‘<string>’’. Error invalid column name in unique table! Reason: Incorrect entry in ee_unique table. Recovery: Add mscodelist table to reference table.

Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading fittings! Reason: No privilege for operation._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Error loading drop point! Reason: No privilege for this operation. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error loading one-lines! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database. Recovery: Add privilege to database. 390 . Recovery: Add privilege to database. Error loading straights! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading systems! Reason: No privilege for operation. Error loading raceway connect points! Reason: No privilege for operation. Recovery: Add privilege to database.

Error merging annotation from design file! Reason: Element annotation columns do not match columns in project database. and one element._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error loading to equipment! Reason: No privilege for this operation. A: Error Messages Error marking elements for deletion! Reason: ee_to_drw column missing a table. ustn returned status of <numeric value>! Reason: Microstation could not open specified design file. Reason: The Eden symbol definition must contain at least one placepoint. Error opening design file <string>. Recovery: Refer to Microstation documentation for recovery. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol. Recovery: Add columns and try again. 391 . Error opening database! Reason: Schema not found. Recovery: Add schema or enter correct schema name. Recovery: Change annotation of element. Recovery: Add privilege to the database. Error No Placepoints or No Elements. one datum point.

Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Add schema to database or change schema name.February 2003 Error opening project database! Reason: Schema not found. Error parsing RCP Reason: An error occurred while parsing a raceway connect point (RCP). Recovery: Delete the one-line containing the RCP and place it again. Recovery: Delete the one-line and place it again. Error parsing cross section Reason: An error occurred while parsing a cross section. Error opening reference database! Reason: Schema not found. 392 .sql file. Error parsing one-line Reason: An error occurred while parsing a one-line._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Error querying ref db for mscatalog Reason: The mscatalog table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Add schema to database or change EES_REFDB.

Error reading user element of design file! Reason: User element missing or corrupt in design file. Error reading database table names! Reason: Table name in mscatalog table invalid. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Error reading database column names! Reason: No access to column names. Recovery: Change file list name or protection on file list. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. 393 . Recovery: Correct entry in mscatalog. Recovery: Add privileges to database.sql file. A: Error Messages Error reading TCB of design file! Reason: TCB corrupted._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error querying ref db for mscodelist Reason: The mscodelist table does not exist or there is no connect permission. Recovery: Run the Create Database process with the rwayref. Error reading file list <string>! Reason: No access to read file list.

Error spawning server Reason: Could not open reference schema. Recovery: Return to the environment and make sure you are using the correct reference schema. Recovery: Add privilege. Error unloading Sheet! Reason: Sheet not found. Error sheet name cannot be duplicated! Reason: A drawing with the given sheet name already exists in the database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Enter correct sheet name. Recovery: Add privilege to database. The sheet name must be unique within the database. Error unloading connect points! Reason: No privilege to delete from database. Recovery: Edit the sheet name.February 2003 Error saving symbology ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .Design file may be corrupted Reason: Could not save the symbology to the design file. 394 . Error unloading drawing! Reason: No privilege to delete from database.

395 . Recovery: None. Recovery: Fix other errors. Field may not contain an empty value Reason: Field cannot be left blank. The process creates a zero-length envelope. Errors existed during unload Reason: Errors in other procedures. Fatal error! Vector length was negative. Recovery: Read previous error messages to determine cause. Errors occurred during interference detection process! Reason: Fatal error occurred during process. Reason: Interference detection found an item of size = 0 (length). Reason: Internal error._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Error starting or stopping graphic bang. Recovery: Add privilege to database. A: Error Messages Error updating row in <string> table! Reason: No privilege to write to database. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Recovery: Key in a value.

Reason: Heights of cross sections are inconsistent. Recovery: Modify the radius. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Reason: Widths of cross sections are inconsistent and no reducing fitting is allowed in this case. overwrite or append? Reason: The specified file already exists. Recovery: Write over the existing file or attach new file to existing file. Fitting Error: contradicting widths at RCP asid <numeric value>. Fitting Error: contradicting at RCP asid <numeric value>. all four one-lines must be at right angles to each other. Reason: The cross sections cannot be propagated at the fitting without being skewed. Fitting Orientation Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. change the spec. or replace the one-line so that it has enough room to create the fitting. Reason: There was inadequate room to place fitting. at a cross. For example. so it will go past the previous fitting or linestring._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Fitting Error: Illegal angle at RCP asid <numeric value>. 396 .February 2003 File <string> exists. Reason: An illegal angle exists. Recovery: Modify cross section dimensions. Fitting Cutback Error at RCP asid <numeric value>. Recovery: Replace the one-line that forms the illegal angle. Recovery: Try rotating cross sections or replacing the one-lines. extension or transition of the fitting.

Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 255. A: Error Messages Form could not be created Reason: A form could not be created by the software. Recovery: Exit and re-enter the product. Form error could not find form file <string> Reason: The referenced form file could not be found in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH. Form creation error Reason: The software could not create a form. a form could not be displayed by the software. 397 . Recovery: Fatal error. Form error reading form file <string> Reason: I-Forms could not read the referenced form file. Possible memory allocation problem. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Try to exit and re-enter the software._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Font not in range 0 to 255 Reason: The input was not within valid range for a font. Recovery: Make sure the referenced form file exists in the path defined by EE_FORM_PATH which is defined in the product. Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Form could not be displayed Reason: Once created.

Recovery: Fix problem as specified by earlier error messages._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Exit and reenter the product. Recovery: Remove the function name from the EERWAY_LOCKED_OUT variable in the . 398 . Graphic group not found Reason: No elements found in the design file with the given graphic group.February 2003 Forms environment not initialized Reason: Fatal error. Interference Detection initialization error! Reason: Could not open design filelist or read the design file./config/assign file. Function locked out: no permission Reason: This function has been disallowed by the system manager. Invalid annotation type Reason: Annotation of the wrong type was found inside the fence block annotation when trying to close a cell. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -2147483648 to 2147483647. Integer not in range -32768 to 32767: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted. Recovery: Enter a value within the range of -32768 to 32767. Recovery: Delete the highlighted element or move it outside the fence area. Integer not in range -2147483648 to 2147483647: <string> Reason: The value entered exceeds the range or the input is corrupted.

For example. Recovery: Modify the reference database to contain a symbolname for each part. Invalid Eden Symbolname ’<string>’. A: Error Messages Invalid cell: <string> Reason: The given cell is not the type the command expected._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid asid id Reason: An element cannot be found in the design file with the given asid id. Recovery: Create a valid drop point cell through cell creation. Recovery: Change the criteria on the Manual Placement form or modify the symbol. Invalid Connection Reason: The identified RCP has a higher priority level than the identified one-line. Recovery: Make sure the priority level of the identified RCP is less than or equal to the priority level of the one-line. Recovery: Key in a cell of the type the command is expecting. Invalid Eden Processor Input. Reason: Could not create Eden symbol with the given criteria. <numeric value>. Reason: The symbolname is blank. Invalid drop point cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid drop point. Place Title Block must be given a title block cell. Recovery: Key in another asid id. 399 .

Reason: The height or width is less than or equal to zero. Invalid input Reason: You entered an incorrect value. click on the REMOVE button to delete. Invalid integer: <string> Reason: The value entered is not a valid integer.quantity can not be set to 0 Reason: The value you entered is not a valid input. Invalid height/width for cross section type <string>. If it is a cable entry. Invalid mix of EDF and text: <string> Reason: Field consists of text and Enter Data Fields for the same string._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Modify reference database height/width for the active specification. Recovery: Key in a new value greater than 0. For example. Recovery: Enter an integer value. quantity must be an integer greater than 0. 400 . Recovery: Key in another value. Recovery: Make the field either all text or all EDF. Recovery: Select another graphic group number. Invalid key in .February 2003 Invalid graphic group number Reason: The graphic group number is outside the valid range.

A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at oneline asid <numeric value>. vertex <numeric value>. 401 . Recovery: Re-enter a valid real number. Invalid response Reason: You entered an invalid response to a system prompt. Invalid real number: <string> Reason: The value entered must contain a decimal with a preceding number. Invalid RCP . Recovery: Delete the RCP and place the one-line again. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the fitting to the database.Only two one-lines can be attached Reason: The RCP has more or fewer than two one-lines attached. Reason: The elbow or straight at the one-line cannot be verified with the database._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Invalid Part Found at RCP asid <numeric value>. Invalid RCP – No one-lines attached Reason: There are no one-lines associated with the raceway connect point (RCP). Reason: The fitting at the RCP cannot be verified with the database. Recovery: You can only remove an RCP with exactly two one-lines attached. Recovery: Enter a valid response. Recovery: Turn Part Verification off OR add the elbow or straight to the database.

Recovery: Delete the element and place it again or recreate the element._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Enter another sector/word value. Recovery: Key in another title block cell name. Level not in range 1 to 63 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for a level.February 2003 Invalid/No ris link on element Reason: An element with the given entity/mslink could not be found in the design file. Invalid title block Reason: Not a valid title block. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 1 to 63. 402 . Invalid sector/word values Reason: An element could not be found at the given sector/word location in the design file. Recovery: Create a valid equipment pointer through cell creation. Recovery: Enter another entity/mslink. Invalid ulink on element Reason: Not a valid ulink for the element. Invalid equipment pointer cell: ‘‘<string>’’ Reason: The cell is not a valid equipment pointer.

and place the element or RCP. RC.. Recovery: Terminate before exceeding the max. Reason: Invalid text justification entered._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Load initialization error! Reason: Some other initialization error procedure failed. Multiple annotation for column <numeric value> Reason: Only one annotation element per column is allowed. Recovery: Delete all but one of the highlighted elements.. Recovery: Fix other problems. CB. More than one title block found! Reason: More than one title block exists in the design file. Recovery: Delete the highlighted area. CT. LC. CC. Mismatched annotation Reason: Annotation was found that has no parent inside of the fence area.or RB in the justification field. A: Error Messages Max run angle = <numeric value>. current = <numeric value> Reason: The sum of all the angles in the current one-line exceeds the maximum as defined in the one-line type. or RB. Recovery: Enter LT. RT. LC. LB. Recovery: Delete all but one title block. 403 . . Must be LT.

Recovery: Attach a cell library (rc=celllibraryname._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Add the EE Raceway tables to the database.cel). Recovery: Define an active one-line type using the Set Active One-Line Type command. No active one line type defined Reason: You did not define an active one-line type in the design file. No columns available for annotation Reason: The database does not contain the EE Raceway database tables. Recovery: Key in a cell name to close or exit the command. No active group defined Reason: The selected group operation requires that you define an active group. 404 . No cell library attached Reason: A cell library is not attached to the design file. Recovery: Define an active system using the Set Active System command. Recovery: Specify a group to be active. No active system defined Reason: You did not define an active system in the design file.February 2003 Must enter cell name to close Reason: You tried to close a cell without keying in a name.

Reason: The cross section must be of type A. C for the cross section type. A: Error Messages No elements in fence Reason: The defined fence does not contain a valid element within its borders. Recovery: Press the Override button and key in the value again. No or Illegal Cross section type <string>. No memory available! Recovery: Exit the process and re-enter and/or reboot the workstation. Recovery: Modify the reference database to include A. Recovery: Redefine the fence to include a valid element. 405 . B._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No Duplicate Group Name Allowed Reason: The new group name matches the name of an existing group. Recovery: Define a one-line type from the reference database using the Define One-Line Type command. No raceway one-line type defined Reason: You must have at least one one-line type defined from the reference database in the design file. Recovery: Key in another name. No memory available for form Reason: The forms software could not allocate enough memory for creation of the form. or C in the active specification. No overrides allowed without override button on Reason: The Override button is not depressed. B. Recovery: Exit completely and re-enter the product.

Recovery: Populate the database with parts. No valid elements in group Reason: The active group does not contain any valid elements for the specified group manipulation command. No valid dimensions exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. No valid spec keys exist for this oneline type Reason: Problem retrieving the active specification. Recovery: Populate the database with parts. Recovery: Populate the database. Recovery: Add read/write permissions to file.February 2003 No read/write access to file <string> Reason: No permission to read and write to the specified file. No valid parts exist for this oneline type Reason: The database has no parts for this specification of the one-line type. Recovery: Define a system from the reference database using the Define System command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Recovery: Make sure the active specification is in the database through Define Raceway Parameters. No valid spec exist for this oneline type Reason: No specifications exist in the database for this one-line type. 406 . No systems defined in this design file Reason: You must have at least one system defined from the reference database in the design file.

A: Error Messages No valid special parts exist for this table Reason: There are no special parts defined in the active table._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages No valid special part tables exist Reason: There are no special parts tables in the database. One-line is a member of a different system Recovery: Change the active systems to that of the identified one-line. Recovery: Attach a cell library that has read/write permissions or assign write permission to the current cell library. Not an EE RACEWAY design file Reason: The design file was not seeded with the EE Raceway seed file. 407 . Recovery: Populate the database. No write access to cell library Reason: The attached cell library is read only. One-lines do not contain same systems Recovery: Identify one-lines that contain the same systems. Recovery: The design file must be created using the EE Raceway seed file. Recovery: Populate the database. No values found in the codelist Reason: The codelist table contains no rows. Recovery: Insert the rows into the codelist table that corresponds to the column.

Reason: The straight must be place with a length greater than 0. Project schema not defined Reason: EE_SCHEMA has not been exported. Problem retrieving symbology from one line type element. Recovery: Select another option. Placepoints/Datumpoints are not defined properly. Recovery: Give length in the Length field on the Manual Placement form. Reason: One-line type user data corrupt on one-line OR the system symbology user elements have been corrupted. Reason: This identifies which one-line is being projected. Recovery: Export the variable EE_SCHEMA. Recovery: None. Reason: Eden symbol must have at least one datumpoint and at least one placepoint defined.February 2003 Option not allowed Reason: The selected option is not allowed. Projecting oneline with asid <numeric value>. 408 . Recovery: Call Intergraph support. Problem with shared memory! Reason: Internal error. Placing Straight Section with No Length. Recovery: Modify the Eden symbol._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Recovery: Identify one of these elements. Recovery: Specify new find criteria._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Raceway element not found Reason: Unable to locate a valid raceway element (one-line. Recovery: Export EES_REFDB. Select failed. Recovery: Place a title block in the design file. The required columns’ names are prefixed with "ee_". Schema name required Reason: No schema name entered. Reference schema name required! Reason: EES_REFDB has not been exported. Recovery: Create the appropriate table. three-line. title block. RCP). Reference schema table missing required columns Reason: A required column in the table for the element you are annotating is NOT in the table or in the mscolumns table. A: Error Messages Raceway title block not found Reason: Unable to locate a title block in the design file. Recovery: Enter schema name. 409 . no rows found fitting the given criteria Reason: Could not find rows in the database fitting the specified find criteria.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Sheet not found in database! Reason: Sheet name not in drawing table. Recovery: Change sheet name. Symbol file not found: <string> Reason: The symbol file EE_SYM_FILE could not be found in the symbol path EE_SYM_PATH. Recovery: Enter sheet name. Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_FILE and EE_SYM_PATH are defined in the directory. 410 .unl file or inserting a row through SQL.February 2003 Sheet Name is required Reason: No sheet name entered. Recovery: Add the missing entry into the mscatalog table by loading the mscat. Text element not found Reason: A text element could not be located. Table number <numeric value> not in mscatalog Reason: The specified table number / table name entry does not exist in the reference database. Recovery: Identify a valid text element. Style not in range 0 to 7 Reason: The input was not within the valid range for style. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range 0 to 7.

The system cannot calculate the height and direction of projection of this complex shape. Too many one-lines at RCP <numeric value> Reason: Cannot propagate with this many one lines. Warning Cannot calculate envelope for non-planar complex shape with Asid = <numeric value> Reason: Found a cell containing a complex shape which does not meet any lines or surfaces at a 90 degree angle. To ensure a measure of 90 degrees. Recovery: Enter a new value greater than zero. Rebuild cell so that the complex shape meets a line or surface at 90 degrees. Recovery: None Unload initialization error! Reason: No privilege to read table or column names. cannot be edited. Recovery: None. Recovery: Place a manual fitting. Truncated <numeric value> characters Reason: The number of characters allowed in the field has been exceeded by <numeric value> characters. Recovery: Highlight the cell with that Asid and look to see if an envelope needs to be built for the complex shape in that cell._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages The value must be greater than zero Reason: The width must be greater than zero. Recovery: Add privileges to the database. 411 . snap to the angle. therefore. A: Error Messages Title block placed .Some fields review only Reason: Some fields are locked once you place the title block and.

Recovery: Make sure EE_SYM_PATH is defined in the . Recovery: Change the title block annotation./config/assign file and that its value is a full path. Warning invalid form path: <string> Reason: The form path EE_FORM_PATH could not be found. 412 . Recovery: Make sure EE_FORM_PATH is defined in the . Warning Fittings at oneline <numeric value> overlap Reason: Fittings at either end of the one-line overlap. Recovery: Accept or reject the one-line type selection form.February 2003 Warning Column <string> found in reference. Recovery: If necessary. Warning invalid symbol path: <string> Reason: The symbol path EE_SYM_PATH could not be found. Recovery: Modify the specification or parts through annotation OR modify or replace the one-lines. you can add a column to the project database and copy the values over. not in project! Reason: The referenced column was found in the reference not the project database. Warning Drawing not valid type! Reason: The title block annotation does not match the annotation type table./config/assign file and that its value is a full path._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Warning must accept/reject One Line Type selection Reason: You must accept/reject the one-line type selection form before performing a group operation.

Recovery: Accept or reject the system selection form._ _______________ Appendix A: Error Messages Warning must accept/reject System selection Reason: You must accept/reject the system selection form before performing a group operation. Recovery: Key in the desired group name. A: Error Messages Warning must keyin a group name Reason: When performing the selected group operation. Recovery: Enter a new value within the range of 0 to 31. Weight not in range 0 to 31 Reason: The input was not in the valid range for weight. you must key in a group name. 413 .

February 2003 414 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File describes the file that maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. Appendix D: Specification describes vendor specifications and how to prepare them. This file is run automatically when you enter EE Raceway. It identifies the files that can be modified and describes some important files. Appendix J: Reports contains detailed descriptions of the standard and rule checks reports delivered with the product. 415 .cmd file contains the alias. It attaches the panel menu. Appendix H: alias. and printers in the EE Raceway Environment. Appendix F: EE File Structure contains the file structure for both EE Nucleus and EE Raceway.cmd file and customizing menus. Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation describes generation of Eden symbols and provides a sample symbol processor file. Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager contains a detailed description of the RIS Schema Manager utility. B: System/App Mgmt. reports._ _______________ Appendix B: System/Application Manager Information Appendix B System/Application Manager Information This appendix and the following appendices outline the responsibilities for the EE Raceway system or application manager.cmd file as it is delivered. You will need this appendix to locate files that you want to modify.cmds file. Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files explains how to modify the files that list the processes. You can modify or disable this function through the file. Included in these appendices are important references and procedures needed to prepare and customize the EE Raceway product: Appendix C: EE Databases describes the EE databases and contains schema descriptions for both the reference and project databases. Appendix I: rway. rule checks. Also included in this appendix are two descriptions and printouts related to customizing the alias.cmds contains the rway. The key-in names for commands can be modified by editing these files. Important new procedures related to RIS and the databases are described in this section.

Appendix N: EE Configure describes the EE environment variables and how to configure them. 416 .February 2003 Appendix M: EE Manager contains a description of the EE Manager utility and its Edit Database process._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

alias. Form Name piform* piform_tal1 piform_tal2 piform_thn1 piform_thn2 Description default tall/thin (design 1) tall/thin (design 2) long/thin (design 1) long/thin (design 2) * The chapter entitled Precision Input Form contains a detailed illustration of the default form design (piform).unl files and database tables.cmds (all involve modifying existing text files using an editor).cmd. ee_out_ht_diam real not null. Add the <one-line_type>_spec and <one-line_type>_part tables to the reference database.EErc file (win32app\eenuc) to a different form name. Adding a One-Line Type This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a new one-line type to the reference database. Such customization includes writing processes and user commands using the MicroStation software. More extensive customization is possible for advanced users. The available precision input forms (described below) reside in win32app\eerway\sym. ee_units integer not null. To change the form design. and rway. set the variable EE_PIFORM in the . Refer to the MicroStation Applications Programmer’s Guide for this latter procedure. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. Precision Input Form B: System/App Mgmt. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow. ee_dimension_1 real. For detailed information about editing your . 417 . ee_out_width real. ee_dimension_2 real. as in the following example: create table trench_spec ( vendor integer not null. ee_extension real. 1._ _______________ Appendix B: Customizing Customizing Some simple customization is described in the appendices entitled Customizing. Several designs of the precision input form are delivered with EE Raceway.

ee_part char(20)._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . grant all on trench_spec to public. ee_description char(40) ). 2.unl file and a <oneline_type>_part. refer to the tray_spec and tray_part . real. 418 . real.unl files that are delivered with EE Raceway. ee_symbol char(6). create index i_fswidth on trench_spec(ee_out_width). grant all on trench_part to public. or you can add the data to your vendor. ee_part_key char(28) not null. ee_spec_key char(28). Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. create table trench_part ( ee_tl_type integer. 3.unl file. char(40) ). char(28) not null.unl files reside in win32app\eerway\db.unl file which contain the required default values for the one-line type. ee_angle real. For sample files. Create a <one-line_type>_spec. ee_tl_qual integer. ee_tl_subtype integer. create index i_fsvendor on trench_spec(vendor). char(6). ee_spec2_key char(28). create unique index i_fseekey on trench_spec(ee_spec_key).February 2003 ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key description real. You can add the necessary rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. create index i_fsheight on trench_spec(ee_out_ht_diam). create unique index i_fpeekey on fit_part(ee_part_key). All delivered . ee_weight real. create index i_fpskey on trench_part(ee_spec_key). char(20).

419 . Run the Update reference schema process to add your new one-line type to the database.cmd file. 1.unl files to the rwayref. in a format like the following: FILE "tray_part.unl file. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscatalog table or by inserting records in the mscatref. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. Add the newly-created <one-line_type>_spec.unl file._ _______________ Appendix B: 4. consult the appendix entitled EE Databases. INSERT INTO tray_part. Add records to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables.unl file. B: System/App Mgmt. 8. Add the special fitting table to the reference database. as in the following example: create table transit ( vendor integer not null. 7. Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table in the reference database for any columns that are codelisted for the one-line type. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. Add the new one-line type to the ol_type table. 6.unl files and database tables. These instructions are intended as a basic workflow.unl file. 9. Customizing 5. Adding a Special Fitting This section outlines the basic steps necessary to add a special fitting to the reference database. Add records to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for both the <one-line_type>_spec and the <one-line_type>_part tables. For information about codelists. For detailed information about editing your . You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the ol_type table or by inserting records in the olt. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscolumns table or by inserting records in the mscolref.unl file and the <oneline_type>_part.unl" DELIMITER "|".

February 2003 ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part ee_symbol ee_part_key ee_description integer not null. refer to the pullbox. in a format like the following: FILE "pullbox. real. char(20). 3. create index i_tsitwidth on transit(ee_out_width). For a sample special fitting . real.unl file that is delivered with EE Raceway. 4. 2.unl file to the rwayref.unl that contains the required default values for your fitting. grant all on transit to public. create index i_tsitdepth on transit(ee_dimension_1).unl file. char(40) ).unl file. create index i_tsitvendor on transit(vendor). char(20).cmd file. char(6). Add the newly-created <special fitting>. Add the new special fitting to the three-line type codelist table. create unique index i_tsiteekey on transit(ee_part_key).unl file. see the appendix entitled Eden Symbol Generation. 420 . real not null. 5. You can add rows directly to the vendor codelist table in the database. Create a <special fitting>._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or you add the data to your tlt. Create any new Eden symbols needed to graphically display the new special fitting. For basic information about creating Eden symbols. or you can insert records in the vendor. create index i_tsitheight on transit(ee_out_ht_diam). 6. You can add the entry directly to the tl_type table in the database. char(28) not null.unl" DELIMITER "|". INSERT INTO pullbox. Add any new vendors to the vendor table in the reference database. 7. real. Add a row to the mscatalog table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table.

Customizing Add necessary rows to the mscodelist table (in the reference database) for any columns that are codelisted for the special fitting. or by inserting a record in the mscatref.unl file.msg files. 10. You cannot change this name.unl file. To the right of each = is the message itself. You can accomplish this either by adding the row directly to the mscolumns table in the database. 11. Error Messages Error messages for the delivered commands are located in the error. Delivered reports are created using the RISRPT product and are compatible with the DB Access (DBA) product. B: System/App Mgmt.unl file. see the appendix entitled EE Databases. You can accomplish this either by adding a row to the manual_part table in the database. The report template library is delivered in the win32app\eerway\report directory. You can accomplish this either by adding rows directly to the mscodelist table or by inserting records in the mscodref. 421 . 9._ _______________ Appendix B: You can accomplish this either by adding a row directly to the mscatalog table. the hard-coded error message name is to the left of each = (equal sign). Use a standard text editor to modify the error.msg files in both win32app\eerway\msg and win32app\eenuc\msg. Reports You can create or modify standard and rule check reports. Add a row to the mscolumns table (in the reference database) for the special fitting table. For information about codelists. or by inserting a record in the manprt. Run the Update reference schema process to add your new special fitting to the database.unl file. Add the new special fitting entry to the manual part table. or by inserting a record in the mscolref. Reports may also be created using the native RDBMS report writing product. which you can modify. 8. In these files.

These environment variables can be modified using the Start > Programs > EENUC > EE Configure command. Sets the directory for temporary files.sb1"). Sets the directory for the on-line Help files.cfg file: For MicroStation: MS_CELL MS_APP MS_EXE MS_APPMEN Sets the directory that holds the cell libraries. They include Microstation.ndx) files. Sets the directory that holds the menu file mgds. Directory path to the EE Raceway symbols.e._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cfg file contains detailed descriptions of the MicroStation and Umenu environment variables. Defines the path to the on-line Help files. This directory is also the location of user command index (. MS_DATA MS_TMP MS_HELPFILE MS_HELPPATH The MicroStation\Program\MicroStation\config\msconfig. The following environment variable is defined in the win32app\eerway\bin\c400 or c100/rmonshell file: MS_CACH Sets the memory to be allocated for a design file editing session. File containing EE Raceway symbols.February 2003 EE Environment Variables This section lists and describes the environment variables that are delivered when you download EE Raceway. For EE Raceway: EERD_COMPRESS EERD_MSGS EERD_TBLS RWAY_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE Compresses the file when you exit a design session. 422 . the file MicroStation uses to save data about the attached menu. Sets the directory where application executable files are found when activated from a user command TSK statement. "am=n. "am=ustn.cs". This variable will override the user preferences setting.sb" (i. The following environment variables are defined in the win32app\eerway\ee. Directory for the database table files Directory path to the EE Raceway forms. Used as a pointer to application programs. EE Nucleus. Sets the directory where application-/user-defined menus are to found when activated from an "am=n. and EE Raceway-specific variables.men.h1". or "am=n. Directory for the message files.

delivered with the EE Nucleus product. Project Database sql file. Directory path for data files. 423 . Directory path and project database name. Directory path for EE Nucleus product._ _______________ Appendix B: The following are the environment variables that are recognized by the EE Nucleus product. Default nodename for archive/restore. Directory path and filename of password file to enter system manager page. Default remote path for archive/restore. Directory path for data files. User-defined reference database cmd file. Reference Database sql file. Directory path for the Eden symbol library. For EE Raceway: EE_RWAY* EERWAY_DAT EERWAY_SEED RWAY_CMD RWAY_SQL RWAYREF_CMD RWAYREF_SQL EDEN_LIB RWAY_EDEN_LIB EE_PIFORM Directory path for the EE Raceway product. MS_DIR RIS_DIR EE_NUC* ENV_MSGS EENUC_DAT Directory path for the MicroStation product. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Name of the precision input form that displays during the design session. Directory path for seed files. The following are the environment variables defined using the EE Configure command. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\bin\EE file. it must be set to "A". A variable used for ORACLE databases. The following are the environment variables defined in the win32app\eenuc\. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. delivered when you download the EE Nucleus product. Directory path for message files. Project Database cmd file. Font used by MicroStation for window and menu display. User-defined reference database sql file. Default username for archive/restore. Defines the "tty" type you are running on. Directory path for the RIS product. User-defined project database sql file. Filename for the Eden symbol library. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. Reference Database cmd file.EErc file. User-defined project database cmd file. Directory path and filename of command window resource file. MS_USERPREF MS_CMDWINDRSC MS_SYSFONTS EE_TERM ORACLE_SID Directory path and filename of user preference file. An asterisk (*) indicates that you cannot override a particular value. B: System/App Mgmt. EE_CURPRJ* EE_DBS* EE_NODENAME EE_REMDIR EE_SCHEMA EE_USERNAME SYS_PASSW_FILE EE_CUSTOM_SQL EE_CUSTOM_CMD EE_CUSTOM_REFSQL EE_CUSTOM_REFCMD EE Environment Variables Directory path for current EE project. Schema name for project database.

Filename of EE symbol file. Schema name for reference database.February 2003 DBA_SUPPORT EES_REFDB EES_REFSER EE_FORM_PATH EE_SYM_FILE EE_SYM_PATH For ORACLE databases: ORACLE_HOME For INGRES databases: II_SYSTEM For INFORMIX databases: INFORMIXDIR Directory path for INFORMIX executables. Directory path for EE symbol file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Data files for DB Access Support. EE reference database server process. Directory path for ORACLE executables. 424 . Directory path for EE forms. Directory path for INGRES executables.

RIS isolates the differences in specific vendors’ Relational Database Management Systems (RDBMS). The reference database contains information applicable to multiple projects. and Ingres. Processes needed in the procedures above._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Databases Appendix C EE Databases All EE databases you create will be relational databases. you are not forced to re-enter common information for each project. that is. (For those familiar with EDES. Schema descriptions for the EE project database and the EE reference database. the reference database replaces the concept of shared part entity files and active entity files. Procedures that must be followed by new users of the EE product. Thus. that supports it.) One reference database can be accessed by multiple project databases. Most relational databases use Standard Query Language (SQL). allowing generic network access to all EE databases generated with the following RDBMS’s: Standard Engine (SE) Informix. The Electrical Engineer product line is supported by two relational databases: a project database and a reference database. The EE products attach to their relational databases through Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS). You can report and query from the reference database as well as the project database. a generic relational database interface. The reference database is identified when you enter a project. C: EE Databases 425 . they are based on the relational data model in which a relation is a two-dimensional table comprised of rows and columns. A project is an associated collection of drawings and their database. On-line Informix. The project database contains information applicable to a particular project. Procedures that must be followed by existing users of the EE product. such as symbol and part information. RIS. This section contains: Descriptions of the EE databases and the Intergraph software. Oracle.

to attach to an SQL-type database. you can update schemas without knowing either the differences between RDBMS’s or the syntax of the RIS create schema statement. Through the use the RIS risschema_mgr product.February 2003 Relational Interface System (RIS) All EE products use a RIS schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for more information on the RIS Schema Manager product. which you define. in fact. The RIS schema identifies a unique database/user combination in a given commercial database system.) 426 . Different RDBMS’s establish users in different ways. the very concept of a database differs greatly from one RDBMS to another.

page 50). local or remote. You can manage the risschema file in any of the following ways: — You can create and maintain your own risschema file. (See the appendix entitled RIS Schema Manager for detailed information on using the RIS Schema Manager product. The risschema file is an ASCII file that contains the names. The risschema_mgr process updates and maintains the file. — You can locate the risschema file from another workstation using the risschema_mgr process and access any schemas created on that machine. INFORMIX users will now have to create all databases in ANSI mode. You should consult the individual RDBMS documentation on installation procedures. After you have created an empty database. using the risschema_mgr process. Access RIS Schema Manager through the Database Utilities option in the EE Environment. but it can exist anywhere as long as the parameters file (win32app\ingr\share\RISversion\parms) points to it. The process resides locally on your machine and recognizes any RIS schema on any database. For more information about the risschema file.) This process will create the risschema definition file. you need to populate that database with EE tables and default information. use the Update Schema option under Database Utilities (see Database Utilities. that was created using RIS Schema Manager. Once you have created a schema on your empty database. You can usually locate this file in the RIS product directory. you must use the RIS Schema Manager product to create a schema. Check the documentation delivered with the product for information on infxcreate. or see INFORMIX documentation for other creation methods. see the appendix entitled RIS Schema Definition File. For New Users You must first create an empty database and a user name through your chosen RDBMS. and locations of all RIS schemas and databases. C: EE Databases 427 . To do so._ _______________ Appendix C: Database and RIS Procedures Database and RIS Procedures You must adhere to the procedures that follow before using EE with a relational database. ownerships.

428 . This is the command line syntax for the Update schema process: win32app\eenuc\bin\create_db [-v] [-q .sql file] [-c .cmd) file that defines which . — AND — — the corresponding .February 2003 Update Schema (create_db) Process You can use this program to do the following: Update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.unl file(s) which contain default information.sql file that has a different structure than the original . You should run the Update schema process from the EE Environment Project Menu.sql file.unl files that are listed in the . Where a table lacks a unique index.sql file.sql file.sql file -c . you can also include: — a command (. the process will: — add new tables listed in the . you must first export the variable ENV_MSGS to win32app\ingr\eenuc\msg. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition keeping column data where column names match. — OR — Modify an existing RIS schema’s tables to conform to the structure of a given . If you want to load a schema with default information.cmd file displays SQL commands as they are executed schema definition file command file to load schema To create a new schema. you must have at least: — an SQL (.sql file. If Update schema is used with a .unl files to load into which tables. To run it outside of the EE Environment._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the process loads it only if the table is empty.sql) file which contains the table and column structure.cmd files.cmd file] schema name -v -q . — load those tables having a unique index with data from the . and then key in the command line syntax for the process. — modify existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the .

_ _______________ Appendix C: Update Schema (create_db) Process Example: $ create_db -q win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref. C: EE Databases 429 . created through the risschema_mgr process on an existing schema. with EE Raceway tables and default reference information. You can use this process to execute ANY valid RIS-supported SQL statement upon an existing schema. Simply place it in a file and call that filename with the -q option.cmd sample_ref This will populate an empty sample_ref schema.sql -c \win32app\ingr\eerway\db\rwayref.

Default Attributes Some tables exist in the reference schema to support default attributes. tray_spec. When editing/reviewing annotation for EE Raceway elements (title blocks. the reference schema tables contains two additional columns: key_column and key_description. 3. If the system cannot find a key for some reason. while the METRIC DEFAULT is used with the seed design file using Metric measurements. The key_column field is a unique index used to identify a particular row of default attributes in the reference schema._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can establish default attributes for drawings. the project schema must be custom-built accordingly. and equipment pointers. Each of these keys will be the default key for all one-lines of a given one-line type unless you override the key during annotation for an individual one-line. fittings. You will identify these keys through the Active OneLine Type Parameters form. But if the project schema is custom-built. For example.February 2003 Reference Schema . one-line. Keys In addition to the default attribute columns. the drawing. one-lines. Raceway One-Line Keys A key is stored for each one-line type within a drawing. raceway connect points (RCPs). RCP. one-lines. All specification information is carried in the reference database. You will access the reference database during the following procedures: 1. The actual column names are defined by the values of the key_columns and key_description in the mscatalog entry for the given table. straights. and so forth) during a design session. The one-line table is delivered with both the DEFAULT and METRIC DEFAULT keys. if the reference schema is custom-built. 430 . Each of the tables is delivered with one entry called DEFAULT. Some of the columns in the reference schema tables are required and cannot be modified or deleted. the reference schema needs to be custom-built only if you want defaults for any new column to exist in the reference schema. Selecting the active one-line type parameters during a design session. The DEFAULT key is used with the seed design file using English measurements. drop points. for example. Each table must contain at least a subset of the column/attribute structure as its corresponding table in the project schema. including.General Description The Electrical Engineer reference database is a multi-table relational database containing default attribute information and specification information. RCPs. it uses the DEFAULT key attributes. and tray_part tables. Reporting. 2.

Equipment Pointer Keys You will identify the key for equipment pointers through the Raceway Defaults form. Text annotation overrides any default values. Text annotation overrides any default values. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all RCPs unless you override the key during annotation for an individual RCP. C: EE Databases 431 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Reference Schema . Text annotation overrides any default values.General Description Raceway Connect Point Keys You will identify the key for RCPs through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all drop points unless you override the key during annotation for an individual drop point. Drop Point Keys You will identify the key for drop points through the Raceway Defaults form. The key you specify will serve as the default key for all equipment pointers unless you override the key during annotation for an individual equipment pointer.

fitting._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You must be familiar with the codelist tables that follow.not approved 432 .approved 5 . COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION approval status index number approval status description The approval status rows delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 index_value 1 .approved 8 .approved 10 .February 2003 Codelists Codelists are tables in the reference database which contain all available values for a particular column of a table in the project database. Only values in the reference database codelist tables are loaded into the project database.approved 6 . For example. the reference database codelists are matched to the annotated values. During loads of the project database.approved 9 . and one_line tables in the project database.approved 7 . You can add new approval status rows to this table. the codelist table ol_type in the reference database will contain all possible values that can be loaded into the column ol_type in the straight.approved 4 . The system issues you a warning if an annotated value does not match a value in the codelist.approved 11 . but you must not remove any of the existing rows.blank 2 .approved 3 . Approval Status Codelist Table The approv_status codelist table defines the available approval status values.

The ee_rcp_ol_type column contains the index_column value for the one-line type to which the RCP is assigned. The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove to this table. The table also contains the ee_part_table column which itself contains the mscatalog number of the table holding the part information. 433 . COLUMN_NAME ee_car_num ee_cardinal TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION cardinal index number cardinal description The cardinal point values delivered with EE Raceway are: ee_car_num 0 1 2 6 7 8 12 13 14 ee_cardinal TOP LEFT CENTER LEFT BOTTOM LEFT TOP CENTER CENTER CENTER BOTTOM CENTER TOP RIGHT CENTER RIGHT BOTTOM RIGHT C: EE Databases Drawing Type Codelist Table The drawing_type codelist table defines the available drawing types._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Cardinal Codelist Table The cardinal codelist table defines the available cardinal point routing justification locations. but you must not remove the existing row. You can add new drawing types to this table. COLUMN_NAME code unknown TYPE Char(20) unknown DESCRIPTION drawing type unknown The drawing type delivered with EE Raceway is: code RACEWAY Manual Fitting Part Codelist Table The manual_part codelist table defines the manually-placed special fittings available with the product. which is an integer value that the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table also contains the ee_spec.February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_part_table ee_rcp_ol_type ee_manpart_type TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer DESCRIPTION manual_part index number manual_part description special fitting parts table number one-line type index column number manual part type index number The special manual fittings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 index_value conduit body pullbox light fixture ee_part_table 246 249 250 ee_rcp_ol_type 3 3 3 ee_manpart_type 0 0 1 One-Line Type Codelist Table The ol_type table defines the one-line types that are available in a raceway project. ee_part. The table contains the index_column column._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_ol. The ee_priority_level column defines the routing priority for each one-line type. and ee_rcp_part tables which define the tables containing specification information for each one-line type. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value ee_spec_table ee_part_table ee_ol_table ee_rcp_part_table ee_max_run_angle ee_priority_level TYPE integer char(20) integer integer integer integer integer integer DESCRIPTION one-line type index number one-line type description specification table mscatalog number spec parts table mscatalog number one-line table mscatalog number special fitting parts table number maximum bends allowed per run one-line type nest level The one-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: indx_col 1 2 3 4 5 index_value TRAY WIREWAY CONDUIT AIRWAY DUCTBANK ee_spec 240 242 244 247 260 ee_part 241 243 245 248 0 ee_ol 204 204 204 204 204 rcp_part 0 0 246 0 0 run_angle 0 0 360 0 0 priority 5 5 10 10 7 434 .

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The rcp_type table contains the index_column column. You can add. remove. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION rcp type index number rcp type description The RCP types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value <blank> ROUTE description general raceway connect point raceway connect point and route point System Codelist Table C: EE Databases The ee_system table must be loaded in the reference database before you can create any raceway design files. or update any of the systems delivered with EE Raceway. nor should you modify the index_column values. COLUMN_NAME system_num system_name TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION system index number system name 435 ._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists RCP Type Codelist Table This table defines how the EE Raceway software uses RCPs (Raceway Connect Points). The system table contains the system_num column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a system name. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from this table.

which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line type index number three-line type description The three-line types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 11 12 14 index_value STRAIGHT ELBOW WYE CROSS PULLBOX CONDUIT BODY DROPOUT 436 . The table contains the index_column column. You must not add or remove rows from the table.February 2003 The systems delivered with EE Raceway are: system_num 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 system_name Control Communication High Voltage Low Voltage Alarm Instrumentation Signal Digital Analog Thermocouple RTD Medium Voltage Normal Lighting Emergency Lighting Security Fire Safety DC Power Control and Signal Three-Line Type Codelist Table The tl_type table defines the three-line types that are available with the EE Raceway product. nor should you modify the index_column values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . You can modify the index_value values.

nor should you modify the index_column values._ _______________ Appendix C: Codelists Three_Line Subtype Codelist Table The tl_subtype table further defines the available three-line types. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from the table. nor should you modify the index_column values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line qualifier index number three-line qualifier description 437 . You can modify the index_value values. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION three-line subtype index number three-line subtype description The three-line subtypes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 index_value <blank> VERTICAL INSIDE VERTICAL OUTSIDE VERTICAL HORIZONTAL LEFT HORIZONTAL RIGHT HORIZONTAL REDUCER LEFT REDUCER RIGHT REDUCER C: EE Databases Three-Line Qualifier Codelist Table The tl_qual table further defines the three-line types. You must not add or remove rows from the table. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The table contains the index_column column. The table contains the index_column column. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value.

The vendor table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value catalog TYPE integer char(20) char(20) DESCRIPTION vendor index number vendor name catalog 438 . but do not remove the rows delivered with the product. which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You can modify the index_value values. You must not add or remove rows from this table. You can add vendors as necessary to this table.February 2003 The three-line qualifiers delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 5 index_value <blank> RIGID BENDABLE FLEXIBLE ADJUSTABLE Units Codelist Table This table (ee_unit) defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. nor should you modify the index_column values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . which is an integer value the software uses to uniquely identify a vendor name. The unit table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION units index number units description The units delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 index_value English Metric Vendor Codelist Table You must have a vendor in the vendor codelist table before loading any specification tables in the database.

The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable code index value wire/cable code description C: EE Databases The wire/cable codes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX index_value AC AD AG AH AM AN AP AR AS CP CQ CV CW CX 439 ._ _______________ Appendix C: The vendors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 1 2 3 4 index_value default sample unknown English sample catalog delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank delivered blank Codelists Wire/Cable Code Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_code) defines the wire/cable code that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable codes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table code column. You may add or remove rows from this table. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. The wire/cable code table contains the index_column column.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable configurations represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table config column. The wire/cable configuration table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable configuration index value wire/cable configuration description The wire/cable configurations delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column \C PR TR index_value single conductor "pair 2 conductors "triad" 3 conductors Wire/Cable Size Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_size) defines the wire/cable size that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable sizes represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table cable_size column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. You may add or remove rows from this table. The wire/cable size table contains the index_column column. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable size index value wire/cable size description The wire/cable sizes delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG index_value 36 AWG 34 AWG 32 AWG 30 AWG 28 AWG 27 AWG 440 .February 2003 Wire/Cable Configuration Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_config) defines the wire/cable configuration that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table.

The wire/cable insulation color table contains the index_column column. 441 . the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation colors represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table color column. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. You may add or remove rows from this table._ _______________ Appendix C: 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 20 AWG 18 AWG 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 3 AWG 2 AWG 1 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 3/0 AWG 4/0 AWG 250 MCM 300 MCM 350 MCM 400 MCM 500 MCM 600 MCM 700 MCM 750 MCM 800 MCM 900 MCM 1000 MCM 1250 MCM 1500 MCM 1750 MCM 2000 MCM Codelists C: EE Databases Wire/Cable Color Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_color) defines the wire/cable insulation color that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(20) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation color index value wire/cable insulation color description The wire/cable insulation colors delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column BLK W R GR ORN BL W/BLK R/BLK GR/BLK ORN/BLK BL/BLK BLK/W R/W GR/W BL/W BLK/R W/R ORN/R BL/R R/GR ORN/GR BLK/W/R W/BLK/R R/BLK/W GR/BLK/W ORN/BLK/W BL/BLK/W BLK/R/GR W/R/GR R/BLK/GR GR/BLK/ORN ORN/BLK/GR BL/W/ORN BLK/W/ORN W/R/ORN ORN/W/BL W/R/BL BLK/W/GR W/BLK/GR R/W/GR GR/W/BL ORN/R/GR index_value BLACK WHITE RED GREEN ORANGE BLUE WHITE/BLACK RED/BLACK GREEN/BLACK ORANGE/BLACK BLUE/BLACK BLACK/WHITE RED/WHITE GREEN/WHITE BLUE/WHITE BLACK/RED WHITE/RED ORANGE/RED BLUE/RED RED/GREEN ORANGE/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/RED WHITE/BLACK/RED RED/BLACK/WHITE GREEN/BLACK/WHITE ORANGE/BLACK/WHITE BLUE/BLACK/WHITE BLACK/RED/GREEN WHITE/RED/GREEN RED/BLACK/GREEN GREEN/BLACK/ORANGE ORANGE/BLACK/GREEN BLUE/WHITE/ORANGE BLACK/WHITE/ORANGE WHITE/RED/ORANGE ORANGE/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/RED/BLUE BLACK/WHITE/GREEN WHITE/BLACK/GREEN RED/WHITE/GREEN GREEN/WHITE/BLUE ORANGE/RED/GREEN 442 .

3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry._ _______________ Appendix C: BL/R/GR BLK/W/BL W/BLK/BL R/W/BL GR/ORN/R GR/R/BL BL/R/ORN BLK/ORN/R BRN Y BLUE/RED/GREEN BLACK/WHITE/BLUE WHITE/BLACK/BLUE RED/WHITE/BLUE GREEN/ORANGE/RED GREEN/RED/BLUE BLUE/RED/ORANGE BLACK/ORANGE/RED BROWN YELLOW Codelists Wire/Cable Voltage Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_volt) defines the wire/cable insulation voltage rating that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. The wire/cable insulation voltage rating table contains the index_column column. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Low (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation voltage ratings represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table voltage column. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. C: EE Databases COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(40) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation voltage rating index value wire/cable insulation voltage rating description The wire/cable voltage ratings delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 120 120/240 208Y/120 240/120 240 480Y/277 480 600 2400 4160Y/2400 4160 4800 6900 8320Y/4800 12000Y/6930 12470Y/7200 13200Y/7620 13200 13800Y/7970 index_value Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 2 wire system) Low (Single phase. 4 wire system) 443 . 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 4 wire system) Low (Three phase.

4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. cotton braid) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (AVL-lead sheath) Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (Glass braid Asbestos or other Suitable braid material) Magnesium Oxide (Copper) Flame-. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. non-metallic covering) Thermo-plastic (Flame-retardant. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. The index_value provides a more complete description of the entry. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. flame.non-metallic covering) Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant.and Oil-Resistant Thermoplastic Perfluoroalkoxy Perfluoroalkoxy Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant. which is an abbreviated value the software uses to uniquely identify an index value. flame-non-metallic covering) Silicone Rubber (Asbestos. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase. Moisture-.February 2003 13800 20780Y/12000 22860Y/13200 23000 24940Y/14400 34500Y/19920 34500 46000 69000 Medium (Three phase.and Heat-Resistant Rubber (Moisture-resistant.non-metallic covering) Moisture. 3 wire system) Wire/Cable Insulation Type Codelist Table This table (ee_pcbl_insul) defines the wire/cable insulation type that are used for selecting a Wire/Cable during the EERWAY command CONDUIT SIZING. Heat. non-metallic covering) 444 . flame. You may add or remove rows from this table. 4 wire system) Medium (Three phase. glass or other suitable braid material) Heat-Resistant Rubber Thermo-plastic and Asbestos (Flame-retardant. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE char(20) not null char(100) DESCRIPTION wire/cable insulation type index value wire/cable insulation type description The wire/cable insulation types delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column A AA AI AIA A VA AVB AVL FEP FEPB MI MTW PFA PFAH RH RHH RHW SA SIS TA TBS index_value Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Asbestos (Without asbestos braid) Impregnated Asbestos (With suitable braid material) Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric Impregnated Asbestos & Varnished Cambric (Flame retardant. The wire/cable insulation type table contains the index_column column. the values of the index_column should include all the wire/cable insulation types represented in the data of the Wire/Cable (ee_pseudo_cable) table insulation column. 3 wire system) Medium (Three phase._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Moisture-Resistant. Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-. (Moisture-) & Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-. Moisture. Moisture.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic Flame-._ _______________ Appendix C: TFE THHN THHN/THWN THW THWN TW UF USE V XHHN Z Extruded Polytetra-fluoro-ethylene Flame-.and Heat-Resistant (Integral with insulation) Heat. COLUMN_NAME index_column index_value TYPE integer char(20) DESCRIPTION yes-no response index number yes-no response description C: EE Databases The Yes-No values delivered with EE Raceway are: index_column 0 1 index_value NO Yes 445 . You must not add or remove rows from this table.& Heat-Resistant Thermoplastic (Nylon jacket or equivalent) Flame-Retardant.and Moisture-Resistant (Moisture-resistant non-metallic covering) Varnished Cambric (Nonmetallic covering or lead sheath) Flame-Retardant Cross-Linked Synthetic Polymer Modified Ethylene Tetrafluoro-ethylene Codelists Yes-No Codelist Table The ee_yes_no codelist table defines the available positive and negative user responses. Moisture. Moisture.

February 2003 Fitting Environment Rules The fitting environment rules are the rules stored in the reference database table tl_fit_env that control the Place Fitting by Rule commands. the symbol in the part table stored will be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line.180. fitting mscatalog table number fitting EDEN symbol name The fitting environment rules delivered with EE Raceway are: olt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 tlt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlst 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 tlq 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 nol 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 pln 180 90 90. zero if not applicable number of intersecting one-lines planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. The software compares the one-line environment at an RCP in the design file with the rules stored in this table to determine which fitting to place at the RCP. the one-line type.180 90.180 90 90. compares the number of intersection one-lines. non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines.180.270 prp 90 90 90 tbl 246 246 246 246 246 246 246 sym CC CLB CT CGUAM CX CGUAW CEABY 446 . remove. at least.270 90._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . or update any of the rules delivered with EE Raceway. The software. Angles must be defined relative to a single one-line. You can add. and the angles between the intersectin one-lines with the rules in the fitting environment table to find a match. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line qualifier number. zero if not applicable intersecting one-line’s three-line subtype number. If found. COLUMN_NAME ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol TYPE integer integer integer integer integer char(40) char(40) integer char(6) DESCRIPTION intersecting one-line’s one-line type number intersecting one-line’s three-line type number.

_ _______________ Appendix C: Fitting Environment Rules Intersecting Conduit One-lines Planar Angles = 90. 270 Non-Planar Angle = 90 C: EE Databases 447 . 180.

and three-lines. Default and specification information is copied from the reference schema into the project schema when you run Load Database. 448 . The schema stores information associated with the elements in each drawing. its one-lines._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Project Schema . RCPs.General Description The project schema contains information about the drawings that are part of a particular project.

The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. load with EE tables and default data) a schema. Updating Reference Schemas Update the reference schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. The sql file contains the commands used to create tables. If you select multiple applications. not a database name. The following fields accept your input for the Update schema process: Schema name This field accepts the name of the RIS schema to be updated. Updating a Project Schema Update the project schema from the Database Utilities menu in the Electrical Engineer environment. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. No paths are required. you must create the schemas using one of the currently-supported RDBMS’s (INFORMIX. These fields require a full path to the files. you must use the schema creation form in RIS Schema Manager to create a valid RIS schema on the database. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. then Update project schema runs each application sequentially against the database._ _______________ Appendix C: Updating Schemas Updating Schemas Before you can update (that is. Given the schema name. since this is a schema name. Given the schema name. Sql and Cmd Files 449 . using the Update reference schema option. Additionally. No paths are required. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. using the Update project schema option. C: EE Databases Sql and Cmd Files Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. RIS will know where the appropriate database is located. ORACLE. views. Schema password This field accepts the name of the password for the specified schema. INGRES). if one exists. since this is a schema name. if one exists. and to grant permissions within the schema. not a database name.

The sql file contains the commands used to create tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . If you select multiple applications. then Update reference schema runs each application sequentially against the database.February 2003 Accept the names of the sql and cmd (command) files associated with each application. you can override the default by exporting the $EE_SCHEMA variable in your $HOME/. you should use the same name as your project.EErc file to be your project schema name. and to grant permissions within the schema. The application checkboxes to the left of these fields allow you to specify which EE product(s) are supplying the sql and cmd files to the process. while the command file loads the schema tables with default data. These fields require a full path to the files. since this will be the default name when you enter the project. However. Schema Names When creating your RIS schemas. 450 . views.

for example). then any row containing data which exceeds the new character limit will be lost. The new table will have only those columns specified in the "create table" statement in the table definition. Saves rows from existing table. the unique index prevents the entry of duplicate information when updating any EE application. The SQL statements in the . C: EE Databases If rows exist in the updated table. simply include the necessary changes in the . When this process finds a "create table" statement for a table that exists in the schema.sql file._ _______________ Appendix C: Modifying the Reference Schema Modifying the Reference Schema You can customize the database schema before creating a schema or after the schema exists. 5. The . They must also be changed appropriately in the MSCATALOG table in order for the software to run properly. To modify the database schema before schema creation. You lose any columns and column information that you have not specified in the "create table" statement. Columns that you added into an existing loaded table would have no data stored in them. but changing from "char" to "integer" is dangerous and an illegal conversion can occur.sql" file. columns are added into the .sql file is a series of SQL statements recognized by RIS to create your database An existing database schema can also be modified. you need only to modify the ".sql file before Update schema is executed. 451 . Table names can be changed except for table names that begin with the letters "ms" and "ee_". these columns will be added into the existing rows of the existing one_line table. the following actions take place: 1.unl file will always be loaded into a table which has a unique index. The removed column in such a case will lose its data and the added column will be blank. from "char(10)" to "char(200)" or "smallint" to "integer". Therefore. 3. Any duplicate rows will be counted and ignored. then the .sql file for the one_line table. The following is a list of schema modification rules for Update Schema to keep in mind. 3. for example. Renaming of a column is processed by removing the column and adding another. The .sql" file in order to modify a schema. If you had used the RDBMS to alter the table by adding a column and then run Update schema without making the appropriate change to the ". If a table does not have a unique index. Creates new table according to "create table" statement. For example. 4. 2. columns can be added or removed from an existing schema according to the "create table" statements in the . If you modify a character column to make it smaller (resizing char(20) to be char(10).unl file will be loaded only if the table is empty. 1.sql file are the input to the Update schema process. Keep in mind that the columns within the tables in the reference schema must be a subset of the columns of the corresponding tables in the project schema. Loads new table with saved row information for column names that were in previous definition. you would lose any data that may have been on that column. 2. 4. The table definitions that exist in this file determine how the tables will look when complete. Therefore. Drops existing table (also drops indexes). You can modify the size of a column. any new columns that are added will be blank in each row.

INSERT INTO ol_type.unl files into the database. DB Access’s Database Edit Utility (see the section in the appendix entitled EE Manager for more information on this utility) the EE Database Utilities (risschema_mgr utility – win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\rismgr. Edit the desired . The following is a typical example of what can be contained in this file: FILE "olt. the RDBMS’s interactive query product. 4. 2. — OR — You can modify the rows in the created schema through 1. or ORACLE’s sqlplus. Use caution when editing these files since they are in a format for loading sequentially into a table. 3. All existing .unl). and codelist values.unl file.sql file as being non-null which means the data entered from the . look at the command (.unl files must be loaded for proper product execution.g.exe). Certain columns are defined in the . The Update schema process initiates the command file which automatically finds and loads the information in the . There are two ways to modify existing rows in the reference schema. It tells the process that the "|" character separates each column of data in the olt.unl files are being loaded into the reference database. In this case the "olt. Each line represents a row to be inserted into the database and each field represents the corresponding column in the database. The delimiter is one character long.unl" file might look like: 1|TRAY|240|241|204|0|0|1| 452 .unl file must not be null for that column.unl file making sure the delimiter "|" is used between each field. The following is an example of what a line in the "olt. FILE win32app\ingr\eerway\db\olt.February 2003 The databases are initially loaded with the *. or INGRES’s SQL. part data. To see which .cmd) file you will be using. the RIS Interactive Query Utility (win32app\ingr\share\ris\bin\risgui.unl files from being loaded. such as INFORMIX’s ISQL or FORMS. Do not remove any lines from this file that would effect the current .unl files can be modified before the schema is updated._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . These files can be edited by the system manager to include additional defaults.unl" file will exist in the current directory but a full path name can be specified on this file (e.unl files as defined in the command file.unl" is to be inserted into the ol_type table. These lines tell the update schema process that the file "olt. The following steps can be used as a guideline for modifying the reference schema before it is updated: 1.exe) 2. The .unl" DELIMITER "|".

When you have finished editing the . "1" is the index_column value. 453 . naming it catalog. INSERT INTO tray_spec. separating each column of data with a pipe symbol (|). Insert the following lines into this file: FILE "catalog. The following example demonstrates how to load a new . cd win32app\ingr\eerway\db Edit the command file rwayref. "240" is the ee_spec_table column. If in the "olt._ _______________ Appendix C: In this example. 1. "TRAY" is the index_value column value. 2. you can edit this file.unl.unl" file you would like to add additional entries. run the Update reference schema process to load the specification information into the tray_spec table. Make sure you line up the delimited fields with the tables’ columns. 3. Create a new file in the current directory.cmd.unl" DELIMITER "|". Edit this file to include any tray specification information you want to load into the reference database.unl file. For example: Modifying the Reference Schema 1|1|4|18|18|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0418SHV|4x18 VENTRIB SHV| 1|1|4|24|24|0|0|12|10|STEEL|A|0424SHV|4x24 VENTRIB SHV| C: EE Databases 4.unl file containing your own specification information into the reference database. etc.

February 2003 EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway reference database schema. not approved. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. approv_status This codelist table defines the available approval status values: blank. away_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available approved status. Column Name index_column index_value Type integer Char(20) Index no no Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an approved status description. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and so forth. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. approved. See the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". 454 . and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table.

this column is the key to the row in the other airway specification. Column Name ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer real real real real real Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes no yes C: EE Databases ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_out_width: the column used to define the airway outside width to the EE raceway software.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_angle: the column used to define the airway fitting bend angle. EE Raceway uses airways to reserve space for the routing of cable or other raceway material. ee_extension: the column used to define the airway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the airway outside diameter or height to the EE raceway software. and also to maintain connectivity to a raceway system. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate airway specification table row containing general specification information. 455 . ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_transition: the column used to define the airway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_symbol: the column used to define the airway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. away_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type AIRWAY. ee_radius: the column used to define the airway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_spec2_key: if the current airway part is a reducer. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

ee_cardinal: the column that contains the name of each available cardinal point. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. cardinal This codelist table defines the available cardinal point locations (top left. center left. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. and so forth). or C.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the airway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. bottom left. Column Name ee_car_num ee_cardinal Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes ee_car_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a cardinal point description. The only valid entries are: A. B. 456 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The associated shapes are shown below.

ee_part: the column used to define the conduit body part number. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. material: the column used to define the conduit body material. 457 . nominal_size_2: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. weight: the column used to define the conduit body weight. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit body part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size_1 nominal_size_2 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_dimension_3* ee_dimension_4* ee_dimension_5* ee_dimension_6* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type* volume style ee_pull_point C: EE Databases vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit body special fitting. nominal_size_1: the column used to define a conduit body nominal size. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) real real real real real real Char( 28) Char( 40) integer real Char( 20) integer Index dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_body This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting CONDUIT BODY. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.

458 . ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. then the conduit is marked as being overfilled. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. for example NEC 1990. style:the column used to describe the conduit body style or type. Column Name ee_rule_set ee_jacket_armor ee_num_cables ee_max_fill Type Char( 20) Char( 10) integer real Index no no no no Null yes yes no yes ee_rule_set: identification of the rule set that applies to the raceway system fill calculations. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define the conduit body as a cable pull point. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_jacket_armor: material type of the cable outer jacket armor.February 2003 ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a conduit body dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. If the cables contained in a conduit exceed the maximum allowable conduit fill._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_num_cables: number of cables in the conduit. ee_max_fill: maximum allowable percent fill. This calculation assumes a homogeneous mixture of either all LEAD or all NON-LEAD armor types for the cable outer jackets for the cables routed within the same conduit. cond_fill_calc This table is used to specify the maximum allowable percent fill of a conduit based on the armor type of the cable outer jackets and number of cables within the conduit. volume: the column used to define a conduit body volume.

Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description cond_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. C: EE Databases 459 . ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_angle: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend angle. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate conduit specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current conduit part is a reducer. this column is the key to the row in the other conduit specification. ee_part: the column used to define the conduit part number. ee_weight: the column used to define the conduit part weight. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. ee_symbol: the column used to define the conduit part EDEN symbol name to the EE software.

material: the column used to define the conduit material. ee_transition: the column used to define the conduit fitting transition length to the EE raceway software.February 2003 cond_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type CONDUIT. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. weight: the column used to define the conduit weight per unit length. ee_radius: the column used to define the conduit fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. Column Name vendor ee_units* nominal_size ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the conduit specification. 460 . ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the conduit outside diameter to the EE raceway software. ee_extension: the column used to define the conduit fitting extension length to the EE raceway software._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

or C. The only valid entries are: A. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. code_desc: the column that contains the description of each available drawing type.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the conduit cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. sheet: the column used to define the EE drawing sheet name. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. drawing_type This codelist table defines what drawing types are available for use. 461 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. B. Column Name drawing_type* sheet* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null no yes no yes C: EE Databases drawing_type: the column used to define the EE product drawing type. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. drawing This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for title blocks and their default column values. The associated shapes are shown below. Column Name ee_code code_desc Type Char(20) Char(20) Index uniq no Null no yes ee_code: the column used by the software to uniquely identify a drawing type description.

Column Name tag ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char(20) real real Char(28) Char(40) Index no no no unique no Null yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the drop point tag. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the ductbank outside height to the EE Raceway software.February 2003 drop_point This table defines both the columns you can annotate for drop point symbols and their default column values. ee_out_width: the column used to define the ductbank outside width to the EE Raceway software. 462 . ee_dist_to_rcp: the column used to define the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . duct_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type DUCTBANK. material: the column used to define the ductbank material. ee_dist_down_ol: the column used to define the distance along the one-line to the drop point. Column Name ee_units ee_out_ht_diam ee_out_width material ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description Type integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no dups dups no no uniq no Null no no yes yes yes no yes ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement.

ee_area: the column used to define the cross sectional area of the conduit of the given nominal size. 463 . column_name: the column within table_name that cannot be posted back to the graphics. The associated shapes are shown below. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The only valid entries are: A. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a conduit dimension value that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. B. ee_cond_x_area This table stores the cross sectional area of conduit identified by its nominal size. ee_graphic_only EE applications use this table to define which columns in the project database cannot be posted back to graphics through the Post Attribute process. Column Name table_name column_name Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Index uniq uniq Null yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column that cannot be posted. Column Name nominal_size ee_dimension_1 ee_area Type real real real Index uniq no no Null no yes yes C: EE Databases nominal_size: the column used to define a conduit nominal size that corresponds to the same column in the cond_spec table. or C.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the ductbank cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation.

ee_pcbl_color This codelist table defines the colors that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_code description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_config. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_code. ee_pcbl_config This codelist table defines the cable configurations that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_config description. 464 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table.February 2003 ee_pcbl_code This codelist table defines the codes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EERWAY Conduit Sizing command. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_color description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_color color.

465 . Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_volt description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_insul. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_size. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes C: EE Databases index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_pcbl_size description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_pcbl_volt. ee_pcbl_volt This codelisted table defines the cable/wire voltage ratings that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_pcbl_insul This codelist table defines the insulation types that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column index_value Type Char( 20) Char(100) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an abbreviated value used by the software to uniquely identify an eepcbl_insul description. ee_pcbl_size This codelist table defines the cable/wire sizes that are used in the ee_pseudo_cable table for the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command.

Type Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) real integer Index no no no no no no uniq no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no ee_system This codelist table defines the systems that are available to contain EE Raceway graphics. cable_size: the size of the wire/cable. config: the cable configuration of the cable. system_name: the column that contains the name of each available system. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. item_no: the unique identifier for each wire/cable. voltage: the insulation voltage rating of the wire/cable. Column Name system_num system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes system_num: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a system name. insulation: the insulation type of the wire/cable. ee_color: the insulation color of the wire/cable. 466 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the cable/wires that are used in the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. Column Name ee_code config cable_size ee_color voltage insulation item_no ee_area ee_units ee_code: the cable code of the cable. ee_area: the cross sectional area of the wire/cable.

a row will be loaded into the appropriate table for each graphic element. If not. ee_unique EE applications use this table to define which columns make a row in a table unique for single data entry. If a table is not represented in the ee_unique table. Column Name table_name column_name ee_comp_type* blank_allowed Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 10) integer Index uniq uniq uniq no Null yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases table_name: the name of the table that requires single data entry. column_name: the name of the column in table_name that makes an entry unique. In some entries. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify the ’yes/no’ response. 467 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ee_unit.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_units This codelist table defines the units that are used for one-line dimension values. this column is used to further describe what would make an entry unique. blank_allowed: is used to define whether or not the column in column_name is allowed to be blank. Column Name index_column* index_value* index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ee_unit description. Multiple rows in the database could contain the same table name if multiple columns are required to make an entry unique. ee_comp_type: is used by the EE processors to define what product will use the entry. then a blank column value would cause the EE processes to create a new row in the database. where the information crosses products. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in this appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_yes_no This codelist table defines the possible column values for a ’yes/no’ question in a table column.

February 2003 index_value: the column that contains the ’yes/no’ column value. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. envelope This table defines both the columns you can annotate for space envelopes and their default column values. 468 . Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes tag: the column used to define the space envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. EE Raceway uses space envelopes to reserve blocks of space for raceway without maintaining connectivity to any raceway system._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

voltage: the column used to define the light fixture’s voltage. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. 469 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 6) integer real real real Char( 28) real real real real Char( 40) Char( 3) real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 4) integer real Char( 6) integer Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer integer Index no no no no no uniq no no no no no no no no no no dups no no no no no no no no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description light_fixture This table stores the specification information for the manually placed equipment LIGHT_FIXTURE. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_3: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_part_key: the unique key to appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_symbol voltage ee_dimension_1 ee_dimension_2 ee_dimension_3 ee_part_key fl_amps ee_dimension_4 ee_dimension_5 ee_dimension_6 ee_description item_type ee_dimension_7 ee_dimension_8 ee_dimension_9 item_code_num vendor num_wires num_phase_wires power_factor area_class oper_temp_deg_c text_1 text_2 text_3 text_4 ee_units ee_pull_point C: EE Databases ee_symbol: the column used to define the light fixture EDEN symbol name to the EE software.

num_phase_wires: the column used to define the number of phase wires in a light fixture. 470 . ee_dimension_7: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_dimension_6: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.February 2003 fl_amps: the column used to define a light fixture’s full load amps. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. text_2: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the equipment light fixture. ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a light fixture as a cable pull point. ee_dimension_4: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key item_type: the column used to define a light fixture’s item type. area_class: the column used to define a light fixture’s area class. text_1: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dimension_8: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. oper_temp_deg_c: the column used to define a light fixture’s operating temperature. ee_dimension_9: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports. num_wires: the column used to define the number of wires in a light fixture. item_code_num: the column used to define a light fixture’s item code number. power_factor: the column used to define a light fixture’s power factor. text_3: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. text_4: the column used to describe characteristics about the light fixture. ee_dimension_5: the column used to define a light fixture dimension value to EDEN and the raceway reports.

pullbox). It must exactly match the name of the desired table. This table holds the entity numbers for all other tables in the database. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char( 64) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no Null no yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description manual_part This codelist table defines the available manually-placed special fittings (conduit body. there will be one row in mscatalog for each database table that is linked to graphic elements. Any table not directly linked to graphics/EE elements does not need to appear in mscatalog. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available manual_part. Both DBAccess and RISRPT (RIS Report Writer) use this table. C: EE Databases ee_manpart_type: the column used to tell the load processor to load the manual part into either the project database "fitting" table or the "panel" table. In general. 471 . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_part_table* ee_rcp_ol_type* ee_manpart_type index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a manual_part description. mscatalog Microstation 32 requires that every database used in graphics contain a table called mscatalog. ee_rcp_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table for the EE raceway connect point of the special fitting. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information.

EE places the entity number in the EE header linkage of annotation in order to identify which table the text is linked to. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and DBAccess all support this table. mscodelist This table provides limited support for DMRS-like codelists. sqlreview: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. column_name: the column within table_name which contains codelist values. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns.February 2003 entitynum: the entity number assigned to a table. Column Name table_name column_name join_table code_column text_column index_column* index_value* Type Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) Char( 32) integer Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no no no yes yes table_name: the name of the desired table containing a column with codelist values. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table. The codelist approach minimizes storage requirements and simplifies database administration. dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. 472 . It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. A codelist is a data structure that represents a character string which is then represented in the database by integer or character codes. The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. MicroStation 32. The MicroStation 32 database interface places the entity number of a table in the linkage it creates between a graphics element and a table row. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. RISRPT. EE uses this table to restrict input for a particular column to a pre-defined set of values.

will impose additional conditions to allow multiple codelists to be represented in the same database table.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description join_table: the codelist table. A column that does not exist as annotation linked to a graphics/EE element does not need to appear in mscolumns. the work_mode value is set to zero. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table. In general. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. code_column: the column in join_table that contains the code values. The order in which attributes appear on the annotation form is determined by the value in the column ee_column_order. Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. This column can be thought of as a filter which restricts the display of certain attributes depending on the mode of work the user is performing. index_value: the column that provides the index to a specific list within a multiple codelist table. if not NULL. 473 . text_column: the column that contains the actual values represented by the corresponding code value in code_column. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. EE uses the mscolumns information to control display of column information during annotation. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. index_column: a column name that. there is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table (for those attributes that exist in annotation). mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by the EE software. It must exactly match the column name in the database. C: EE Databases Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order Type integer integer Char( 32) Char( 32) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. column_name: the name of a column in the database.

Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. 474 . This value is used to determine whether one one-line type can break or attach to another one-line type. ee_rcp_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing special fitting part specification information._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_priority_level: an integer value used to define the routing priority level of the one-line type.February 2003 ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order in which to display attributes on the annotation form. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the part specification information. ee_max_run_angle: an integer containing the maximum allowed value of the sum of all bend angles in a run. Column Name index_column* index_value* ee_spec_table* ee_part_table* ee_ol_table* ee_rcp_part_table* ee_max_run_angle* ee_priority_level* Type integer Char( 20) integer integer integer integer integer integer Index uniq dups no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify an ol_type description. ee_spec_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general specification information. and so forth). A value of zero states that the sum of all bend angles in a run is unlimited. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available ol_type. ol_type This codelist table defines the available one-line types (tray. wireway. conduit. ee_ol_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing general one-line information.

panel This table defines both the columns you can annotate for panels/equipment and their default column values. 475 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 20) real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes no no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description one_line This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway one-lines and their default column values. panel_descrip: the column which defines the panel/equipment description. Column Name panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_key ee_description Type Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 40) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes panel: the column which defines the panel/equipment name. ee_approv_status: the codelisted column used to define the approval status. add_weight: the column used to define an additional weight per unit length. Column Name tag add_weight ee_ol_length* ee_spec_key* ee_key* ee_description* tag: the column used to define the one-line tag. ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the general specification information on the three-line elements. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_ol_length: the column used to define the weight per unit length. C: EE Databases ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 476 . ee_last_rev_dat: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. location: this column contains the location. ee_create_date: the column used to define the date the panel/equipment was created. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key project This table stores information for the project. prj_name: this column contains the project name. ee_key: this column contains the EE Reference database key. Column Name prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set ee_key ee_description Type char(20) char(60) char(60) char(20) char(20) char(28) char(60) Index dups no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes no yes prj_number: this column contains the project number. ee_description:this column contains the key description.February 2003 ee_approv_date: the column used to define the date the approval status was changed. prj_rule_set: this column contains the project rule set. base_rule_set: this column contains the base rule set.

ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define the pullbox dimension value to Eden and the raceway reports. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. C: EE Databases 477 . ee_symbol: the column used to define the pullbox part Eden symbol name to the EE software. material: the column used to define the pullbox weight material. ee_out_width: the column used to define the pullbox outside width to the EERWAY software . ee_pull_point: the codelisted column used to define a pullbox as a cable pull point. ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the pullbox outside height to the EERWAY software. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the untis of measurement. weight: the column used to define the pullbox weight. ee_part: the column used to define the pullbox part number. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1 weight material ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_part_key* ee_description ee_tl_type ee_pull_point vendor: the codelisted column used to define the pullbox vendor.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real char(20) char(20) char(6) char(28) char(40) integer integer Index dups no dups dups dups no no no no uniq no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description pullbox This table stores the specification information for the manual fitting PULLBOX.

Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a rcp_type description. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available rcp_type. ee_rcp_type: the codelisted column used to define the raceway connect point type. Column Name tag ee_rcp_type* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* ee_part_key* ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) integer real real real Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes tag: the column used to define the raceway connect point tag. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the manually placed fitting. 478 . ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. ee_extension: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting extension length._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_radius: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting bend radius. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 rcp This table defines both the columns you can annotate for raceway connect points (RCPs) and their default column values. rcp_type This codelist table defines additional information about EE Raceway connect points (RCPs). ee_transition: the column used to define the raceway connect point fitting transition length.

ee_pln_angles: the column that contains the planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_part_table: an mscatalog number of the table containing the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line. C: EE Databases ee_tl_subtype: the index_column number from the three_line subtype codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. ee_symbol: the column used to define the fitting EDEN symbol name to the EE software. Column Name ee_ol_type ee_tl_type ee_tl_subtype ee_tl_qual ee_num_ols ee_pln_angles ee_prp_angles ee_part_table ee_symbol ee_ol_type: the index_column number from the one-line type codelist table of the intersecting onelines. Zero if no check is to be performed. ee_num_ols: the column that contains the number of intersecting one-lines. ee_prp_angles: the column that contains the non-planar angles between the intersecting one-lines. ee_tl_qual: the index_column number from the three_line qualifier codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. 479 . ee_tl_type: the index_column number from the three_line type codelist table of the fitting to be placed at the RCP. Angles must be defined relative from a single one-line.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer integer integer integer Char( 40) Char( 40) integer Char( 6) Index uniq no no no uniq uniq uniq no dups Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tl_fit_env This table is used by the manual fitting command to determine which fitting to place at an RCP based on the intersecting one-lines and the fitting environment rules listed in this table. Zero if no check is to be performed.

and so forth). reducer. and so forth). index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_type._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. bendable. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_subtype description. horizontal. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_type description.February 2003 tl_qual This codelist table defines additional information about the available three-line types (rigid. and so forth). flexible. tl_type This codelist table defines the available three-line types (straight. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_subtype. elbow. wye. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. Column Name index_column* index_value* Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a tl_qual description. tl_subtype This codelist table defines the available three-line subtypes (vertical. index_value: the column that contains the description of each available tl_qual. cross. 480 .

Column Name tag ee_key* ee_description* Type Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no uniq no Null yes no yes C: EE Databases tag: the column used to define the support pointer tag. ee_part_key: the key to the appropriate reference database record for the values on the equipment. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key. ee_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. Column Name ee_eqp_table ee_part_key ee_eqp_key* ee_description* ee_eqp_table: the name of the reference database table containing the equipment specification information. to_support symbols are not available with EE Raceway at the time of this printing. ee_eqp_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 481 .Appendix C: _ _______________ Type Char( 32) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no uniq no Null yes yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description to_equip This table defines both the columns that you can annotate for equipment pointer symbols and their default column values. to_support This table defines both the columns you can annotate for support equipment symbols and their default column values. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_key.

ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate tray specification table row containing general specification information. ee_spec2_key: if the current tray part is a reducer. ee_part: the column used to define the tray part number. ee_weight: the column used to define the tray part weight. this column is the key to the row in the other tray specification. ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_symbol: the column used to define the tray part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. ee_angle: the column used to define the tray fitting bend angle. 482 . Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values.February 2003 tray_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type TRAY. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key.

ee_out_width: the column used to define the tray outside width to the EE raceway software. ee_transition: the column used to define the tray fitting transition length to the EE raceway software.Appendix C: _ _______________ Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description tray_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type TRAY. weight: the column used to define the tray weight per unit length. ee_radius: the column used to define the tray fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software. ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the tray outside height to the EE raceway software. C: EE Databases 483 . material: the column used to define the tray material. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_extension: the column used to define the tray fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a tray dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the tray specification. ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The associated shapes are shown below. Column Name index_column* index_value* catalog Type integer Char( 20) char(20) Index uniq dups no Null no yes yea index_column: an integer value used by the software to uniquely identify a vendor name. vendor This codelist table defines the vendors that are available for specifications.February 2003 ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the tray cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. index_value: the column that contains the name of each available vendor. The only valid entries are: A. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle* ee_weight* ee_part* ee_symbol* ee_spec_key* ee_spec2_key* ee_part_key* ee_description* Type integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index no no no no no no no dups no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes ee_tl_type: the codelisted column used to define the three-line type. B. wway_part This table stores the part specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. Refer to the section entitled Codelists earlier in the appendix for a detailed description of this table. or C. catalog: the column that contains catalog information. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. 484 .

ee_symbol: the column used to define the wireway part EDEN symbol name to the EE software. ee_angle: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend angle. ee_part: the column used to define the wireway part number. Column Name vendor ee_units* ee_dimension_1* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_dimension_2* ee_out_width* ee_extension* ee_transition* ee_radius* weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell* ee_spec_key* ee_description Type integer integer real real real real real real real real Char( 20) integer Char( 6) Char( 28) Char( 40) Index dups no no dups no dups no no no no no no no uniq no Null no no yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes no yes vendor: the codelisted column used to define the vendor of the wireway specification. ee_part_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_tl_qual: the codelisted column used to define additional information about the three-line type. C: EE Databases wway_spec This table stores the general specification information for the one-line type WIREWAY. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_part_key. 485 . ee_spec_key: the key to the appropriate wireway specification table row containing general specification information. ee_dimension_1: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports.Appendix C: _ _______________ EE Raceway Reference Database Schema Description ee_tl_subtype: the codelisted column used to define the three-line subtype. ee_spec2_key: if the current wireway part is a reducer. ee_units: the codelisted column used to define the units of measurement. this column is the key to the row in the other wireway specification. ee_weight: the column used to define the wireway part weight.

ee_const_type: the column used to define construction type. ee_extension: the column used to define the wireway fitting extension length to the EE raceway software. B. 486 . ee_transition: the column used to define the wireway fitting transition length to the EE raceway software. ee_spec_key: the unique key to the appropriate reference database record for the default values. ee_radius: the column used to define the wireway fitting bend radius to the EE raceway software.February 2003 ee_out_ht_diam: the column used to define the wireway outside height to the EE raceway software. weight: the column used to define the wireway weight per unit length. material: the column used to define the wireway material. ee_xs_cell: the column used to define the wireway cross section graphic that is used during sketch propagation. ee_description: the description of the default values for each ee_spec_key. The associated shapes are shown below._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The only valid entries are: A. ee_dimension_2: the column used to define a wireway dimension value to eden and the raceway reports. ee_out_width: the column used to define the wireway outside width to the EE raceway software. or C.

numb_cables: the column containing the number of cables. and cable number ID. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_". cable_numb: the column containing the area number. cable number. numb_conductor: the column containing the number of conductors. cabsch_spec This table contains information about the cable schedule for underground cable design._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema. An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. 487 . and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. Column Name revision_numb cable_numb numb_cables numb_conductor conductor_size cable_type_code service_voltage undgrnd_length abvgrnd_length from_equi_numb from_detail not_used plan_assem_dwg to_equi_numb to_detail to_plan_drw_num cont_sta_type quan_term_kits ol_diagram_numb not_used2 remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 3) Char( 8) integer Char( 5) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 7) real real Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 15) Char( 8) Char( 20) Char( 4) Char( 6) Char( 20) Char( 8) Char( 38) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the revision number.

from_equi_numb: the column containing the From Equipment Number. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . not_used: this column is reserved for later use. cable_type_code: the column containing the cable type. undgrnd_length: the column containing the underground length. to_equi_numb: the column containing the To Equipment Number. not_used2: this column is reserved for later use. 488 . plan_assem_dwg: the column containing plan drawings or standard assembly drawing number. to_detail: the column containing the To Detail Number. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. drawing_numb can have duplicate values but the combination of drawing_numb and cable_numb should be unique. from_detail: the column containing the From Detail Number. cont_sta_type: the column containing the control station type. service_voltage: the column containing the service voltage. remarks: the column containing the remarks for cable schedule. quan_term_kits: the column containing the quantity of term. abvgrnd_length: the column containing the above ground length. drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.February 2003 conductor_size: the column containing the conductor size. to_plan_drw_num: the column containing the To Plan drawing number.

drawing_numb can have duplicate values. cnd_from_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit starts from. and so forth. but the combination of drawing_numb and conduit_numb should be unique. conduit number. conduit_numb: the column containing the area number. Column Name revision_numb conduit_numb conduit_for cnd_from_where cnd_to_where undgrnd_cnd_size undgrnd_cnd_type undgrnd_cnd_length abvgrnd_cnd_size abvgrnd_cnd_type abvgrnd_cnd_length cnd_detail_numb detail_drw_numb cnd_ac_dimension cnd_station pow_conduct_volt pow_conduct_numb pow_conduct_size pow_conduct_type pow_conduct_length con_conduct_numb con_conduct_size con_conduct_type con_conduct_length grnd_wire_size grnd_wire_type grnd_wire_length ol_diagram_numb remarks drawing_numb drawing_rev Type Char( 2) Char( 10) Char( 12) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 6) Char( 5) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 7) Char( 12) Char( 12) Char( 6) Char( 5) integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real integer Char( 7) Char( 4) real Char( 6) Char( 4) real Char( 10) Char( 16) Char( 20) Char( 2) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no uniq no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases revision_numb: the column containing the conduit schedule revision number. 489 . conduit_for: the column defines the purpose of the conduit._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description cndsch_spec This table contains information about conduit schedule for underground conduit design. for example power. cnd_to_where: the column containing the location name where the conduit goes to. and conduit number ID. control.

cnd_ac_dimensio: the column containing the data for AC DIM. con_conduct_siz: the column containing the control conductor size. abvgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the above ground conduit. grnd_wire_lengt: the column containing the ground wire length. pow_conduct_typ: the column containing the power conductor type code. pow_conduct_siz: the column containing the power conductor size. pow_conduct_num: the column containing the power conductor number. cnd_detail_numb: the column containing the conduit detail number. pow_conduct_len: the column containing the power conductor length. con_conduct_len: the column containing the control conductor length. grnd_wire_size: the column containing the ground wire size. grnd_wire_type: the column containing the ground wire type code. pow_conduct_vol: the column containing the power conductor voltage. ol_diagram_numb: the column containing the one-line diagram number. 490 . abvgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the above ground conduit type. remarks: the column containing remarks for the conduit schedule. con_conduct_typ: the column containing the control conductor type code. con_conduct_num: the column containing the control conductor number. drawing_numb: the column containing the drawing number. undgrnd_cnd_len: the column containing the length of the underground conduit. detail_drw_numb: the column containing the detail drawing number. undgrnd_cnd_typ: the column containing the underground conduit type. abvgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the above ground conduit size._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . cnd_station: the column containing the information for control station.February 2003 undgrnd_cnd_siz: the column containing the underground conduit size.

491 . ee_filename: the column containing the drawing file name and path. contains general information about each EE design file. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_dist_down_ol* ee_dist_to_rcp* tag Type integer integer integer integer real real Char( 20) Index uniq no dups dups no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drop_point table. C: EE Databases sheet: the column used to contain the drawing sheet name. ref_db: the column containing the schema name of the EE reference database. used by all EE products. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description drawing This table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one_line table. load_date: the column containing the date that the load processor loaded the drawing into the project database. Column Name mslink* drawing_type* ee_filename* sheet* load_date* ref_db* Type integer Char( 20) Char( 80) Char( 20) Char( 26) Char( 80) Index uniq no no uniq no no Null no no no no no no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the drawing table. drop_point This table associates a row in the rcp table with a row in the one-line table. drawing_type: the column used to define the type of EE drawing. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table._ _______________ Appendix C: drawing_rev: the column containing the drawing revision.

492 . ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_duct_cc_numb: cable/conduit area number.February 2003 ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_dist_down_ol: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the drop point. duct_fill This table defines the cable/conduit that are placed in a duct one-line. Column Name ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_duct_cc_row ee_duct_cc_col ee_duct_cc_numb ee_drawing_numb Type integer integer integer integer Char( 12) Char( 20) Index dups dups no no no no Null yes yes yes yes yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. This is performed with the EE Raceway Conduit Sizing command. ee_duct_cc_col: the column index of the conduit/cable. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. tag: the column that contains the name of the drop point. ee_dist_to_rcp: the column containing the distance between the one-line and the rcp. ee_drawing_numb: detail drawing number of the conduit/cable schedule. ee_pseudo_cable This table defines the wires/cables that fill conduit. ee_duct_cc_row: the row index of the conduit/cable. and cable number number ID. cable number. Column Name mslink ee_to_ol ee_to_drw ee_quantity item_no Type integer integer integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_pseudo_cable table.

Column Name mslink* system_name Type integer Char( 20) Index uniq dups Null no yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the ee_system table. system_name: the column that contains the names of the systems. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* tag Type integer integer Char( 20) Index uniq no dups Null no no yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the envelope table. tag: the column that contains the envelope tag. Space envelopes are not available at time of printing. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_system This table contains the names of all systems from every EE Raceway drawing loaded into the project database. item_no: the column containing the unique key to the ee_pseudo_cable table of the reference schema. envelope This table contains information about the raceway envelopes found in the drawing. 493 ._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_quantity: the number of wires/cables associated with the given one-line of a given item_no.

ee_out_width2: the column containing the outside width of the reducer. ee_angle: the column containing the fitting bend angle. 494 . ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_weight: the column containing the fitting weight per unit length.February 2003 fitting This table contains information about the raceway fittings found in the drawing. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the fitting._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the fitting. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the fitting. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_to_rcp* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_out_width2 ee_dimension_1* ee_angle* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_ol_type* ee_part* ee_description Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no no dups no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the fitting table.

pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database). ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_tl_type: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line type. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. C: EE Databases fit_to_sys This table links a fitting to each system of which it is a member. 495 . pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the fitting (calculated by Load Database)._ _______________ Appendix C: cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_tl_qual: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line qualifier. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. ee_tl_subtype: the column containing the codelist value of the three-line subtype. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. Column Name ee_to_fit* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_fit: the column containing the mslink of a row in the fitting table. ee_description: the column containing the fitting part description. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

496 . dastable: specifies the name of the table that maps displayable attribute types to the sql select statements used by MicroStation 32 for loading text into displayable attributes. It must exactly match the name of the desired table. sqlreview: an sql select satement that MicroStation 32 uses to review rows and columns. Is is created for each table having graphic linkages within a fence. EE uses key_columns as the correlation key. key_columns: a column containing the column_name which uniquely identifies a particular row in the table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The entity number uniquely identifies a particular table in the database. It must be a positive integer in the range of 1 to 65535. reporttable: a temporary table used by MicroStation 32. Column Name tablename entitynum screenform reporttable sqlreview fencefilter dastable alias_name key_columns key_description Type Char( 32) integer Char( 64) Char( 64) Char(240) Char(240) Char(32) Char(32) Char( 80) Char( 32) Index no uniq no no no no no no no no Null no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes tablename: the name of the table in the database. screenform: not currently used by MicroStation 32. entitynum: The entity number assigned to a table.February 2003 mscatalog This table contains the entity (table) numbers for all the tables in the EE Raceway project database. There will be one row in the mscatalog for each database table. key_description: the descriptive alias for key_columns. alias_name: a column used by EE that contains the descriptive alias of tablename. fencefilter: an sql select statement that MicroStation 32 uses to restrict elements during fence operations.

work_mode: the column containing the code that identifies the use of a particular column by an EE user. there are no EE processors using this table. C: EE Databases 497 . Since all EE Raceway column values are displayed on the primary form. column_name: the name of a column in the database. attrnum: the attribute number assigned to a particular column within a table._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description mscolumns This table specifies column-specific data for EE tables. while a value of 1 indicates that it allows read/write access. Display of certain attributes can be restricted depending on the mode of work the user is performing. the work_mode value is set to zero. It must exactly match the column name in the database. alias_name: the column containing the descriptive alias of column_name. A value of 0 indicates that the column is read_only. RISRPT and DBAccess use this table for reports. This column can also be thought of as a filter. Entity numbers between mscatalog and mscolumns must be consistent. There is one row in mscolumns for each column in an attribute table. Currently. Column Name entitynum attrnum column_name alias_name access_flag work_mode ee_column_order* Type uniq integer Char( 32) Char( 64) smallint smallint smallint Index uniq uniq no no no no no Null no no no yes no no no entitynum: the entity number assigned to the table whose columns are being described. access_flag: the column containing a code used to identify the accessibility of a particular column by an EE user. ee_column_order: the column used to determine the order to display the attributes on the annotation form.

Column Name ee_to_ol* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* prj_rule_applied Type integer integer real integer Index dups dups no no Null no no yes yes ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . prj_rule_applied: the column containing the applied project rule.February 2003 ol_to_sys This table links a one-line to each system of which it is a member. one_line This table contains information about the raceway one-lines found in the drawing. 498 . ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_rcp1* ee_to_rcp2* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_ol_length* weight cab_weight vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* tag ee_radius ee_const_type Type integer integer integer integer real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) real char Index uniq no dups dups no no no no no no no dups no no dups dups no no Null no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the one_line table. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table.

C: EE Databases 499 . ee_radius: the column that contains the fitting bend radius of the three-line type specification. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the one-line type. ee_ol_length: the column containing the run length of the one-line. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the one-line type. ee_to_rcp2: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the end of the one-line in the design file. tag: the column that contains the name of the one-line. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. weight: the column containing the one-line type weight per unit length. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the one-line type. ee_const_type: the column that contains the construction type. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description ee_to_rcp1: the column containing the mslink of the rcp placed at the start of the one-line in the design file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. Column Name mslink prj_number prj_name location prj_rule_set base_rule_set Type integer Char( 20) Char( 40) Char( 60) Char( 20) Char( 20) Index uniq uniq uniq no no no Null no yes no no no yes 500 . ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. project This table contains specification information for the project. ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table.

base_rule_set: column containing the base rule set. prj_number: the column containing the project number prj_name: the column containing the project name description. rcp This table contains information about all raceway connect points (RCPs) found in the drawing. ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the RCP table._ _______________ Appendix C: mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description panel_to_drw This table links a panel/equipment to each drawing in which it exists. ee_status: the column containing the revision status of the panel element in the design file (used by the Load Database process). Column Name mslink* ee_rcp_type* tag ee_radius Type integer Char( 10) Char( 20) real Index uniq no no no Null no yes yes no mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the rcp table. Column Name ee_to_panel ee_asid ee_to_drw ee_to_rcp ee_status Type integer integer integer integer integer Index dups no dups dups no Null no no no yes no C: EE Databases ee_to_panel: the column containing the mslink of a row in the panel table. prl_rule_set: the column containing the project rule set. 501 . ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the panel/equipment element in the design file identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. location: the column containing location.

rcp_to_sys This table links an rcp to each system of which it is a member. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). tag: the column that contains the name of the rcp. ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table.February 2003 ee_rcp_type: the column containing the codelist value of the type of rcp. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the rcp (calculated by Load Database). 502 . rcp_to_drw This table links an rcp to each drawing in which it exists. ee_radius: the column containing the fitting bend radius. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* Type integer integer integer real real real Index dups no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table. Column Name ee_to_rcp* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_rcp: the column containing the mslink of a row in the rcp table._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the rcp element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw.

ee_out_ht_diam: the column containing the outside height or diameter of the straight section. ee_weight: the column containing the straight section weight per unit length. EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description straight This table contains information about the raceway straight sections found in the drawing. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_out_ht_diam* ee_out_width* ee_tl_length* ee_dimension_1* ee_dimension_2* ee_weight* cab_weight pds_east* pds_north* pds_elev* vendor ee_units* ee_ol_type* ee_spec_key* ee_part* material ee_description Type integer integer integer real real real real real real real real real real Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 28) Char( 20) Char( 20) Char( 40) Index uniq no dups no no no no no no no no no no dups no no dups no no no Null no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the straight table. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_dimension_1: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. ee_dimension_2: the column containing a dimension of the straight section. 503 ._ _______________ Appendix C: ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the fitting is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys. ee_out_width: the column containing the outside width of the straight section. ee_tl_length: the column containing the length of the straight section.

pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). material: the column containing the straight section material. str_to_sys This table links a straight section to each system of which it is a member. ee_description: the column containing the straight section part description.February 2003 cab_weight: the column containing the cable weight per unit length. 504 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . vendor: the column containing the codelist value of the vendor of the one-line type specification. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the straight section (calculated by Load Database). ee_units: the column containing the codelist value of the design file units. Column Name ee_to_str* ee_to_sys* ee_percent* Type integer integer real Index dups dups no Null no no yes ee_to_str: the column containing the mslink of a row in the straight table. ee_ol_type: the column containing the codelist value of the one-line type. ee_part: the column containing the straight section part number. ee_spec_key: the column containing the unique key to the one-line type specification table. ee_percent: the column containing the percent amount of the straight section is contained in the system identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_sys.

505 ._ _______________ Appendix C: EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description sys_to_drw This table links a system name to each drawing in which the system exists. Column Name mslink* ee_to_drw* ee_to_ol* ee_ol_coord* tag Type integer integer integer real Char( 20) Index uniq no no no dups Null no no no yes yes C: EE Databases mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the to_support table. to_support symbols are not available at time of printing. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. Column Name ee_to_sys* ee_asid* ee_to_drw* Type integer integer integer Index dups no dups Null no no no ee_to_sys: the column containing the mslink of a row in the ee_system table. to_support This table links the raceway one-line with a support. ee_to_drw: the column containing the mslink of a row in the drawing table. ee_asid: the column containing the asid number of the system element in the drawing identified by the mslink stored in ee_to_drw. ee_to_ol: the column containing the mslink of a row in the one-line table. tag: the column that contains the support tag. ee_ol_coord: the column containing the distance along the one-line to the support.

February 2003 506 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

If you answer n to the prompt. key in SPEC at the command prompt. The <one-line type>_spec table contains all specifications. If you intend to add records to an existing . These tables contain all attribute information for the available one-line types. The following information displays to the screen: Enter schema name: Enter table name: Is this a restart (y/n) Respond to the prompts according to your requirements.unl) to contain all the relevant data from the vendor catalogs. the system will overwrite any records already existing in the specified . The specifications available at the time of printing are for tray. Enter your reference schema name and the appropriate table name. This process allows you to add records to an existing . the reference database contains one table for each fitting type.unl file or to create a new . copy the appropriate <one-line type>_spec. The two special fittings delivered by default with EE Raceway are conduit body and pullbox. Indicate whether or not you are adding records to an existing file (Is this a restart (y/n).unl to a file called <one-line type>_spec. while the <one-line type>_part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification. wireway.unl file easily and efficiently. The first step in this preparation is to create two ASCII data files (<one-line type>_part. and will then write all records to that file. You can edit these files manually using a standard ASCII editor or you can use the SPEC process delivered with EE Raceway. airway. SPEC Process The SPEC process resides in the win32app\eerway\bin directory.unl file._ _______________ Appendix D: Specification Appendix D Specification Your reference database contains the specification tables (<one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec) that drive the EE Raceway product. D: Specs 507 . The system will attach a . The process will then write all records to this . Preparing the Specifications Preparing the specifications is one of the first tasks the system manager performs when setting up the EE Raceway product.sav before running the process.unl and <one-line type>_spec. To initiate the process.sav file. For special fittings like conduit bodies and pullboxes. and conduit.sav file.sav extension to the specified table name.

press <RETURN> to accept the displayed values (in ()) or key in new values as necessary.sav file and redisplays the column names._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . in a format similar to the following example (for tray_spec): vendor <code list> () ee_units <code list> () ee_dimension_1 <real> () ee_out_ht_diam <real> () ee_dimension_2 <real> () ee_out_width <real> () ee_extension <real> () ee_transition <real> () ee_radius <real> () weight <real> () material <char-20> () ee_xs_cell <char-6> () ee_spec_key <char-28> () ee_description <char-40> () Key in values to the right of the () for each column value. 508 . Once you enter the final value for the displayed table.sav file. Continue this process as long as you wish to add records to your .February 2003 The system processes the information. Each value is verified according to the parameters defined inside the < >.unl file to keep the records you have added.sav file back to the corresponding . For subsequent records. You can exit the process at any point by pressing CTRL -C. Copy the . and then displays the column values for the table name you specified. It also displays the column values you entered for the previous record. the system writes the information to the .

unl files you will load into your reference database tables.unl 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|50|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SHV|VENTRIB SHV A 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|600|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|6030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|450|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|4530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3060SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|300|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|3030SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|600|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1560SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|85|0|150|0|0|300|0|HOT DIP STEEL|A|1530SV|VENTRIB SV C1 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|6060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|600|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|6030AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|4560AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|450|0|0|300|0|ALUMINUM|A|4530AHV|VENTRIB AHV A 2|1|0|50|0|300|0|0|600|0|ALUMINUM|A|3060AHV|VENTRIB AHV A D: Specs 509 .unl Files Sample . Note that the | serves as a delimiter between column values. tray_spec._ _______________ Appendix D: Sample .unl Files The following are examples of .

As described previously. while the part table contains the relevant data for each of the fittings within a specification.February 2003 tray_part. the index_column (codelist) value from the ee_units table. Sample Specification Tables This section describes the required column names of sample specification tables. the outside height dimension in sub-units. the outside width dimension in sub-units. a dimension variable used by Eden. 510 . the spec table contains all specifications.unl files are input to the Update Reference Schema process which loads information in the <one-line type>_part and <one-line type>_spec tables. tray_spec table Column Name vendor* ee_units* ee_dimension_1 ee_out_ht_diam ee_dimension_2 ee_out_width ee_extension Description the index_column (codelist) value from the vendor table. For information about running Update Reference Schema. the ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . a dimension variable used by Eden. the fitting extension. see Update Reference Schema in the section entitled Electrical Engineer (EE) Environment. tray_spec and tray_part.unl 2|2|5|90|0|A-15VA|VEL|1530AS| |A-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-30VA|VEL|3030AS| |A-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-45VA|VEL|4530AS| |A-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|A-60VA|VEL|6030AS| |A-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-15VA|VEL|1530ADS| |AD-15VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-30VA|VEL|3030ADS| |AD-30VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-45VA|VEL|4530ADS| |AD-45VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 2|2|5|90|0|AD-60VA|VEL|6030ADS| |AD-60VA|Vertical Adjustable Elbow 4|5|1|90|0|ADL-15X-90|HRC|1590ADL| |ADL-15X-90|Horizontal Cross 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30R15-60|Concentric Reducer 1|8|1|0|0|ADL-30R15|CR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30R15-90|Concentric Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RL15-60|Left Reducer 1|9|1|0|0|ADL-30RL15|LR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RL15-90|Left Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1560ADL|3060ADL|ADL-30RR15-60|Right Reducer 1|10|1|0|0|ADL-30RR15|RR|1590ADL|3090ADL|ADL-30RR15-90|Right Reducer 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3060ADL| |ADL-30ST-60|Straight Section 1|1|1|0|0|ADL-30ST|STS|3090ADL| |ADL-30ST-90|Straight Section 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-60|HRT|3060ADL| |ADL-30T-60|Horizontal Tee 3|5|1|90|0|ADL-30T-90|HRT|3090ADL| |ADL-30T-90|Horizontal Tee Update Reference Schema Once created.

the tray part description. the index_column value from the tl_subtype table. the tray specification description. the fitting turn angle. the weight per unit length of the run. the tray specification key. Sample . the fitting bend radius.unl Files tray_part table Column Name ee_tl_type* ee_tl_subtype* ee_tl_qual* ee_angle ee_weight ee_part ee_symbol ee_spec_key ee_spec2_key ee_key ee_description Description the index_column value from the tl_type table. the unique tray specification key. D: Specs 511 . the tray part weight. the construction type. the tray part catalog number. the unique tray part key. the tray material. see the appendix entitled EE Databases . the cross section symbol. * For information about the codelist values._ _______________ Appendix D: ee_transition ee_radius weight material ee_const_type ee_xs_cell ee_spec_key ee_description the fitting transition length. the secondary tray specification key for reducers. the Eden symbol. the index_column value from the tl_qual table.

45. and Adjustable 90.February 2003 Available Fittings The following is a list of the fittings currently supported by the EE Raceway Modeling product: FITTING Straight Elbow Elbow Elbow Wye Wye Wye Cross Cross Reducer Reducer Reducer Conduit body Pullbox TYPE ANGLE Horizontal Inside Vertical Outside Vertical Horizontal Vertical Reducer Horizontal Vertical Left Horizontal Right Horizontal Concentric 30.45 left and 45 right 90 90 90 90 512 .60.45.90.60._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .60.90. and Adjustable 30.45.90. and Adjustable 30.

However. The library and its path are defined using the EE Configure command. Primitives allow you to construct complex symbols by using a combination of simple commands (place_line.). fittings. use the delivered Eden processes. Eden provides drawing commands called primitives. You can write Eden code using whatever case conventions make it easiest for you to read.lib and resides in win32app\eerway\eden. etc. draw_arc. To review or modify the symbols in this library. see the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide. pullboxes._ _______________ Appendix E: Eden Symbol Generation Appendix E Eden Symbol Generation Eden is a high-level symbol definition language (modeled after the FORTRAN programming language) that allows you to design your own symbols for raceway straight sections. You do not need a programming background to write Eden programs. fittings.). For additional information about the Eden symbol language. etc. you should be familiar with a standard ASCII editor like vi or emacs. and special parts (conduit bodies. The delivered symbol library is called eden. (See the chapter entitled Eden Processes for more information about running these processes. Symbol Processor File A symbol processor file is the controlling function or logic used to produce the raceway straight sections.) Every Raceway symbol must contain a symbol processor definition and at least one of each of the following: Placepoint (EE attachment point) Datum point (EE RCP point) Graphical element E: Eden Symbols 513 . and special parts.

or. val6 ! ! ! Get Dimensions Required to create the horizontal elbow. angle. val1.eq.February 2003 The best way to explain how a symbol processor file works is to show an example: Before creating an Eden symbol processor file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . height . 0.0) then Call ABORT ( 0 ) Endif Call Begin ( NOHOLE ) Call Begin ( SURFACE ) ! ! ! Add dimension of tray to radius radius = radius + halfwid ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Calculate distances distance variables val1 val2 val3 val4 val5 val6 = = = = = = bendpoint on primary oneline primary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to bendpoint on bent oneline extension point on primary oneline primary distance to extpoint on bent oneline secondary distance to extpoint on bent oneline 514 . extension. angle .eq. val5. ! ========================================================================= SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’HEL’ #DESC = Tray Horizontal Elbow r8 halfwid. val2.eq. with or without extensions.0 . val3.or. ========================================================================= ! ! Symbol Name: HEL ! ! Description: Horizontal Tray Elbow. radius. 0. angle height halfwid extension radius ORG BND1 BND2 EXT1 EXT2 ARC = = = = = = 19 20 21 22 23 24 = = = = = DIMENSION[4] DIMENSION[21] DIMENSION[22] / 2. height. val4.0 DIMENSION[23] DIMENSION[25] NUMPTS = 4 If ( halfwid .0 . 0. you should have consulted the PDS Eden Interface Reference Guide or have taken a course in Eden symbol generation.

Point[0].0. height. Point[1] ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0 0 0 0 0 0 ) ) ) ) ) ) Define Placepoints Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[ORG]. 0. Point[ORG]. val2. 0. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4. Define_Point ( Point[ARC]. 0 ) then Do i = 1. 0 ) Do i = 1. 0. -val1. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. 0 ) 0. Point[BND2]. Point[0]. Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP1. NORMAL ) Call Define_Placepoint ( PP2. val6. 0) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 0. 0. 0. 0. (Point[3]. Point[ARC] ) Call Rotate_Orientation( 180. (Point[4]._ _______________ Appendix E: radius val1 = val2 = val3 = val4 = val5 = val6 = ! ! ! Call Call Call Call Call Call Call ! ! ! = radius + halfwid radius * DTAND( angle / 2. Point[0]. radius. NUMPTS. -val1. Point[0] ) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[EXT1] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points ( Point[BND1]. 0 ) 0. 0 ) Call Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. (Point[2].0 ) val1 * DSIND( angle ) val1 * DCOSD( angle ) val1 + extension val4 * DSIND( angle ) val4 * DCOSD( angle ) Eden Symbol Generation Define bendpoints (point2 and point3) and bend origin (point4) Define_Datum_Point( DP[1].ne. val5. Point[0]. Point[0] ) Point[0]. Point[0]. 0. 0. NUMPTS. Point[0]. Point[i]. 0. Point[0]. 0. 0 ) Endif 515 . Define_Point ( Point[EXT1]. 0. 0 ) Draw First Extension E: Eden Symbols If ( extension .-extension. -halfwid. -halfwid. height. -val4. Point[0]. halfwid. Define_Point ( Point[BND1]. Point[0]. 0. Define_Point ( Point[ORG]. 0. val3. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. 0 ) 0. 0. halfwid. Define_Point ( Point[BND2]. Point[0] ) ! ! ! Define cross section points Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND1] ) Call Call Call Call ! ! ! Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. 1 Call Define_Point( Point[NUMPTS+i]. Define_Point ( Point[EXT2].

For more information see the description of databases in the Workflow and Procedures chapter. 1 Call Define_Point(Point[NUMPTS+i]. 0 ) 0.Point[2]. 1. 1 Call Draw_Line ( Point[i]. halfwid. 0. Point[NUMPTS+i] ) Enddo Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( -99. Point[i]. 0 ) 0. -angle. 0. 0) Enddo Call Call Call Call Draw_Complex_Surface ( 1. 516 . 0 ) Do i = 1. halfwid. 0 ) 0. 0 ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS. 0. NUMPTS. 0._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . -halfwid. Point[1] ) Draw_Line_String ( NUMPTS.February 2003 ! ! ! Draw revolved shape Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[1]. Point[NUMPTS+1] ) Draw_Complex_Surface ( -4.ne. 0 ) Do i = 1. (Point[3]. (Point[2].Point[BND2].Point[3]) Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[ARC] ) Call Draw_Revolved_Shape ( EL_LINESTR. height. NUMPTS. the name of the symbol should correspond with the ee_symbol in the part table. When defining parts in the reference database. 0 ) then Call Define_Active_Point ( Point[BND2] ) Call Define_Orientation_By_Points(Point[ORG]. Point[0]. 0.Point[ARC]) Call Call Call Call Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point Define_Point (Point[1]. Point[0]. (Point[4]. Point[0]. 0 ) ! ! ! Draw Second Extension If ( extension . Point[1]. height. NUMPTS. Point[0]. -halfwid. 0 ) Endif Stop End The first line of this file should always be: SYMBOL_PROCESSOR ’<name>’ The last two lines of the file should always be: Stop End This line defines the symbol name. extension.

the one-line will pass through a placepoint on the symbol and will terminate at the RCP. ..._ _______________ Appendix E: The symbol in the example defines the symbol name as Tray Horizontal Elbow..... width. It uses Placepoints to define the point by which you can place a fitting using manual placement. . height... The creation of the horizontal elbow symbol is fairly straightforward given a knowledge of Eden primitives.. In general. ....ee_extension Spec Table .. For specification-driven parts..... while other critical points are defined relative to the origin..... extension.. 50 Height Width Extension Transition Radius Dimension 1 Dimension 2 . If the fitting has extensions. For a description of which database columns are associated with what dimensions..ee_dimension_2 ... Spec Table . Eden Symbol Generation DIMENSIONS The DIMENSION structure contains specific information that has been extracted from the database and passed through to Eden. EE Raceway fills the DIMENSION array with values extracted from the reference database.. see the table immediately following this description. Dimension 25 Spec Table ..ee_radius Spec Table ..... .. EE Raceway uses a Datum Point to define the location of the RCP relative to the symbol........ The RCP is defined in the active location with the active orientation. ... The symbol derives the values for angle. the structure is as follows: Dimension 1 2 3 4 11 What Three Line Type Three Line Subtype Three Line Qualifier Angle Length From Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated Manual Placement Form or Calculated These are from the specification table: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 .ee_dimension_1 Spec Table ........ee_extension 517 .. The elbow is drawn as a surface of revolution.ee_dimension_25 E: Eden Symbols These are from the secondary specification (if one exists): 51 52 53 Height_2 Width_2 Extension_2 Spec Table .ee_transition Spec Table ...ee_out_wid Spec Table ..ee_out_wid Spec Table ..ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . they are drawn as a surface of projection of a line string.ee_out_ht_diam Spec Table . . and radius from the global array DIMENSION..... Then the placepoints are defined at either end of the elbow....

. Part Table .ee_dimension_1 Part Table ..... .... . Dimension 25 Spec Table ....ee_transition Spec Table . ........ee_dimension_2 ........ ..ee_dimension_2 . ........... 80 Transition_2 Radius_2 Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .ee_dimension_1 Spec Table .. ........February 2003 54 55 56 57 .. .. Dimension 60 From Part Table . ............. .... 80 What Dimension 1 Dimension 2 .........ee_dimension_60 518 ... Spec Table ......................... ... ....ee_dimension_25 The following structure is used for special parts: Dimension 26 27 ... .._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .................ee_radius Spec Table ..

519 ._ _______________ Appendix F: EE File Structure Appendix F EE File Structure F: File Structure This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. By default. It also describes the contents of directories and some files. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to \win32app\ingr. It identifies those files you can modify.

/usr/ip32/eenuc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin: /usr/ip32/eenuc/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eenuc/config: /usr/ip32/eenuc/data: /usr/ip32/eenuc/db: 520 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . EE Nucleus will reside under the /usr#/ip32/eenuc directory. The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation.February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line./eenuc directory: Any file followed by a slash (name/) is a directory. The following files exist under the . The product may reside on any file system.. Any file followed by an asterisk (*) is an executable.

— . eenuc/ — README – file containing description of product features and any fixes. bin/ – contains the EE shell script and the environment process. — product. EE Nucleus. problems.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. The EE shell script sets up variables specifying the location of MicroStation 32. — legend – copyright notice file. — remove. INFORMIX. comments. The files are grouped by directory. etc. 521 . — EEnotice.def – product definition file. C100 for C100 executables or C400 for C400 executables.txt – File containing release notices. and EE WPD.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eenuc/doc: /usr/ip32/eenuc/forms: EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eenuc/msg: /usr/ip32/eenuc/sym: The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. and then invokes the EE environment.

— eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. INFORMIX variables. — mount – supports less disk installation. — dba_shell – shell executed around dba_rpt. The file assigns MicroStation 32 variables. and product variables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . — clip – clears interprocess communication left after a process finishes.February 2003 — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. — reeprj – remote environment process. — EE – Electrical Engineer environment shell script. This file can be edited. — eeqpr – script to print 132 column reports to the laser printer. — infxcompress – file used for compression of standard engine databases.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode.sh – shell script to create mscolumns table for reference database. — risql – EE reporting utility. — eemgr – system manager environment process. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. config/ – Contains the file that assigns and exports any required variables. — 132_header – file to allow printing in 132 column format. — assign – shell script that assigns and exports any required variables. — EEmgr – Electrical Enginner manager environment shell script. 522 . data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. — create_db – create database process. — eeprj – environment process. — infx_ol – file used for compression of on-line INFORMIX databases. — mscrecol. — print. — menu_shell – shell executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. Also kills stray processes.

txt – EE project setup information. sym/ – contains EE symbol files. db/ – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory. — lessd. doc/ – directory that contains documentation. EE Nucleus File Structure F: File Structure 523 . — dba* files – DB Access files.dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — ustn_tsk – DB Access file._ _______________ Appendix F: — manager. msg/ – contains EE Nucleus message files. — eepsp. forms/ – directory that contains all the environment forms.txt – less disk information.

/usr/ip32/eerway: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin: /usr/ip32/eerway/bin/c100: /usr/ip32/eerway/cfg: /usr/ip32/eerway/config: /usr/ip32/eerway/data: 524 .February 2003 EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/db: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn: /usr/ip32/eerway/dgn/seed: /usr/ip32/eerway/doc: /usr/ip32/eerway/eden: /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source: 525 .

February 2003 /usr/ip32/eerway/help_source/help_graphics: /usr/ip32/eerway/mdlapps: /usr/ip32/eerway/menus: /usr/ip32/eerway/msg: /usr/ip32/eerway/report: 526 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

comments.cfg – EE Raceway menu configuration file. unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. — menu. 527 . — product. eerway/ — README – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. — load – processor to load the project database. unload drawing. — assign – shell script that defines and exports any required variables. problems. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. config/ – Contains the file that defines and exports all variables required by EE Raceway and those MicroStation 32 variables required by EE Raceway. etc.sh – shell script used by the remove utility in deltools used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. cfg/ – Contains the application menu configuration files. — remove. bin/ – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product. and clean database processes. The files are grouped by directory. data/ – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. These files can be modified. — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process.def – product definition file._ _______________ Appendix F: /usr/ip32/eerway/sym: EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure /usr/ip32/eerway/tmp: delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.

dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. msseed. 528 . function key menu.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. doc/ – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. – – seed._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Also contains all symbol and icon files required to support delivered menus. — process. help_source/ – contains the text and source files required to support on-line Help.cmds – command file for EE commands invoked by MicroMenu. and cell library. This may be customized. — eden.dat – controls process management. — rway_bar – bar menu for schematic commands. — mstr_rway. eden/ – contains the Eden symbol library. — rway.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.lib – the Eden symbol library file. — mstr_rway. — help_rway.hp – help pointer file. and any design files delivered with the product. Attaches the function bar menu. — seed/ – contains the available seed design files.dat – controls rule check report management. Also contains .s – help source file.dat – controls standard report management. — help_rway. Sample .dgn – delivered English drawing seed file. db/ – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. available cell libraries. dgn/ – Contains the seed file directory.s – master help source file. — rule_chk.February 2003 — eden. You can supply additional menu files.dat – controls Eden processes. — help_graphics – contains the graphics used in on-line Help. This may be customized. menus/ – Contains the all menus (panel and bar) supporting the product. — report.hp – master help pointer file containing pointers to both MicroStation 32 and EE Raceway Help.

arc file for each report listed below. — rwaybar.msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field. — rway. report/ – Contains the source (. tmp/ – Holds any temporary files. The source files may be edited by the user. — rwaypnl.ace)and compiled (. — prompt.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. — rway. The software requires this directory.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands.msg – message file containing messages for status field. There is an . These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.bar – bar menu source file._ _______________ Appendix F: — merge_pnl/ – directory containing the merged panel menu consisting of EE Raceway and MicroStation.sym – symbol file for the panel menu. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.sym – symbol file for the bar menu.ace and an . 529 . – merge_pnl – panel menu file. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. EE Raceway File Structure F: File Structure msg/ – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. — rway_prj.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. – rway_pnl – panel menu palette file. — error. This file can be extended. — rway_ref.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added.arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports. and logo.pnl – panel menu source file. sym/ – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. — command. — rway_pnl/ – contains the rway_pnl binary menu files. prompting messages. — status. — alias. These messages can be edited but messages can not be added. — annot_form – form file for annotation.

February 2003 530 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

and Output menus. and print.dat process.dat report.dat #ident "@(#)Eden processes:eden.dat control the scrolling lists for the Process.dat.. rule_chk. # # eden. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt. .dat 13. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.%EDEN_LIB%..dat # This file is stored under the %EE_RWAY%\data directory.bat -c \ | Enter library name . You can add defaults to this screen by modifying the file. Rule.dat.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt.Switch | . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.dat Location win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eerway\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data win32app\ingr\eenuc\data G: Customizing Environment process..0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.Path.dat print. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. Rule. \ | Enter symbol source file . eden.dat.Path.. Report.dat file controls the scrolling list for the options available through the system manager menu. report. You may want to write your own processes.dat manager._ _______________ Appendix G: Customizing Environment Files Appendix G Customizing Environment Files This appendix contains printouts of the following files as they are delivered with EE Raceway: File eden.. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (. and Output. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # Change History: # Added the ability to list/extract user functions 31-May-95 # Compile EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character.-O. # 531 .1 0.dat rule_chk.Default. .Default.\ | Enter option (-l=list or -o=insert). respectively. reports or rule checks or change their names from what is delivered. The manager.. Report. This section describes the syntax needed to modify the scrolling list for the Process.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.

.. \ | Enter symbol name ...%EDEN_LIB%. # # | E n t e r e d | Enter symbol file name.....bat -d\ | Enter library name ..February 2003 # # Delete EDEN Symbol | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. # # # Compress EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -l \ | Enter library name . \ \ | Enter symbol name . # # # List EDEN Symbol Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.%EDEN_LIB%.. # # E Edit EDEN Symbol File | %EE_RWAY% tor.bat -e \ n | Enter library name . # # #Create Parameteric Help Library | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..%EDEN_LIB%. d # e n # . 532 .notepad. # # # Merge EDEN Symbol Libraries | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden. Extract EDEN User Function From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden..%EDEN_LIB%.bat -C \ # | Enter library name . \ a t | Enter symbol name .bat -m \ | Merge into library name ..%EDEN_LIB%.%EDEN_LIB%. # # # List EDEN User Functions | %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden.bat -s \ | Enter library name . \ | Merge from library name ..bat -eu \ b | Enter library name .bat -u \ | Enter library name ... # # # Extract EDEN Symbol From Library| %EE_RWAY%\bin\eden....%EDEN_LIB%.

exe \ | Enter one design name..Default. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn. .-f \ | Enter envelope name..exe \ | Enter design name.Switch # The default can be a global symbol or file.exe \ | Enter design name. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. # # Cleanup database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable.) as the delimeter # # They are : # Prompt. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.-F # # Unload Sheet | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln..-f # # Create Interference Envelope (given name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet. # # Load Database | %EE_RWAY%\bin\load. # # process..<password> if a password is keyed in on the project form.1 0. # Two environment symbols have been set up for these schemas: EE_SCHEMA # for the project schema and EES_REFDB for the reference.dat 13. This was # done to handle schema passwords. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.dat process. any customized processes written should read these symbols in the # process instead of passing them on the command line. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. .%RWAY_DGN%. %EE_CURPRJ%\rway\dgn.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.Path. # # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # So.-e G: Customizing Environment 533 . The password will # have to be handled accordingly. # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted # # NOTE: Many processes run off the project or reference schema (or both).-f # # # Unload Design | %EE_RWAY%\bin\unld_cln._ _______________ Appendix G: process.%RWAY_DGN%. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Switch | .dat # This file is stored under the %EE_SCH%\data directory.exe -s \ | Enter sheet.Default.dat #ident "@(#)data:process..Path.exe \ | Enter design name.%RWAY_DGN%..%RWAY_DGN%. The symbol is exported as # <schema_name>. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.exe # # Create Interference Envelope (default name) | %EE_RWAY%\bin\idet. These symbols # are exported by the EE environment when a project is entered.

# # Project drawing list | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # The second field is the command field.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib dummy %EE_RPTDB% \ | cond_body \ | Enter Reference schema.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom_v \ | Enter project schema. .%EES_REFDB% # # 534 .February 2003 report.. # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials by volume| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | mto_rpt \ | Enter project schema. .%EE_SCHEMA% # # Raceway bill of materials report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.dat 7. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.) as the delimeter.Default | . # # They are: # Prompt.dat # The syntax of this data file : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat #ident "@(#)data:report.. # # report.%EE_SCHEMA% # # Material takeoff report | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | rway_bom \ | Enter project schema.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file.%EE_SCHEMA% \ | Enter low range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) \ | Enter high range (PDS coordinates: east north elev) # # Raceway Conduit Body report| %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell. # The third field is the name of the report which can be a global symbol # or a file name.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | drwlst \ | Enter project schema.1 0. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.0 (EE Raceway) 6/1/92" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.

dat #ident "@(#)data:rule_chk.dat rule_chk._ _______________ Appendix G: rule_chk.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file. . Default | . # # Material takeoff blank part ID’s | %EE_NUC%\bin\dbashell.%EE_SCHEMA% # # G: Customizing Environment 535 . # # rule_chk. # The second field is the command field.Default # The default can be a global symbol or file. # The fourth field and each subsequent field will contain two sub-fields # using the comma (.1 0.dat 13.dat # The syntax of this data file is : # Title | Command Line | Report Name | Prompt. . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list... # The third field is the report name which can be a global symbol or file. # Any of the sub_fields in the third field can be omitted.) as the delimiter # # They are: Prompt.cmd %EE_RPTNAM% %EE_RPTDB% %EE_RWAY%\report\rwaydba_lib %EE_RPTDB% dummy \ | blank_ids \ | Enter project schema.

# TO SCREEN| SCREEN # # Local line printer # Local Printer| lp # # NQS print command to print to a laser printer # Laser Printer 80 columns | qpr -t text\ | Enter queue name.1 0. # The third field is made up of four parts: prompt. The command "vaxprint" # could be a shell script or an exported shell function.dat #ident "@(#)env_data:print. # The command can be any command to output a file.0 (EE Schematic) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.. # #VAX Line Printer| vaxprint # 536 .SWITCH.default.. # The first column of comment line must be #.. # (The path is not relevant). This field should be used to pass # information to the command. A file name is automatically appended to # the command as the last parameter.PATH.February 2003 print.dat 21. # The titles are the messages on the scrolling list. # # This is an example of a way to print to a VAX.DEFAULT. # # print.path and switch...-q # Laser Printer 132 columns | %EE_NUC%\bin\eeqpr \ | Enter queue name._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat # This file is stored under %EE_NUC%\data directory.. # The syntax of this data file is : # TITLE | COMMAND | PROMPT.

# # The first column for a comment line must be the ’#’ character. # # manager.Path. # The syntax of this data file is : # # Title | Command Line | Prompt.. # The ’\’ is the line continuation character. _ r # Any of the sub-fields in the third field can be omitted p # t # .Default..) as the delimeter n # # They are : b # Prompt._ _______________ Appendix G: manager. .INFORMIX SE | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infxcompress -T compress # d # b e #Compress database .Path.. -s e # # m #Compress database .0 (EE Nucleus) 3/9/94" # # Note: No blanks lines allowed in this file.cmd \ |Enter schema name.Default.1 0. .dat 21.dat # This file is stored under the %EE_NUC%\data directory..INFORMIX Online | vterm -x %EE_NUC%\bin\infx_ol -T compress d # Create mscolumns table | %EE_NUC%\bin\mscrecol.Switch | .dat #ident "@(#)env:manager. # # The second field is a command line containing the name of the executable. G: Customizing Environment 537 . # # The first field is the title which will appear on the scrolling list. Edit database | %EE_NUC%etnt -l %EE_NUC%\db\mgrdba_lib \ x | Enter schema name.dat manager.. # # The third field and each subsequent field will contain three sub-fields # using the comma (.Switch a # The default can be a global symbol or file..

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 538 .

cmd file Appendix H alias.cmd file.cmd file The following is a print-out of the alias.cmd.cmd file explains how to create an alias for a particular command.cmd file This appendix contains a description and printout of the alias.1 0. For example. You do not need to add entries to the alias. You can use any text editor to modify the file. Since the EE Raceway software has a reserved set of names for each Raceway command which are hard-coded into the EE Raceway software. The example in the alias.cmd file is an ASCII file located in win32app\ingr\eerway\msg. any alias you add to this file must not match any of the command name key-ins or hard-coded names listed below. you would need only to key in r e to invoke the command. if the sample alias entry (in the file below) were added to alias. a sample entry. The fixed (hard-coded) command name is to the right of the equal sign.cmd file. then the key-in EERWAY Remove Element would invoke the command EERWAY Delete Element. The alias. the format of such an entry. H: alias. The alias. You need to key in just enough of the key-in name to make it unique.0 (EE Raceway) 12/14/93" To create an alias for an EE Raceway command add an entry to this file consisting of the alas and the hardcode for that command in the following format: <alias> = <hardcode> The list of possible hardcodes follows: Command Name ———— EERWAY Active OLT Parameters EERWAY Add System Group EERWAY Annotate Element EERWAY Annotate Group EERWAY Annotate Title Block EERWAY Clone Element EERWAY Clone Group EERWAY Conduit Sizing EERWAY Copy Element EERWAY Copy Group EERWAY Create Cell EERWAY Delete Coincident RCPs EERWAY Define Duct Cross Section Hardcode ——– rwp addsysg annotate anntgrp anntblk clone cloneg rtwform cpele cpeleg crecell coinrcp ductform 539 .cmd file._ _______________ Appendix H: alias.cmd file (the # symbols indicate comment lines): #ident "@(#)rdmsg:alias.cmd file contains instructions for adding an entry. just as would the key-in EERWAY Delete Element. If you were to add this example to the alias. the command name key-ins in the file will invoke the commands to which they correspond.cmd # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # 13. and a list of EE Raceway command names and the hard-code for each command. To the left of the equal sign (=) in this example is the user-definable alias key-in name.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY EERWAY Delete Duplicate One Lines Delete Element Delete Group Delete Title Block Design Parameters Display Element Info Display Entity and Mslink Display Fitting Info Display Run Info Display Sector and Word Display System and OLT Display Type and Asid Edit Manual Fitting Exit Fitting Environment Element Fitting Environment Group Group Control Highlight Asid Highlight Entity and Mslink Highlight Graphic Group Highlight Propagation Errors Highlight Sector and Word Highlight System Elements Insert One Line Vertex Insert RCP Levels Control Load Database Minimize Joints Minimize Joints Group Modify One Line Move Element Move One Line Segment Move One Line Vertex Move Title Block OLT Definition Place Drop Point Place Equipment Pointer Place Manual Fitting Place One Line Place Title Block Propagate Element Propagate Group Propagation Control Remove Fitting Remove One Line Vertex Remove RCP Replace System Group Rotate Cross Section Route Around Vessel Run Reports Run Rule Checks Set Active OLT Set Active OLT Parameters Set Active Point Set Active System Set Conduit Sizing Attributes Set Symbology Control Symbology Control System Definition Text Defaults Toggle Spider Display dupols dltele dlteleg dlttblk ueleform eleinfo prtrlnk tlfinfo runinfo prtsw prtsysol prtasid manedit rexit rulefit rulefitg grpform hiasid hirlnk higg hiprerr hisw hisys insolvert addrcp levels loaddb minjnt minjntg modol mvele mvolseg mvolvert mvtblk oltdef plcdpnt plctoeqp manform plcol plctblk prjele prjeleg propform rmfit rmolvert rmrcp repsysg rotcs rtvess runrpt runrul actolt setact actpnt actsys setcsa setgsc symbform sysdef txtdef togspider 540 .

_ _______________ Appendix H: # # example: EERWAY Remove Element = dltele alias.cmd file 541 .cmd file H: alias.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 542 .

cfg active mmenus ee_rway:rway.. This file is located in the directory path win32app\eerway\db and activates the rway. You can disable any of these features by commenting out the line(s) that enable the feature.cmd Appendix I rway. you can comment out the export variable RWAY_CMD using the EE Configure command.prAttaching EE Raceway Menus. add mmenus ee_rway:menu.cmd file may also be edited by the user. If you do not want the rway.amm m. MicroStation reads this file and processes the commands as if keyed in by the user. It is run automatically when you enter the EE Raceway environment.cmd file to be executed.) Below is the file as it is delivered in the product directory: m. The rway..cmds 543 ._ _______________ Appendix I: rway.ammfile.pr I: rway.cmd The file rway. (Place a pound sign (#) in front of any line you do not want executed.cmd is the MicroMenu (umenu) command file that is used to attach the EE Raceway menus.

February 2003 544 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

The name of the report you wish to run from your report template library._ _______________ Appendix J: Reports Appendix J Reports This section describes each report delivered with EE Raceway. RIS Report Processing A report processor is provided with EE Raceway to run RIS-based reports. It doesn’t have to be the schema your report is running off of. The name of the menu you wish to run from your menu template library. All EE Raceway reports are currently written for RIS-DBACCESS. and the RIS Report-Writer Reference Guide.. is supported.e. in some cases.[wtr_p5] [-?] -s <schema name> Returns a usage statement like the one listed above. The EE Raceway reports report on the project database. either local or remote. "where name = ’joe smith’ and number = 32". This is the name of any current RIS schema. It is used as a "default" schema to enter DB Access. RIS Dataview or RIS Report Writer are all supported by this processor. Project Dataview. i. Documentation explaining how to create and compile customized reports with RIS-DB ACCESS is available in the DB ACCESS Reference Guide. Used to restrict the report output to a certain type of condition. and print conditions.. J: Reports -l <template library> -t <report template> -M <menu template> -w <where clause> 545 . Usage: dba_rpt [-?] -s <schema> -l<template library> [-t<template>|-M<menu template>] -w<where clause> -o<output file> -S<schema list> [-F<database find>] [wtr_p0]. the Project Data View Reference Guide. Any RISsupported relational database. Report templates created through DB Access. the reference database and. both. layout. or RIS Report-Writer this is your report source code. This is the library of templates created to run reports from. It specifies the attributes used in the report and describes some of the internal operation behind report generation. All EE Raceway reports are compatible for use with either RIS Report-Writer (RISRPT) or DB Access (DBA). Created through DB Access. This information will be helpful if you want to use a delivered report as a template for a customized report.

Thus.. The first parameter is read into wtr_p0. -S <schema list> -F <database find> [wtr_p0]. Certain variables may be exported.February 2003 -o <output filename> All reports have a hardcoded. be careful of how your list looks before you develop a report template. second... They are: DBA_SCHEMA (the "-s schema". etc.) the report template will look at the schema in that same position when it is executed.. RIS Dataview or RIS Report-Writer to create or alter existing templates. The correct order is <project schema> <reference schema>. the "-o" option can be used.") and places the result into the third parameter (wtr_p2)) These are parameters that can be passed to a report template.) This is the list of schemas your report actually runs through. etc.) 546 .rpt" added to the end. and referenced by the literal string "wtr_p0".. third. up to a maximum of six parameters (wtr_p5).. default file name that they write to. If you wish to override this name. * (The schemas in this list need to be in the same order as they were in DBA_SCHEMA_LIST when the report was originally developed.[wtr_p5] When you create a template. (The current standard is that the output filename be the same as the template name. and use a schema from the schema list. whatever that schema’s position was in that list (first. with a ". and will be picked up as defaults if switches are not used.e. Example: "-S prj_schema ref_schema". "select value_a from table_b where. since all EE Raceway reports were developed with the project schema listed first and the reference schema listed second._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .. A default schema used to enter RIS) DBA_SCHEMA_LIST (schema list the report runs off of) * DBA_LIB (the report template library) It is useful to export these variables before entering DB Access. * selects one character string from the database based on the select statement entered (i.

used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib drwlst template. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Sorted by (Highest to lowest priority) drawing. filename.sheet Associated Software/Files 1. Information Output: Drawing. J: Reports 547 . sheet. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. 3. Formats information into readable form. dba_rpt . drawing_type. 2._ _______________ Appendix J: Project Drawing List (drwlst) Project Drawing List (drwlst) This report lists all drawings currently loaded in the project database. and sorts them by sheet name. load_date. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ref_db. Selects the desired columns from those tables.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Project Database drwlst (RIS) .the RIS process.

Information Output: System. ee_ol_type.the RIS process. ee_tl_subtype. ee_part. Formats information into readable form. description Fitting. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. Project Database mto_rpt . ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_out_width. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Selects the desired columns from those tables._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_length. ee_out_ht_diam. 2. found in $EE_NUC/bin. This file: Selects the desired database tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib mto_rpt template. 3. dba_rpt . ee_tl_type. ee_out_width. system_name Straight. ee_ol_type. 548 .February 2003 Material Takeoff Report (mto_rpt) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables.

Selects the desired columns from those tables. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom template.the RIS process. found in $EE_NUC/bin. ee_ol_type. For flexible conduit elbow fittings. ee_tl_subtype. the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_tl_length. J: Reports 549 . ee_part. ee_out_width. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_out_ht_diam._ _______________ Appendix J: Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) Raceway Bill of Materials Report (rway_bom) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. ee_out_width. 2. 3. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. Formats information into readable form. Project Database rway_bom . Information Output: Straight. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_tl_type. dba_rpt . description Fitting. ee_ol_type.

234 532 34 It should be understood that westing and southing coordinates must be the negative of their opposite directional coordinate. and a southing coordinate of 3000 should be keyed in as a value of -3000 in the northing direction. and outputs the number of fittings for each part ID.February 2003 Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) This report adds the length of the straight sections for each part ID. Any Raceway component extending outside the clipping volume defined by the High and Low Range Coordinates will not be included in the report output. A Special Note for Bill of Materials by Volume When running a Bill of Materials by Volume report. The output is only for a specified volume from the input parameters. a westing coordinate of 100 should be keyed in as a value of -100 in the easting direction. You can find the coordinates you want to use by using the active point coordinate display on the precision input form. For instance. 550 . the length of the elbows is added to the straight sections._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . For flexible conduit elbow fittings. you are required to define a low and high range in PDS coordinates. These low and high ranges define a cubic volume from which the report is pulled. The coordinate values need to be in subunits and entered in the form field with a space between the coordinates: easting northing elevation For example.

J: Reports 551 . ee_tl_type.Appendix J: _ _______________ Raceway Bill of Materials by Volume Report (rway_bom_vol) Information Output: Straight. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_part. ee_tl_length. ee_tl_subtype.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file. ee_out_width. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and. This file: Selects the desired database tables. Project Database rway_bom_vol . found in $EE_NUC/bin. Selects the desired columns from those tables. ee_out_width. 2.the RIS process. ee_ol_type. ee_out_ht_diam. description Fitting. 3. ee_out_ht_diam. Formats information into readable form. ee_ol_type. dba_rpt . used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib rway_bom_vol template.

ee_ol_type. This file: Selects the desired database tables. ee_out_ht_diam. ee_tl_length. Information Output: System. 3. system_name Straight. ee_tl_type.the RIS process. Project Database blank_ids . ee_out_width. found in $EE_NUC/bin. 552 . dba_rpt . ee_part. 2.a template in the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib template library data file._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Formats information into readable form. ee_out_ht_diam.February 2003 Raceway Blank Part IDs (blank_ids) This report outputs information from both the straight and the fitting tables whose part id (ee_part) information is blank. used to execute the $EE_RWAY/report/rwaydba_lib blank_ids template. ee_ol_type. ee_part Associated Software/Files 1. ee_out_width. ee_tl_subtype. description Fitting. Selects the desired columns from those tables. and outputs the related system name for the particular straight or fitting. Sorts the information according to given sort parameters and.

and the RIS Schema Manager rereads the risschema file. You can access RIS Schema Manager from EE Database Utilities or by clicking Start > Programs > RIS version number > RIS Schema Manager. RIS initiates that particular action by displaying one of the forms defined below. any active secondary forms are erased. then information about that schema is displayed. This form consists of a list of all the schemas known to RIS and several buttons corresponding to the actions of the Schema Manager. If you select any of the buttons. refer to the Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Guide. 553 . It can also be used to display information about any existing schemas. For more detailed information on the RIS Schema Manager. and dropping RIS schemas. The RIS Schema Manager is a stand-alone utility for creating. RIS Schema Manager terminates. When you select Cancel (X). changing._ _______________ Appendix K: RIS Schema Manager Appendix K RIS Schema Manager K: RIS Schema Mgr. If you select one of the schemas in the list. When you select Reset.

February 2003 Schema Information Form This form is. 554 . a read only form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Schema Information form. It reads information about existing schemas. You can specify a schema in two ways: either by keying in the schema name in the Schema Name field. or by choosing a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . with the exception of the Schema Name field.

input fields for that information display. A form listing all the known RIS databases is displayed. and corresponds directly to the RIS create schema statement. Select the Display Databases button. The database-specific information about that schema is entered in the Create Schema input fields. This method is particularly convenient when creating additional schemas for a database. Key in all information in the input fields. This is your only alternative if the schema is created on a database which is unknown to RIS. its value will be replaced with the value of the field below it. select one of the Network Protocol fields. Once you have entered all necessary information. If the selected database type requires additional information._ _______________ Appendix K: Create Schema Form Create Schema Form K: RIS Schema Mgr. information about that database is entered into the Create Schema input fields. Selecting the Local Machine button fills the Node Address field with the addresses of the local machine. select Run to create the schema. Selecting Reset clears all input fields on the form. To change the order of the Network Protocol fields. Select an existing schema on the RIS Schema Manager form. Selecting the Force button forces the system to create the schema despite corrupted data or other errors it may encounter. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. 555 . 3. 2. You can enter database-specific information on the Create Schema form using one of three methods: 1. If you select one of the databases. The value you selected originally moves to the bottom of the list. This form creates new RIS schemas.

or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. select Run to alter the schema. 556 . only those gadgets associated with the action are enabled. and the schema node. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. You must enter both the original and new passwords to modify the schema password. while selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. Alter Schema Form This form performs three functions: it modifies the schema password. When you select one of these options.February 2003 Drop Schema Form This form drops RIS schemas. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. either enter the schema name in the Schema Name field. To modify the user password. the user password._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . This action can also be used to change the order of the fields or to change the order of the protocols. Selecting Reset clears all the fields on the form. To select a schema to drop. Selecting Run drops the schema. enter the new addresses in the Node Address fields. or select a schema from the list on the RIS Schema Manager form. To select the schema to be altered. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. To modify the schema node. When you have entered all necessary information. you need only to enter the new password.

or by choosing the table from the list on the Data Definition form. views. Selecting any of these buttons initiates an action. You can specify a table either by keying in the table name in the Table Name field. and whether or not nulls are allowed in the column are displayed for each column in the table. Selecting Reset cancels any subforms. Table Information Form This form displays the definition of the specified table. This form consists of a list of all the tables. The column position. and Alter Table) will accept input. and indexes defined for the schema specified in the schema name field. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Data Definition form. 557 . Drop Table. If the selected schema requires a password. and displays one of the subforms defined in following sections. column name. then you must enter it before the subforms (Create Table. A field to search for a specific column is also provided. column type. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the Table Information form. and clears the list. The form buttons represent the data definition actions of the Schema Manager._ _______________ Appendix K: Data Definition Form Data Definition Form K: RIS Schema Mgr.

Once the table definition is complete. Then there is the second set. and Modify Column. These three buttons place the form in a particular mode. If the name of an existing table is entered into the Table Name field. Select Cancel (X) to exit the form. 558 . The Create Table form is used only to create new tables. the definition of that table will be loaded into the Create Table form. The column to be dropped must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. Selecting the Mode Reset button clears the form mode. referred to as the Mode Control buttons. The column to be modified must be specified by keying in the column name in the Column Name Search field. or chosen from the list on the Data Definition form. Select the Mode Run button to insert the column. which behaves as expected. Drop Column. Select the Mode Run button to modify the column. In Modify Column Mode. This can be useful when creating several similar tables. There is the usual set. select Run to create the table. If a column is chosen in the table definition list. In Drop Column Mode. the new column is inserted in front of the chosen column. This form has two sets of Control buttons. in the upper right corner of the form. It cannot be used to modify existing tables. The Create Table operates in three modes which are represented by the three buttons: Insert Column. columns can be dropped from the table definition. Otherwise the new column is appended to the list. or by selecting the column in the table definition list. In Insert Column Mode.February 2003 Create Table Form This form creates tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. which is used to execute and reset the different modes of the form. column definitions can be modified. while choosing the Mode Run button actually causes the action to take place._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The ability to load existing table definitions into the form exists just to provide a template or starting point for a new table. Select Reset to clear the form. Select the Mode Run button to drop the column. new columns can be added to the table definition. or by selecting the column in the table definition list.

_ _______________ Appendix K: Create Table Form Drop Table Form This form drops tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Selecting Reset clears the form. This form behaves in the same way as the RIS Alter Table command. 559 . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. Once the new column is defined. Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Run drops the table. select Run to alter the table. The table to be dropped can be specified by keying in the table name in the Table Name field or by selecting the table from the list on the Data Definition form. It can only append one new column to an existing table. K: RIS Schema Mgr. Alter Table Form This form alters existing tables in the schema specified on the Data Definition form. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form.

Set Form This form allows you to toggle the database mode ANSI setting on and off. and it also allows you to specify which RDBMS(s) your schemas can use. an error-checking mechanism that ensures that the data EE reads from a remote risschema file is correct._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form. 560 . it provides a Checksum Schema File option. Selecting Cancel (X) exits the form.February 2003 Schema File Form This form locates the risschema file that you are using on the network. Selecting Reset clears the form. Selecting Reset clears the form settings. Additionally.

the lock file must be replaced manually. If the filename is not a full pathname. I for Ingres.2 The network address (must be an address. Here is a description of the fields in the schema definition file: DBID DTYPE DBNAME PARMS PROTOCOL The database ID. O for Oracle._ _______________ Appendix L: RIS Schema Definition File Appendix L RIS Schema Definition File The RIS schema definition file maintains all schema definitions known to RIS. It must be a name or pathname as required by the dbms. L for LU6. Multiple files often result in a large number of inconsistencies. RIS will look for the file in the directory where RIS was installed on the given machine. the schema definition file will be created or used on the local machine. a unique key to identify the database The database type.LCK extension. The locate schfile command in the interactive utility can be used to put the appropriate entry in the parameters file. This file is the schema lock file. The parameters file is shipped with a default schema definition file specification. D for DNP (DECnet). and D for DB2 The database name as in the create schema statement. If there is no network address given. Sometimes when RIS is abnormally terminated. The communication protocol to be used to communicate with the database. Although you can use multiple files. referencing the file risschema in the directory where RIS was installed. The schema file is accessible only if the schema lock file exists. not a name) The name of the schema The database user name The database user password (encrypted) L: Schema Definition NETADDR SCHNAME USR USRPASS 561 . the schema lock file is not replaced as it should be. T for TCP/IP. In these cases. currently supported values are X for Informix. The values found in the create schema option clause. Access to the schema file is controlled by the presence of another file. The parameters file describes the network address and filename of the schema definition file. it is still advisable to use only one schema file. If the lock file does not exist. then the schema file is in use. The schema definition file consists of database and schema entries which are associated by a DBID (database ID) key value. There can be multiple schema entries for each database entry. The name of the schema lock file is the same as the schema file with the addition of the . Currently supported values are X for XNS. The location of the schema definition file must be in the ris/parameters file on the client machine. A line separates entries. It is stored in a central location on the network and is used by all RIS client programs to ensure that all RIS clients use the same set of schema definitions.

08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129.155 PROTOCOL= NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– DBID=1 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. one on the Clipper. There are two logical units. The environment that the RIS/DBMS uses.2._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . The valid value is lu6. the other on the IBM.February 2003 ARCH OS ENV The system architecture that the RIS/DBMS runs on.142. This value is case-sensitive. The name the IBM System Administrator called the RIS server when it was installed on the IBM. All users must be able to create and delete files in the directory where the schema file is located.08-00-36-32-e4-00 PROTOCOL=T NETADDR=129.2 and the default value is lu6. The valid value is mvs and the default value is mvs. NET_PROTOCOL RIS_LU or HOST_LU MODE HOST_PROGRAM A schema file must be readable and writable by all users.142. This value is case-sensitive. This value is case-sensitive. The name the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the mode that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine. The operating system that the RIS/DBMS uses. the name of the Clipper System Administrator assigned to the logical unit that allows communication to the RIS program on the IBM machine.135. This value is case-sensitive. The valid value is s370 and the default value is s370. The valid value is cics and the default value is cics. Following is a sample schema definition file: CHECKSUM:1249378903 TIMESTAMP:728930074 ——————————————————————————– DBID=2 DTYPE=X DBNAME=/usr/ee/sample_ref PROTOCOL=X NETADDR=0001349b. the CICS transaction name. The LU names are generated when RIS is installed.135.155 PROTOCOL= 562 . The network protocol that RIS uses to get to the IBM machine where the DBMS resides. This value is case-sensitive.

If the file is corrupted or removed. All these entries are created by the create schema statement. Currently.H:. This allows for additional protocols in the future._ _______________ Appendix L: NETADDR= PROTOCOL= NETADDR= DIR=/usr/informix SQLEXEC= DBTEMP= TBCONFIG= ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample_ref USR=ee USRPASS=pz_-!=%#oa/#@?%qHt%h&jXJ2vj(tyeY%i)pV BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=2 ——————————————————————————– SCHNAME=sample USR=ee USRPASS=’<j8.zW%wU5yg)U:IeK9tGB6R@Ezn:˜>’k BEGIN_GRANTEES END_GRANTEES DBID=1 RIS Schema Definition File L: Schema Definition Note that there is a list of protocols in the database entry. only the first protocol in the list will be used. they can be recreated by reissuing the create schema statements. 563 .

February 2003 564 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

_ _______________ Appendix M: EE Manager Appendix M EE Manager EE Manager is an environment created specifically for system manager functions. double click on the EE Manager icon to display the Verify Password form. if you are entering the environment for the first time. To run EE Manager. Make sure the directory path to the password file exists. Once you have successfully entered your password. The password file will be created the first time you enter EE Manager using the file name you specified. the EE Manager form displays: 565 . For detailed information on setting environment variables. Once SYS_PASSW_FILE is set. will prompt you to re-enter the password for verification. see Appendix N. SYS_PASSW_FILE=d:\users\EEpasswd where \users is the path and \EEpasswd is the password file name. M: EE Manager EE Manager will prompt you for a password and. It is a process separate from the EE environment and should only be run by a system manager or by someone who has a working knowledge of the overall EE system. the environment variable SYS_PASSW_FILE must be set to a complete path of a password file.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 The password can be a maximum of 8 characters and is not case sensitive. 566 . It uses DB Access to query and edit tables. In this Appendix Edit Database edits any schema that exists in the RIS dictionary. and update rows. delete rows.

The number on the button changes to reflect the row. From this screen you can edit the current find criteria. To go directly to a certain row. place the screen cursor on the slide bar button. this command finds all rows in the current table. press and hold the middle button on the mouse and drag the button._ _______________ Appendix M: Database Edit Functions Database Edit Functions To enter the Database Edit environment. These buttons include various Query functions. which allow you to search the database. save the current find criteria as a file to the attached library. Current Row — Controls the display of rows in the current universe. Release the mouse button to display the row. A universe is located by selecting Process Query in the Database Edit environment. 567 . which shows the current find criteria. delete. and functions which enable you to change. and insert a row or group of rows. Field Descriptions Initialize Query — Initializes (clears) the current find criteria. A group of rows that match the current "query" criteria is called a universe. M: EE Manager Buttons at the bottom of the Database Edit form provide functions for manipulating the attached relational database. select and confirm the Edit database option from the System Manager menu. or edit the value displayed in the field. You can place the screen cursor at any point along the slide bar and press <D> to move the slide bar button directly to a new row. Select the arrows to move forward and backward through the rows in the universe. Edit Query — Displays the Edit Query screen. If no find criteria exist. Process Query — Searches the database to find all rows of the current table that meet the find criteria. or load find criteria from a file in the attached library.

Relational Operators let you search for ranges of column values such as greater than and less than. 568 . the Database Edit screen has only Change Row fields._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 Review — Generates a formatted column-by-column listing of the current universe. The field under the AND/OR toggle lets you edit the active relational operator. Add Query — Used with the AND/OR toggle and relational operators to establish find criteria. Fields with these key-in modes are placed only when you customize a screen menu. which overrides the key-in mode for Key Columns. Change All — Changes the value for one or multiple columns for all rows in the current universe. You can either edit the displayed value or select the right side of the field (a small box with dashes). Delete All — Deletes all rows in the current universe from the database upon user verification. Add Query columns. Insert Row — Inserts a new row based on the column values for the displayed row. with logical AND having precedence over logical OR. Update Active — Lets you enter data without changing the displayed row in the database. you can enter data on the displayed row without changing the database. and Update Active fields. Selecting Add Query puts the screen in Add Query mode. When you select Update Active. By default. Fields On/Off — Toggles all column fields ON or OFF. Insert Row will not create a new row if a column is a SERIAL column (INFORMIX) or if it has a UNIQUE INDEX and a displayed column value duplicates the value for an existing row. Change Row — Activates the Change Row mode. Multiple column searches are processed in order. OR finds any row that contains either the previous find criteria or any current column value you specify. You can toggle individual fields ON or OFF by selecting the field’s corresponding column name on the Database Edit screen. you can use the Insert Row command to add the displayed data as a row to the database. You can use the Update Active command to enter the column values you want for a row and then Insert Row to create a row with the displayed information. As long as this command is active. AND finds any rows that contain both the previous find criteria and any current column value you specify. When you are certain the data is correct. The following are the available relational operators: = != < > <= >= !! : equal to (default) : not equal to : less than : greater than : less than or equal to : greater than or equal to : substring search The AND/OR toggle lets you establish either a logical AND or OR operation. You can also use the Update Active command to enter information for a new row when attaching new linkages in graphics. any key-in in the screen menu is added as find criteria and is NOT made as a change in the database. A box containing a list of the various relational operators displays. You can select a relational operator from the list to make it the active relational operator. You can generate a review for all rows with database linkages to graphic elements within a fenced area in a design file.

_ _______________ Appendix M: Delete Row — Deletes the displayed row from the database upon user verification. Database Edit Functions M: EE Manager 569 .

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 570 .

N: EE Configure User Environment Variables — The list below this label contains the list of all the environment variables along with their path. Variable — The field next to this label displays the Environment Variable name when any row is selected in the list menu. Value — The field next to this label displays the value of the Environment Variable when any row is selected in the list menu. Double-click on the EE Config icon to display the Configure EE Environment form. Reset — The Reset button writes the contents of the ee. Field Descriptions Enter the EE File Name — The field below this label contains the complete path and filename where the current configuration file ee.cfg file. 571 ._ _______________ Appendix N: EE Configure Appendix N EE Configure EE Configure is a process created specifically for setting environment variables for EE Raceway on a Windows NT platform. Delete — The Delete button deletes the corresponding variable and its value from the list. Set — The Set button writes the corresponding variable and its value to the list. This process is separate from EE Environment and allows changes to the value of a variable in the ee. Descrip — The field next to this label displays the description associated with the selected Environment Variable.cfg is located.cfg file to the list.

5. the Configure EE Environment form displays the list of user environment variables and their corresponding value. 4.February 2003 Browse — The Browse button lets you select the required ee. When complete. The corresponding value of the environment variable appears in the Value field. click on the Delete button. 2. 8. 3. The description. Double click on the EE Configure icon. To edit the values of other variables. Select the environment variable you want to change from the User Environment Variables list. appears in the Descrip field. Steps 1. Edit the entry in the Value field. This same field can be used to add a new variable.cfg file. To delete the variable. 7._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .cfg file. if any. 572 . continue the same process as above. Click on Cancel to disregard any changes. 6. The variable will no longer appear in the User Environment Variables list. The User Environment Variables list now contains the new value for this variable. click on OK to accept the changes and to overwrite the ee. The name of the environment variable appears in the Variable field. Click on the Set button to accept the new value.

All network operations (database. In network operations. unlike system software which runs other software. A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains a green check mark or the word confirm. Software designed to meet specific needs. active depth Glossary active process application software batch processing batch queue branch point cancel button N: EE Configure cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as a group. A group of columns defines a table in a database. A batch queue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batch options screen menu. Select the confirm button to initiate a specified option. The active process has a highlighted window icon strip. and the keyboard. A queue. A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can be assigned different segment parameters. a node which accesses data or performs a function on the remote resource (usually a server). character client column command confirm button 573 . A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data. and then manipulated as individual elements. it controls the message fields. A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into a group (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream without user intervention. the menus. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option._ _______________ Glossary absolute path name The sequence of directories. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. An attribute of a database table. Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data. The process which is displayed in the Process ID field. beginning with the root directory (/) that locates a file. created through NQS. or channel for moving requests. The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X or the word cancel. A branch point allows for placement of branch components. See also path name and relative path name. The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and perform manipulations. NFS.

place elements. or processed by a specific program. Other coordinate systems are used to more easily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system. or erase. interpreted. coordinates core files cursor data button data entry field data point database database table default delete delimiter device 574 . Also known as key-in field. eliminate. and user-generated quit signals. for example. A nonaddressable component of a network. and activate windows and perform window manipulations.February 2003 coordinate coordinate system The location of a point along the X. illegal instructions. and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on a cylinder. destroy. disk drive. To remove._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0. The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and contains information about the project and design elements. a component onto which a user cannot log. A separating mark or space. you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere. a character or sequence of contiguous characters that mark the end of a string of characters. the most common of which are memory violations. Normally. A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area. identify and accept elements. An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in a coordinate system. Y. whereby points are located by traversing the X.0. Data points select commands from the panel menus and Menu Bar. A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the design cube. A collection of comprehensive informational files having predetermined structure and organization that can then be communicated. though this is not required. For example. The image files written by System V for a number of reasons. and floppy disk. Y. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. tape drive. or Z axis. The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points.0. and Z axes of the design cube. to accept previously selected elements. and to select commands from forms and menus. that is. The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied by the system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user. bus errors.

difference in longitude. including the file name. a field. A term used in plane surveying that describes an east. or a checklist. header hierarchy icon Informix Ingres interference envelope 575 . a list of the data available for that field is displayed. such as a button.) of interest about which information is stored. a relational database table. A relational database management system supported by RIS. that responds to information. and so forth. The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. or positive. A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. Glossary A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field. A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents) for grouping files or commands. drawing. The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file. See also relative path name. An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. a symbol that graphically identifies a command. An object (project. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas. The set of acceptable values for a value within a component. domain dragging easting entity envelope file file specification filename form full path name N: EE Configure gadget A portion of a form. you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation. When selected._ _______________ directory display-list box A file that contains the names of other files. Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an element so you can see it move. Input can then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in the information. The header contains information on the structure and contents of the file. Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology to distinguish them from primitives. See interference envelope. An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used in conjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking. A pictorial representation or image. element. The name should be relevant to the contents of the file. Because many of the screen menus in the application software are built with I/FORMS. A path name that tells the system where to locate a file. A relational database management system supported by RIS.

Network File System. The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you are working in a design file. a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base. An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle to individual rows of the table. The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. The network enables the connected nodes to share data and system control. or alias._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . the Current Command field. to which you can snap. or it can mean the connected system. including vertices. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicate with another node in the network. Also known as a data entry field. the system that provides access to data that is distributed among machines through an interconnection of host computers and workstations. The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it is manufactured. A point on an element. and the Key-in field. key key-in field keypoint keyword menubar message area model network NFS node node address node name northing 576 . A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certain function. A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinate system.February 2003 invert elevation isometric The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your local workstation so you can access the data as though it were local. Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at right angles. A name. It is divided into the Command Status field. the Prompt field. An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them to share data and control. that can be assigned to the node address of a device on a network. The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selecting commands. A graphic representation or schema. NFS is usually used to access centralized data on a server. The term network can mean the devices that connect the system. Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connected to a network.

report formats and other information of a similar manner. Reference Database. RDB reference database relative path name rotate 577 . The sequence of directories leading to a file. Plant Design System A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues on remote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response. the point where the x._ _______________ nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection point to piping. See also path name and absolute path name. or indicate a specific point in the design file. A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary. NQS Glossary Oracle origin origin point orthogonal view parameter path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading to a command. and is three-dimensional. A relational database management system supported by RIS. Use of NQS involves setting up local resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside and setting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to the resources. but is level. to transform by revolution about a specific axis. path name PDS pipe queue N: EE Configure place data point plane To identify a specific element. label descriptions. A collection of reference data containing information relative to industry design codes. y. but rather represents the face-of-flange coordinate. having no elevations or depressions. to change the angular orientation. the software package that allows you to define network-wide batch and device queues. To turn. commodity libraries. In coordinate geometry. A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines which are orthogonal to the plane. The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particular file. A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance. graphics symbology. and z-axes intersect. See also absolute path name and relative path name. The point at which the coordinate system is placed. job specifications. vendor’s catalog data. Network Queuing System.

dash-dot. A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values. that are stored in an attribute.y. and querying relational databases. One collection of column values for a table. and so forth. The software uses virtual memory to store data. The x. the node which maintains common data or performs a common task needed by clients. the software can perform processing more quickly. modifying. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented as a coordinate triple (x. The display style of an element. External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extension of the computer’s internal memory. including color. and weight. The defined area of vision on a screen.z). either entered by the user or determined by the software. The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a data point while the element changes as you move the cursor. To switch. stay on the disk until they are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores a minimal amount of data. A collection of data for quick reference.February 2003 row A unit of related information in a table. A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database. Language developed by IBM for creating. A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database. In network operations. NFS. A view allows you to see a prescribed volume of the design cube. rubberbanding schema schema file server Structured Query Language SQL style surface symbology table toggle user name values variable vector view virtual memory 578 . solid. The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes. A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction. A name that provides access to an account on the system. The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation with respect to the design cube. NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship. while the z-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you. y. The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element. Data. either stored in sequential locations in memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of the same type. See also active depth. to change between two alternatives._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . and z axes. generally represented as a line. All network operations (database. style.y plane of the view is parallel to the screen. Views are created with their own x. This means that unneeded files and data.

_ _______________ working directory The directory from which you are accessing files. Glossary N: EE Configure 579 .

February 2003 580 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

235 source column 179. 234. 550 bin/ 521. 234 select button 180. 290 activate design volume coordinate system 320 plant coordinate system 320 active angle 256 one-line type parameters access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 save to memory 289 select 290 parameters 146 point coordinates display 121 define 145 active coordinate system 320 add query 568 systems 245 airway place 132 alias. 234 override button 180. 109. 234 model 285 one-line 178. 527 attributes default 430 setting raceway 256 automatic fit 151 propagation 298 size 151 B background 522 bar commands palette 98 basic concepts database 115 drawing 108 propagation 113 setup 27. 415. 233 RCP 178 annot_form 529 application manager information 27. 527 blank part ids 552 C cable code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 Index N: EE Configure 581 . 235 override keys 179.cmd 529. 539 alter schema form 556 table form 559 angle active 256 annotate element 178 access column 179. 234 list column 179. 235 display toggle 179. 327. 110 workstation skills 26 batch 522 bill of materials 549 by volume 72._ _______________ Index A access column 179. 425 approval status codelist 432 archive form 46 option 86 archive project network protocol TCP/XNS 46 remote node name/address 46 asid id display 316 highlight 309 assign 522. 234 by group 233 clear button 180.

_ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 276 model 271 library 269.msg 529 commands construct point 123 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 Commands Integrated 368 compile eden symbol 349 compress eden symbol library 359 conduit place 132 place stub up 167 seamless tubing 114 sizing 155 attributes 268 config/ 522. 271 cfg/ 527 change all 568 row 568 change system parameters 221 changing one-line type 294 parameters one-line type 289 propagation 297 raceway 256 symbology 264 system 295 cleanup database 340 clear annotate element 180. 279 equipment pointer 274. 235 one-line type parameters 291 clip 522 clone element 188 by group 239 codelists 432 approval status 432 cardinal point 433 drawing type 433 manual fitting 433 one-line type 434 RCP type 435 system 435 three-line qualifier 437 subtype 437 type 436 units 438 vendor 438 wire/cable code 439 color 441 configuration 440 insulation type 444 voltage 443 codelists (continued) wire/cable size 440 yes/no 445 coincident RCP checks 209 color parameters 256 combine coincident RCPs 209 command palettes 97 command. 278. 527 construct point 123 construction class display 306 control number 165 set symbology 262 symbology 264 coordinate system design volume 320 plant 320 show active 320 coordinate system 320 coordinates display 121 copy clone element 188 by group 239 element 184 by group 231 menu 43 option 78 582 . 275.February 2003 cable (continued) size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 cardinal point codelist 433 cell create commands 269 drop point 277.

522 cross section ductbank definition 164 rotate 140 rotation angle 256 scale factor 256 crosses 195 cutback mode 150 D data definition form 557 files 522. 332 batch file 335 palette 102 procedures 427 project 115 reference 115 relational 427 report 326 rule checks 329 setup 33 database (continued) utilities 50 RIS schema utilities 51 update project schema 52 update reference schema 55 db/ 523. 279 equipment pointer 274. 278. 425 cleanup 340 edit 567 add query 568 change all 568 change row 568 current row box 567 delete all 568 edit query 567 initialize query 567 insert row 568 process query 567 review 568 toggle 568 update active 568 load 323. 276 model 271 menu 39 option 61 schema form 555 tables 558 drop mode 558 insert mode 558 modify mode 558 three-lines 194 create_db 428._ _______________ create cell 269 drop point 277. 528 dba_rpt 522 dba_shell 522 DbEdit 567 defaults attributes 430 raceway 256 RCP key 257 text 266 define active point 145 duct cross section 164 group 226 one-line type 260 parameters 146 raceway defaults 256 system 258 delete all 568 duplicate one-lines 211 eden symbol 351 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 menu 44 one-line vertex 217 option 79 RCP 214 design commands 129 conduit sizing 155 define duct cross section 164 file command menu bar 96 insert one-line vertex 160 insert RCP 138 option 63 palette 99 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 manual fitting 147 one-line 132 rotate cross section 140 route around vessel 135 set Index N: EE Configure 583 . 527 database 321. 275.

279 keys 431 place 142 schema form 556 table form 559 ductbank cross section definition 164 place 132 duplicate one-line checking 211 DVCS 320 E eden/ 528 eden example 514 list functions 355 mode 113 eden (continued) option 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 347 compile symbol 349 compress symbol library 359 delete symbol 351 edit symbol file 366 extract symbol 361 extract user function 363 list symbol library 353 list user functions 355 merge symbol libraries 357 symbol compile 349 compress library 359 delete 351 edit file 366 extract 361 generation 513 list library 353 merge libraries 357 processor file 513 user function extract 363 eden. 278.February 2003 design (continued) set (continued) active parameters 146 unload 336 design volume coordinate system 320 dgn/ 528 directory structure 520 display annotation 306 asid id 316 construction class 306 element information 301 element type 316 field 121 link 317 one-line type 318 screen 93 sector/word 315 system 318 toggle annotate element 179. 234 one-line type parameters 290 document organization 19 outline 25 purpose 19 downloading 29 drawing process 108 setup 110 type codelist table 433 drop point create cell 277._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat 528 edit eden symbol file 366 manual fitting 198 model annotation 285 query 567 EE configure 571 databases 425 environment 35 forms archive 46 restore 48 manager 565 menus 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 nucleus file structure 520 raceway file structure 524 584 .

_ _______________ ee. 79.msg 529 errors messages 377 propagation 314 extend/reduce run 125 extract eden symbol from library 361 eden user function from library 363 F field routed raceway 161 filename highlight asid id 309 highlight link 312 files data 522. 275. 87. 83.cmd 543 seed English 528 metric 528 structure EE nucleus 520 EE raceway 524 fittings 195. 84. 82. 81. 78. 89 palette 97 palettes 97 elbows 195 elements annotate 178 by group 233 clone 188 by group 239 copy 184 by group 231 delete 212 by group 251 display information 301 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 identifying 103 modify commands 173 modifying 175 move 186 placing 129 propagate 194 by group 241 type display 316 engineering units 267 enter menu 40 environment EE 35 EE Raceway 59 variables 422 environment rules for fittings 446 environments graphics palettes 97 equipment pointer create 274.bar 529 eeconfig 522 eemgr 522 eeprj 522 eeqpr 522 EERWAY command menu bar 96 environment 59 create 61 design 63 eden 67 batch mode 69 operating modes 68 processes 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 reports 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75. 80. 527 eden symbol processor 513 password 565 purge 81 rway. 512 delete 216 edit/insert manual fitting 198 environment rules 446 place by rule 207 by group 243 place manual fitting 147 floppy/network toggle 86 Index N: EE Configure 585 . 86. 276 keys 431 place 144 error.

342. 357. 271 eden symbol 353. 266 graphics environment palettes 97 group annotate 233 copy 231 define 226 delete 251 minimize joints 248 propagate 241 H help_graphics 528 help_rway._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .February 2003 force 555 forms/ 523 forms maximize/minimize 120 precision input customizing 417 function eden library 355 G graphic symbology 262. 290 eden symbol library 353 user functions 355 load 527 database 323.s 528 help_source/ 528 highlight element by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 horizontal spacing 165 I identifying elements 103 IGDS toggle 83 increase size only 157 increase/decrease size 157 information about elements 301 initialize query 157. 344 introduction 25 J joints minimize 219 by group 248 K key-ins precision 104. 234. 359.hp 528 help_rway. 264. 567 input precision 119 insert one-line vertex 160 RCP 138 row 568 installation 27 databases 33 downloading 29 Integrated Commands 368 palette 97 Using 369 interference detection 118. 119 keys 430 drop point 431 equipment pointer 431 one-line 430 override 115 RCP 431 L levels set active 299 library cell 269. 361 eden user function 363 eden user functions 355 link display 317 highlight 312 list column 179. 332 batch file 335 lock model 282 M main form EE archive 46 restore 48 586 .

_ _______________ main menu EE 36 copy 43 create 39 database utilities 50 delete 44 enter 40 product menu 42 EERWAY create 61 design 63 eden 67 processes 64 report 70 rule checks 73 utilities 75 manual fitting edit/insert 198 part codelist table 433 place 147 material takeoff 548 maximize form 120 menu. 529 mslink display 317 highlight 312 Index N: EE Configure 587 .cfg 527 menus 91 command menu bar 96 directory 528 EERWAY command menu bar 96 menu_shell 522 merge eden symbol libraries 357 merge_pnl/ 529 merge_pnl 529 messages display fields 93 error 377 MicroMenu umenu 543 midpoint on segment 123 minimize form 120 minimize joints 219 by group 248 model annotate 285 move annotation 283 commands 280 using 281 create model cell 271 lock 282 unlock 284 model commands palette 101 modify 173 add systems by group 245 annotate element 178 by group 233 clone element 188 by group 239 combine coincident RCPs 209 copy element 184 by group 231 define group 226 delete duplicate one-lines 211 element 212 by group 251 fitting 216 one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 edit/insert manual fitting 198 elements 175 group commands 223 define group 226 minimize joints 219 by group 248 move element 186 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 one-line route 204 palette 99 place fitting by rule 207 by group 243 propagate element 194 by group 241 reference schema 451 remove RCP 214 replace systems by group 246 modify element palette 98 modify group palette 100 move element 186 model annotation 283 move/move to toggle 121 one-line segment 190 one-line vertex 192 mscrecol.sh 522 msg/ 523.

hp 528 mstr_rway. 235 keys 115. 52.dgn 528 mstr_rway. 290 one-line type parameters 291 setting 263 P palettes bar commands 98 database 102 design 99 EERWAY 97 Integrated Commands 97 MicroStation commands 98 model commands 101 modify 99 modify element 98 modify group 100 runtime setup 101 setup commands 100 utilities 102 parameters active 111 active angle 256 color 256 one-line type 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 propagation 297 raceway 256 set active 146. 48. 179. 289 part verification 297 password echo toggle 46. 234.s 528 N network/floppy toggle 86 new users database preparation 427 nucleus file structure 520 O one-line annotate 233 changing sizes 178.February 2003 msseed. 233 delete duplicates 211 vertex 217 insert vertex 160 keys 430 modify route 204 move segment 190 move vertex 192 place 132 route around vessel 135 type codelist table 434 define 260 display 318 parameters 289 access column 290 clear 291 display toggle 290 list column 290 override 291 override keys 290 save to memory 289 select 290 priority 434 set active 294 types 110 output option 89 override button annotate element 180._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 55 file 565 PCS 320 PDS reference model from 372 review attributes 371 review clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 percent fill 157 percentage of raceway changing 221 place drop point 142 equipment pointer 144 field routed raceway 161 fitting by rule 207 by group 243 manual fitting 147 588 .

55. 132 RCP 138 stub up 167 placepoint 150 plant coordinate system 320 precision input 119 active point coordinates display 121 construct point 123 customizing 417 display fields 121 extend/reduce run 125 midpoint on segment 123 move/move to toggle 121 key-ins 104 prerequisite 26 print._ _______________ place (continued) one-line 112. 65 processor file 513 product menu 42 removal 521.dat 522. 344 load database 332 batch file 335 option 64 batch mode 66 operating modes 65 unload design 336 sheet 338 processing toggle 53. 297 parameters 111 part verification 297 setup 297 style 297 purge option 81 Q query add 568 edit 567 initialize 567 process 567 R raceway defaults set 256 field routed 161 processes 331 RCPs 112 combine coincident RCPs 209 default key 257 delete 214 insert 138 keys 431 type codelist table 435 weight 257 README 521.def 521. 527 project database 115 schema description 487 drawing list 547 schema general description 448 update 449 prompt. 533 processes 331 cleanup database 340 eden 347 interference detection 342. 297 sketch 113.dat 528. 527 receive option 84 reduce run 125 reducers 195 reeprj 522 reference database 115 schema description 454 guide 25 schema 510 description 430 modifying 451 updating 449 Index N: EE Configure 589 . 527 product. 567 process. 536 priority 434 procedures 107 process query 157.msg 529 propagate 113 automatic propagation 298 element 194 by group 241 fittings 195 highlight errors 314 modes 297 eden 113.

cmds 528 rwayh_pnl 529 rway.sym 529 rway.pnl 529 rwaypnl. 545 bill of materials 549 by volume 72.February 2003 reference PDS model 372 relational databases 427 interface system (RIS) 426 report processing 545 relational interface system (RIS) alter schema 556 alter table 559 data definition 557 drop schema 556 drop table 559 schema creation 555 schema file 560 set 560 table creation 558 table information 557 remove one-line vertex 217 RCP 214 script 521. 527 rename option 82 replace systems by group 246 report.dat 528. 550 blank part ids 552 database 326 directory 529 material takeoff 548 option 70 project drawing list 547 templates 546 restore form 48 option 87 restore project from archive TCP/XNS toggle 48 XNS/TCP toggle 48 review PDS attributes 371 PDS clash 375 RIS 115. 534 reports 117.tbl 529 rway_ref. 487 drop 556 file 560 590 . 327. 426 procedures 427 schema manager 553 alter schema form 556 alter table form 559 create schema form 555 create table form 558 data definition form 557 RIS (continued) schema manager (continued) drop schema form 556 drop table form 559 force 555 schema file form 560 schema information form 554 set form 560 table information form 557 schema utilities 51 rotate cross section 140 orientation 151 rotation angle cross section 256 rule checks database 329 option 73 templates 546 rule_chk.sym 529 rway_prj.tbl 529 S save to memory 289 scale factor cross section 256 schema 115 create 555 definition file 561 fields 561 description 454. 535 runs 112 runtime setup 287 display element information 301 palette 101 propagation setup 297 set active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 system 295 rway_bar 528 rwaybar._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .dat 528.cmd file 543 rway.

529 symbol eden compile 349 compress 359 delete 351 extract 361 list library 353 merge libraries 357 file edit eden 366 generation 513 example 514 processor file 513 symbology 110 changing 264 control 264 Index N: EE Configure 591 . 449 project 449 reference 449 utilities 51 screen display 93 seamless tubing 114 sector/word display 315 highlight 307 seed/ 528 seed._ _______________ schema (continued) information form 554 modifying reference 451 names 450 project 448 reference 430 update 428.dgn 528 select button annotate element 180. 235 one-line type parameters 290 send option 83 set 560 active levels 299 one-line type 294 one-line type parameters 289 parameters 146 point 145 system 295 conduit sizing attributes 268 defaults 256 symbology control 262 text defaults 266 setup commands 253 conduit sizing attributes 268 create cell 269 define one-line type 260 system 258 lock model 282 model 280 model annotation 285 move 283 propagation 297 set raceway defaults 256 symbology control 262 setup (continued) set (continued) text defaults 266 symbology control 264 system manager 27. 233 sizing conduit 155 sizing attributes 268 sketch mode 113 skills workstation 26 software downloading 29 source column 179.msg 529 straights 195 structure EE Raceway 524 file 520 stub up 167 subsystems 295 sym/ 523. 234 SPEC process 507 specification 507 specification tables 510 start-up sequence 92 status. 109 unlock model 284 setup commands palette 100 sheet unload 338 show active coordinate system 320 size changing one-line size 178.

109. 65 tools reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 review PDS clash 375 window to named PDS item 374 tray place 132 tray_part table 511 tray_spec table 510 typefaces 21 U umenu 543 undelete 80 units codelist table 438 engineering 267 working 104 . 55.February 2003 symbology (continued) control (continued) set 262 system 110. 52. 449 project 52._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide . 449 upgrading workstation 28 user function eden extract 363 utilities 303 display element type and asid id 316 link 317 sector/word 315 system and one-line type 318 highlight by asid id 309 by link 312 by sector/word 307 propagation errors 314 option 75 archive 86 copy 78 delete 79 output 89 purge 81 receive 84 rename 82 restore 87 send 83 undelete 80 palette 102 reference PDS model 372 review PDS attributes 371 592 . 295 add 245 codelist table 435 define 258 display 318 manager information 27.unl files 509 unload 527 design 336 sheet 338 unlock model 284 update active 568 schema 428. 415. 449 reference 55. 48. 425 replace systems group 246 set active 295 system percentage changing 221 T tables codelists 432 information form 557 TCP/XNS protocol archive project 46 TCP/XNS toggle restore project from archive 48 templates reports 546 rule checks 546 text defaults 266 set 266 text nodes 266 text strings 266 nodes 266 strings 266 three-line codelist table 436 create 194 qualifier codelist table 437 subtype codelist table 437 tmp/ 529 toggle construction display on/off 306 IGDS 83 network/floppy 86 password echo 46. 55 processing 53.

_ _______________ utilities (continued) review PDS clash 375 schema 51 toggle construction display on/off 306 window to named PDS item 374 V vendor codelist table 438 specification 507 vertical spacing 165 vessel routing around 135 volume bill of materials 72. 110 symbology 110 systems 110 working units 104 workstation skills 26 upgrading 28 wyes 195 X XNS/TCP toggle archive project 46 Index N: EE Configure 593 . 327. 550 W weight RCP 257 window to named PDS item 374 wire code codelist 439 color codelist 441 configuration codelist 440 insulation type codelist 444 size codelist 440 voltage codelist 443 wireway place 132 workflow 107 databases 115 drawing process 108 drawing setup 110 eden symbol generation 513 one-line types 110 parameters 111 place one-line 112 propagation 113 propagation parameters 111 reports 117 setup 109.

February 2003 594 ._ _______________ EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide .

** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200005B.00. .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200005C For PDS version 07.02.

..................................................... 617 Rotate Group.................... 623 Mirror Copy Group............................... 598 Load Reference Schema ...............................................................EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Table of Contents PDS Electrical Raceway Environment ............................................................ 633 EE Nucleus File Structure .................................. 637 596 ................................................................................................................. 599 Utilities .......................................................................................................2) .................................................................................................................3) ..................................... 597 Modeling..........2)................................................. 619 Rotate Copy Group .............................................................. 611 Mirror Element ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 634 EE Raceway File Structure................................................................. 613 Mirror Copy Element.................................................................. 607 Rotate Element..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................4)............... 629 EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) .................................................................. 628 Reference PDS Model (replaces 16....................................................... 625 Move Group.. 615 Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. 602 Modify Element Commands (replaces 9........................................................................................................... 621 Mirror Group ...................................................... 609 Rotate Copy Element.................................................................................................................................... 631 EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) ................................................. 627 Annotate Model.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 601 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5..........................................

and rule checks.PDS Electrical Raceway Environment When you select the Electrical Raceway Environment command on the PD_Shell form. 597 . Utilities – Allows you to access EE Raceway commands for EE Raceway processes. Commands Modeling – Allows you to open a design file in the PDS Raceway modeling environment. reporting. EDEN symbols. the EE Raceway Environment form displays. Load Reference Schema – Allows you to update the Raceway reference schema.

The selected model displays in MicroStation. 4. 2. The Raceway Designer form displays. Click Accept. 598 . Select a design area from the list. Select a model from the list. Click Accept. 3.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Modeling This option allows you to select a design file to open in the modeling environment. Steps 1.

SQL Filename – Specifies the file name of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.sql file. The process replaces the old table definition with the new table definition. SQL File Path – Specifies the file path of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure.unl files that are listed in the . — Load those tables that have unique index numbers with data from the . or to modify the tables in an existing RIS schema to conform to the structure of a given . CMD File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the CMD file that defines which . If you update the schema with a . SQL File Network Address – Specifies the network address of the SQL file containing the correct table and column structure. Field Descriptions Reference Schema – Specifies the reference schema for the active project.sql file.unl files to load into which tables.sql file.cmd files. You can use this command to update an existing empty RIS schema with EE tables and default information.Load Reference Schema This option allows you to update the reference schema for the active project. 599 . — Modifies existing tables if the definition of that table has changed in the . If a table lacks a unique index.sql file. the process loads it only if the table is empty. the command makes the following changes: — Adds new tables listed in the . keeping column data where column names match.sql file that has a different structure from the original .

unl files to load into which tables. 600 . CMD Filename – Specifies the file name of the CMD file that defines which .unl files to load into which tables.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 CMD File Path – Specifies the file path of the CMD file that defines which .

EDEN. Refer to section 4 and Appendix J of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command.Utilities This option accesses the EE Raceway Process. These rule checks are reports that identify violations of certain design rules by working on the project database. Report – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway reports. Refer to sections 4 and 15 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command. Commands Process – This command accesses all available EE Raceway processes. These processes allow you to manipulate drawings and the project database. 601 . These reports contain information on the project and reference databases. EDEN – This command allows you to design and maintain your own symbols for Raceway elements. Report. and Rule commands. Rule – This command accesses the standard EE Raceway Rule Checks. Refer to section 5 and Appendix J for more information on this command. Refer to sections 4 and 14 of the EE Raceway Reference Guide for more information on this command.

Palettes are groups of commands that are accessible from the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Mirror.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Palettes in the EE Raceway Graphics Environment (replaces 5. then selecting EERWAY from the resulting menu.1 version of the document). and Mirror Copy commands on the Modify Element and Modify Group palettes • Move Group command on the Modify Group palette See the following text for details. 602 . Rotate Copy. You should become familiar with the name and functionality of each command on each palette. • This section presents the palettes that are used in the EE Raceway graphics environment.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 103-108 in the PDS 7. The following information has been modified: Rotate. then selecting Integrated Commands > Palette from the resulting menu. Integrated Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. Each command is described in full in later sections of this text. EERWAY This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. This section presents the palettes in the order that they are accessible if you look at each menu going from left to right across the EERWAY command menu bar on the MicroStation command window. Next to each icon is the name of the form or command it represents.

then selecting Palette. Modify Element This palette is activated by selecting Modify Element from the EERWAY palette. or it can be activated by selecting Modify Element from the Modify palette as shown later in this section. This palette can also be activated by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. This palette contains the MicroStation commands as discussed in the MicroStation documentation. then selecting Modify Element Commands from Modify menu.Bar Commands This palette is activated by selecting File from the MicroStation command window. 603 . then selecting Bar Commands from the resulting menu.

Modify This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. then selecting Palette from the resulting menu.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Design This palette is activated by selecting Design from the MicroStation command window. 604 . then selecting Modify from the resulting menu.

then selecting Palette. You can also activate this palette by selecting Modify from the MicroStation command window. 605 . then selecting Modify Group Commands. then selecting Palette.Modify Group This palette is activated by selecting Modify Group from the Modify Palette. Setup Commands This palette is activated by selecting Setup from the MicroStation command window.

606 . Runtime Setup This palette is activated by selecting Runtime from the MicroStation command window.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Model Commands This palette is activated by selecting Model Commands from the Setup Commands palette. then selecting Palette.

Rotate Copy. and three-lines. then selecting Modify Element Commands. and delete specified elements. • The Modify Element palette is activated by selecting the Modify Element command from the Modify palette. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. three-lines. You can use individual commands to move. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements. onelines.1 version of the document). Move Element — Moves an element to a specified location in the design file. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements.Modify Element Commands (replaces 9. Modify Element commands also allow you to propagate one-lines in your raceway model. Copy Element — Copies an element as specified within the design file. Clone Element — Copies an element multiple times in the same direction. annotation. The Modify Element commands manipulate individual elements. including RCPs.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 181-182 in the PDS 7. reviews. then selecting Palette. to review or edit element annotation. within the design file. copy. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model. Mirror. 607 . Annotate Element — Places. and so forth). and to check for duplicate one-lines and coincident RCPs in the design file. and Mirror Copy commands See the following text for details. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. The following information has been modified: Rotate.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Move One-Line Segment — Moves a one-line segment while maintaining connectivity to existing elements. Delete Fitting — Removes fittings from the design file. Delete Element — Removes a valid raceway element. Change System Parameters — Changes the system percentage and the project rule for a selected element. Rotate Element — Rotates an element to a specified location in the design file. Propagate Element — Expands one-line elements into three-dimensional elements. Modify One-Line — Modifies the route of an existing one-line element. Check Coincident RCPs — Checks for coincident RCPs in the design file. Move One-Line Vertex — Moves an internal one-line vertex. from the design file. Mirror Copy Element — Copies an element and flips the copy about a specified point in the design file. 608 . Place Fitting by Rule — Places a non-standard fitting at an RCP using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Remove One-Line Vertex — Deletes an internal vertex from an existing one-line. Remove RCP — Deletes a specified RCP (raceway connect point) from the design file. and elements associated with it. Rotate Copy Element — Copies an element and rotates the copy to a specified location in the design file. Edit/Insert Manual Fitting — Modifies fittings that were manually placed in the model. Check Duplicate One-lines — Checks for duplicate or overlapping one-lines in the design file. Mirror Element — Flips an element about a specified point in the design file. Minimize Joints — Reduces the number of vertices in an identified one-line to a minimum.

RCPs. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. To change the angle. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. equipment pointers. If a one-line is rotated.Rotate Element This command rotates individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. route one-lines. All associated annotation. reject input. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. and annotation. You can use this command to move one-lines. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. and equipment pointers will also be moved. accept input. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. All associated annotation. three-line fittings. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input. reset a command action. and exit a command. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. Using the form. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. If an RCP is rotated. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. 609 . drop points. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. see Precision Input Form. and equipment pointers will also be moved. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. three-line fittings.

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. 5. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The Specify Rotation form displays. 4. The element rotates to the specified position. 610 . Identify the element you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. 2. If you do not locate an acceptable element. Click Accept. the system displays the message Element not found. Specify the point around which to rotate the element. Select the Rotate Element command. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. Steps 1. The system highlights the specified element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. The Rotate Element precision input form displays. 3. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form.

click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. Using the form.Rotate Copy Element This command creates rotated copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. At any point during this operating sequence. accept input. see Precision Input Form. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the angle. and exit a command. You can use this command to copy and rotate one-lines and their associated elements. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. reset a command action. reject input. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the plan view plane. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. route one-lines. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the east elevation plane. 611 . North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the element on the north elevation plane. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. you can locate elements. For detailed information about precision input.

5. 2. Click Accept. Identify the element you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. 612 . Specify the point around which to rotate the element. The system highlights the specified element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Steps 1. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The element copy displays at the specified position. The Specify Rotation form displays. 3. 4. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the element. the system displays the message Element not found. Select the Rotate Copy Element command. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. The Rotate Copy Element precision input form displays.

RCPs. You can use this command to mirror one-lines. For detailed information about precision input. three-line fittings. select the field and type a new angle. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Using the form. route one-lines. reset a command action. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. If an RCP is rotated. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. drop points. If a one-line is mirrored. accept input. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. equipment pointers. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. To change the displayed axis. All associated annotation. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis.Mirror Element This command flips individual raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. At any point during this operating sequence. see Precision Input Form. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. To reset a 613 . and equipment pointers will also be moved. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. To change the displayed angle. and annotation. Secondary. and equipment pointers will also be moved. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and exit a command. All associated annotation. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. you can locate elements. reject input. three-line fittings.

5. The Orient Mirror form displays. 4. The system highlights the specified element. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the element. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. Steps 1. Select the Mirror Element command. Identify the element you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 2. Click Accept. the system displays the message Element not found. The Mirror Element precision input form displays. The element rotates to the specified position. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 614 . If you do not locate an acceptable element.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Specify the point about which to mirror the element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. 3.

the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. To change the displayed angle. Using the form. see Precision Input Form. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. reset a command action. route one-lines. You can use this command to copy and mirror one-lines and their associated elements. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Secondary. For detailed information about precision input. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. accept input. Steps 1. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. At any point during this operating sequence. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. 615 . select the field and type a new angle. reject input. toggle among the three axes (Primary. Select the Mirror Copy Element command. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. and exit a command. To change the displayed axis. The Mirror Copy Element precision input form displays. you can locate elements. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form.Mirror Copy Element This command creates mirrored copies of individual raceway elements as specified within the design file. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee.

Specify the plane on which to mirror the element. Click Accept. 4. Identify the element you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. 5. The message disappears when you identify a valid element. the system displays the message Element not found. If you do not locate an acceptable element. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. 3. 616 . The Orient Mirror form displays.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. The system highlights the specified element. The element copy displays at the specified position. Specify the point around which to mirror the element.

You can also propagate onelines in a particular group using these commands. and to review or edit element annotation. and Move Group commands See the following text for details.Modify Group Commands (replaces 9. three-lines. Rotate Copy. annotation. The Modify Group palette is activated by selecting the Modify Group command from the Modify palette. Note: Do not use MicroStation commands to manipulate or modify EE Raceway elements (one-line. then selecting Palette. The Modify Group commands allow you first to define a group of elements and then to manipulate the group in part or as a whole. Mirror Copy. You can use individual Modify Group commands to move. Use only these EE Raceway modify commands to manipulate EE Raceway elements. Mirror. 617 . and delete elements of specified groups. • The Modify Group commands define and manipulate groups within a design file. Groups are temporary associations of Raceway and other elements in your model. The following information has been modified: Rotate. copy. or by selecting Modify from the EERWAY Command Menu Bar. and so forth).1 version of the document). then selecting Modify Group Commands.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 229-230 in the PDS 7. Doing so will cause serious problems and/or destroy the EE Raceway model.

Mirror Group – Mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Topics Define Group — Identifies raceway elements for inclusion in a particular group. Copy Element by Group — Copies within the design file some or all elements of a specified group. and edits intelligent annotation for raceway elements within a specified group. reviews. Replace Systems Group — Changes the defined active system type of a one-line. Rotate Group – Rotates some or all elements of a specified group to a new location in the design file. Add Systems Group — Defines multiple systems for a single one-line. Clone Group — Copies a group multiple times in the same direction. Rotate Copy Group – Copies and rotates some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Mirror Copy Group – Copies and mirrors some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Move Group – Moves some or all elements from a specified group to a new location in the design file. Minimize Joints by Group — Reduces to a minimum the number of vertices of some or all one-lines in a specified group. 618 . Annotate Element by Group — Places. Propagate Element by Group — Expands some or all one-line elements of a specified group into three-dimensional elements. Place Fitting by Rule Group — Places non-standard fittings using a set of rules defined in the reference database. Delete Element by Group — Removes from the design file some or all elements of a specified group.

and equipment pointers will also be moved. drop points. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. All associated annotation. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. If an RCP is rotated. route one-lines. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point. you can locate elements. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. You can use this command to move one-lines. If a one-line is rotated. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. three-line fittings. and equipment pointers will also be moved. accept input. 619 . North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. reset a command action. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. RCPs. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. and annotation. All associated annotation. and exit a command. three-line fittings. reject input. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. see Precision Input Form.Rotate Group This command rotates a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. equipment pointers. To change the angle. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

The system highlights the specified group. Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. The group rotates to the specified position. 620 . The Rotate Group precision input form displays. Steps 1. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. The Specify Rotation form displays. Select the Rotate Group command. For groups in Single Element mode. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Identify the group you intend to rotate and accept it with <D>. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Click Accept. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. 4. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. 3.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 At any point during this operating sequence. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. 5. 2. the system displays the message Group not found.

route one-lines. The selected elements are rotated about the up-down axis passing through the rotation point. Field Descriptions Rotation Point – Displays the location of the rotation point. Angle – Key-in field used to specify the angle for each plane. see Precision Input Form. At any point during this operating sequence. Using the form. The selected elements are rotated about the north-south axis passing through the rotation point. you can locate elements. reject input. To change the angle. North Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the north elevation plane. East Elevation – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the east elevation plane. accept input. For detailed information about precision input. click the button for the plane and type the angle in the Angle field. reset a command action. The selected elements are rotated about the east-west axis passing through the rotation point.Rotate Copy Group This command creates a rotated copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. Select the Rotate Copy Group command. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. 621 . and exit a command. Plan View – Specifies the angle at which to rotate the group on the plan view plane. Steps 1. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form.

Specify the planes and angles at which to rotate the group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the rotation point and planes for each accepted element. For groups in Single Element mode. The group copy displays at the specified position.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 The Rotate Copy Group precision input form displays. the system displays the message Group not found. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. Click Accept. Identify the group you intend to rotate and copy and accept it with <D>. The system highlights the specified group. 622 . 2. 4. Specify the point around which to rotate the group. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. 5. If you do not locate an acceptable group. The Specify Rotation form displays. 3.

The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new position of the RCP. and exit a command. all attached RCPs will be moved and all attached one-lines will be rerouted to the new one-line position. select the field and type a new angle. toggle among the three axes (Primary. three-line fittings. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. To change the displayed angle. Using the form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. Secondary. All associated annotation. and equipment pointers will also be moved. and equipment pointers will also be moved. To change the displayed axis. To reset a 623 . If one-lines are mirrored. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. see Precision Input Form. All associated annotation. For detailed information about precision input. reject input. and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. reset a command action. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. route one-lines. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. you can locate elements. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. three-line fittings. accept input.Mirror Group This command flips a group of raceway elements about a point as specified within the design file. If an RCP is rotated. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. At any point during this operating sequence. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal.

624 . the system displays the message Group not found. 3. 4. If you do not locate an acceptable group. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. Steps 1. For groups in Single Element mode. Click Accept. Select the Mirror Group command. The Orient Mirror form displays. Specify the mirror plane on which to mirror the group. The group moves to the specified position. The system highlights the specified group. Specify the point about which to mirror the group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element. Identify the group you intend to mirror and accept it with <D>. 2. The Mirror Group precision input form displays. 5.

you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. route one-lines. 625 . and the Normal axis with the positive Z axis. Select the Mirror Copy Group command. You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. To change the displayed axis. you can locate elements. Normal) until the appropriate axis displays. Using the form. For detailed information about precision input. Field Descriptions Mirror Point – Displays the location of the specified mirror point. The primary vector of the orientation tee denotes the mirror plane’s normal vector. At any point during this operating sequence.Mirror Copy Group This command creates a mirrored copy of a group of raceway elements as specified within the design file. The elements are rotated about the plane formed by the secondary and the normal. I Button – Reorients the orientation tee along the identity matrix. To change the displayed angle. Secondary. the Secondary axis with the positive Y axis. Steps 1. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. accept input. reset a command action. toggle among the three axes (Primary. see Precision Input Form. It realigns the Primary axis with the positive X axis. About – Specifies the axis about which to rotate the orientation tee. The Mirror Copy Group precision input form displays. select the field and type a new angle. reject input. Angle – Specifies the angle by which to rotate the orientation tee. and exit a command.

Specify the point around which to mirror the group. Specify the plane on which to mirror the group. 4. Click Accept. The group copy displays at the specified position. For groups in Single Element mode. 626 . The system highlights the specified group. The Orient Mirror form displays. 3. If you do not locate an acceptable group.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 2. 5. Note: These steps are applicable for groups in Entire Group mode. the system displays the message Group not found. Identify the group you intend to mirror and copy and accept it with <D>. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. you can accept or reject constituent elements and set the mirror point and mirror plane for each accepted element.

You must be familiar with precision input and its functions before using this command. and exit a command. The message disappears when you identify a valid group. see Precision Input Form. 2. Before Using This Command You can enter all values for the placement of points through a precision input form. The system highlights the specified group. 627 . the system displays the message Group not found. Specify an origin point from which to move the group. reset a command action. route one-lines. you can exit the command session either by pressing <Esc> or by selecting Cancel (X) on the precision input form. At any point during this operating sequence.Move Group This command moves a group of raceway elements to a new location in the design file. you can locate elements. 3. press <R> or select Reject on the precision input form. reject input. 4. For detailed information about precision input. Identify the group you intend to move and accept it with <D>. If you do not locate an acceptable group. Select the Move Group command. The Move Group precision input form displays. Steps 1. accept input. To reset a command action by one step or to reject a highlighted element. Using the form. Specify a placement point to which to move the group. The group moves to the specified position.

1 version of the document). Select Confirm to accept the new annotation. however. will prevent such duplication.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Annotate Model Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (p. The Annotate Element form displays. • This command adds or changes the annotation for the model. If you toggled Display to On. 4. The following information has been modified: Automatic sheet number See the following text for details. Select the Column value field for sheet on the form and key in a new sheet number. If the user does not specify a sheet number. Select the Annotate Model command. you are prompted to place the annotation in the model. 285 in the PDS 7. This command cannot prevent the duplication of sheet numbers within a project. The sheet number should be unique for each drawing. If you want to display the annotation in the model. toggle the Display fields in the form to On. Steps 1. 628 . —OR — Select Cancel (X) to exit the command without saving your changes. the sheet number is automatically set to match the . The Load Database process. 2.dgn file name of the raceway model. 3.

Snap. Select the design area that contains the model you want to attach.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 372-373 in the PDS 7. then. and Locate toggles See the following text for details. • The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS project to the model as reference files. 629 . The following information has been modified: Display. Areas – Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Snap Toggle –Allows you to snap to any segment in the reference file. Area/Model – Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual model. This option only displays if you are attaching a structural model. Select the discipline that contains the model you want to attach. click Attach.1 version of the document). — Attach by Area – Attaches all model in the selected design area. Parameters Disciplines – Lists all disciplines. then.Reference PDS Model (replaces 16. Propagated/Sparse – Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the corresponding propagated model. — Attach by Model – Displays all models in the design area so you can select which model you want to attach. The model to attach can be from any discipline and design area in the project. Display Toggle – Specify whether to display the reference model in the active model views. click Attach.

Attach – Attaches a reference model. Apply To Discipline – Defines the settings for the Display. or Locate toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model. Exit – Exits the Reference Model command. You must click Show Attachments and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach. 630 . You must select a Discipline and a Design Area before you can select a reference model to attach. Snap. or Locate toggles for all the attached models in all disciplines. Apply To All – Defines the settings for the Display. Detach – Detaches the selected reference model. Show Attachments – Displays all reference models attached to the active model. Snap.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 Locate Toggle – Allows you to data point to any component in the reference file.

Note: For project databases created with EE Raceway versions prior to 7.exe file See the following text for details. PROJECT_LOCATION. panel This table contains information about all panels/equipment found in the drawing. pds_north. it is necessary to use the ee72upg. and pds_elev columns to the panel and msconfig tables of the existing project database. and includes detailed information about the columns that comprise each table. Before running the upgrade utility.exe utility in the \eenuc\bin folder to add the new pds_east. and EE_SCHEMA. use EE Configure to verify that values are set for EERD_TBLS. Note: An asterisk (*) indicates that you must not modify the column name. The following information has been modified: PDS coordinates in Panel table • Note about ee72upg. Column Name mslink panel panel_descrip ee_approv_status ee_approv_date ee_create_date ee_last_rev_dat ee_eqp_table ee_part_key Type integer Char( 20) Char( 20) integer Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 26) Char( 32) Char( 28) Index uniq dups no no no no no no no Null no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 631 .EE Raceway Project Database Schema Description (replaces panel) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 487 and 500 in the PDS 7. You should not modify those column names having a prefix of "ee_".2. • This section lists and describes the tables in the EE Raceway project database schema.1 version of the document).

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 pds_east pds_north pds_elev real real real no no no yes yes yes mslink: a unique integer value used by the software to identify a row in the panel table. pds_north: the column containing the PDS north coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). panel: the column containing the panel/equipment name panel_descrip: the column containing the panel/equipment description. ee_approv_date: the column containing the date when the approval status changed. pds_elev: the column containing the PDS elevation coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). 632 . ee_last_rev_dat: the column containing the date the panel/equipment was last revised. ee_eqp_table: the column containing the name of the reference database table that contains additional equipment information. pds_east: the column containing the PDS east coordinate of the panel (calculated by Load Database). ee_part_key: the column containing the unique key to the appropriate record of equipment information in the reference database table. ee_approv_status: the column containing the approval status of the panel/equipment. ee_create_date: the column containing the panel/equipment creation date.

633 . It identifies those files you can modify. The following information has been modified: Windows folder listings replace CLIX directory structure See the following text for details. The directory tree for EENUC and EERWAY is shown below.EE File Structure (replaces Appendix F) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the EE Raceway Reference Guide (pp 529-540 in the PDS 7. the PDS Component Loader delivers these files to /win32app/ingr/.1 version of the document). • This section describes the file structure for EE Nucleus and EE Raceway. By default. It also describes the contents of directories and some files.

The list may differ slightly depending on which options are selected during installation..EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 EE Nucleus File Structure EE Nucleus (EE Nuc) is the core product for the EE product line. EE Nucleus will reside under the win32app\ingr\eenuc directory. The following files exist under the .\eenuc directory: \eenuc \eenuc\bin \eenuc\data \eenuc\db \eenuc\doc \eenuc\font \eenuc\forms 634 . The product may reside on any file system.

txt – File containing release notices. EE Nucleus. — dba_shell. etc. — create_db – create database process. and then invokes the EE environment.exe – command used to remove EE Nucleus from the machine. — batch – process that reports the exit status of a process run in batch mode. bin – contains the EE executable files and the environment process. — .\eenuc\help \eenuc\msg \eenuc\share \eenuc\sym The following list gives a brief description of some of the files.EErc – File containing global symbol definitions. comments. — EEnotice. eenuc — readme. — license. — remove. 635 . INFORMIX. — dba_rpt – DBAccess report process. The EE executable files set up variables specifying the location of MicroStation. and EE Raceway.txt – file containing description of product features and any fixes.cmd – command executed around dba_rpt. The files are grouped by directory.txt– copyright notice file. — background – process that reports the exit status of a process run in the background. problems.

dat – ASCII file for manager function management. — eeconfig – file that maintains EE product configuration for workstation/server. share sym – contains EE symbol files. — mscrecol.bat – batch file to print 132 column reports to the laser printer.cmd – command to create mscolumns table for reference database. — reeprj – remote environment process.exe – Electrical Engineer manager environment executable. db – directory that contains the DB Access menu library (mgrdba_lib). forms – directory that contains all the environment forms.exe – executable command that updates the EE Raceway Project Database. 636 . — eeprj. — dba* files – DB Access files. — Eemgr.exe – environment process. — eeqpr. doc – directory that contains documentation. — menu_shel.dat – ASCII file for output file management. — manager. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control certain environment procedures. help msg – contains EE Nucleus message files.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — ee72upg.cmd – command executed around eemgr to run the Edit Database process. — print. Required DBAccess files are also delivered in this directory.

EE Raceway File Structure This section lists and describes the directories and files delivered with EE Raceway. \eerway \eerway\bin \eerway\data \eerway\db \eerway\dgn 637 .

638 . eerway — readme. comments.txt – file containing a description of the product features and any fixes. problems.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 \eerway\doc \eerway\eden \eerway\mdlapps \eerway\msg \eerway\report \eerway\sym \eerway\tmp Delivered empty The following list gives a brief description of some of the files. etc. The files are grouped by directory.

— remove. — eden. — unload_cln – contains the unload sheet. — load – processor to load the project database. — process.exe – executable file used to remove EE Raceway from the machine. — report. dgn – Contains the seed file directory.dgn – displays the structure of the EE Schema. Also contains . — rule_chk.unl files required for bulk loading special tables and the mscatalog table in the project database. These files can be modified. Sample . — idet – Interference Detection Envelope File Creation process. available cell libraries. data – Contains the ASCII files used to control process and report management for the EE Raceway product. 639 . and clean database processes.dat – controls rule check report management.dat – controls standard report management. unload drawing. — rmon – Controlling processor for interactive manipulations. bin – contains all process delivered with the EE Raceway product.dat – controls Eden processes. and any design files delivered with the product. db – Contains the delivered sql files for the project and reference database. — rway_schma.unl files for bulk loading reference database tables are also provided.dat – controls process management.

dgn – explains the structure of the Raceway views. 640 .EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_view.

msg – message file containing all error messages for the error field.dgn – delivered metric drawing seed file. This may be customized.lib – the Eden symbol library file. — prompt. This may be customized. — eden. eden – contains the Eden symbol library.dgn – delivered English drawing seed file.— seed – contains the available seed design files. — command. — msseed.msg – message file containing all messages for the prompt field. This file can be extended. — alias.cmd – file used to correlate key-ins to commands. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. doc – contains documentation information on EE Raceway including README files from previous releases. 641 . — seed. mdlapps msg – Contains EE Raceway message files and the file to correlate key-ins to EE Raceway commands. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. — error.msg – message file containing all messages for the command field.

642 .tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the project database tables. tmp – Holds any temporary files. The software requires this directory. This directory also contains the available precision input forms. These messages can be edited but messages cannot be added. sym – Contains all symbol files for EE Raceway menus. There is an .msg – message file containing messages for status field.ace and an .arc) SQL files for all delivered sch reports.tbl – file containing the entity numbers for the reference database tables. — rwaydba_lib – DB Access template library.ace)and compiled (. — rway_ref. report – Contains the source (.arc file for each report listed below.EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003 — rway_prj. — status. The source files may be edited by the user.sym – symbol file for the panel menu.sym – symbol file for the bar menu. and logo. — rwaybar. — rwaypnl. prompting messages.

618 runtime setup. 605 modify element. 604. 616 modify. 626 Mirror Element command. 630 Load Reference Schema command. 629 Modify Element commands. 604 design. 626 modify. 634 EE Nucleus. 624 mirror copy. 622 Rotate Element command. 599 Rotate Copy Element command. 610. 602 Intergrated Commands.Index annotate model. 620 rotate copy. 606 PDS reference model. 614 mirror copy. 608 rotate copy. 622 intergrated commands Reference PDS Model. 612 file structure EE. 635 EE Raceway. 602 model commands. 628 rotate. 629 EE file structure. 620 schema load reference. 628 palettes bar commands. 635 Raceway file structure. 599 utilities. 614 Mirror Group command. 638 group mirror. 607 setup. 606. 612 Rotate Copy Group command. 607 modify. 599 Mirror Copy Element command. 624 model annotate. 630 reference schema load. 629 Annotate Model command. 602 EERway. 616 Mirror Copy Group command. 608 Modify Group commands. 618 move. 638 element mirror. 618 Move Group command. 608 modify group. 630 Reference PDS Model command. 601 643 . 634 Nucleus file structure. 610 Rotate Group command. 605 EE Raceway.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful